g-class · g-class operator'smanual orderno.6515417713 partno.4635845901 editiona2015...

350
G-Class Operator's Manual Order no. 6515 4177 13 Part no. 4635845901 Edition A 2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-Class Operator's Manual

Upload: others

Post on 21-Mar-2020

3 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

G-ClassOperator's Manual

Order no. 6515 4177 13 Part no. 4635845901 Edition A 2015

É4635845901mËÍ4635845901

G-Clas

sOperat

or'sM

anual

Page 2: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Publication detailsInternet

Further information about Mercedes-Benzvehicles and about Daimler AG can be foundon the following websites:http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canadaonly)

Editorial office

©Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translatedor otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,without written permission from Daimler AG.

Vehicle manufacturer

Daimler AGMercedesstraße 13770327 StuttgartGermany

SymbolsRegistered trademarks:RBluetooth® is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG Inc.RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.RDolby and MLP are registered trademarksof DOLBY Laboratories.RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® areregistered trademarks of Daimler AG.RHomeLink® is a registered trademark ofPrince.RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trade-marks of Apple Inc.RLogic7® is a registered trademark of Har-man International Industries.RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are reg-istered trademarks of Microsoft Corpora-tion.RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of SiriusXM Radio Inc.RHD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiq-uity Digital Corporation.RGracenote® is a registered trademark ofGracenote, Inc.RZAGATSurvey® and related brands are reg-istered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC.

In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-lowing symbols:

G WARNINGWarning notes draw your attention to hazardsthat endanger your health or life, or the healthor life of others.

H Environmental noteEnvironmental notes provide you with infor-mation on environmentally aware actions ordisposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you todangers that could lead to damage to yourvehicle.

i Practical tips or further information thatcould be helpful to you.

X This symbol indicates an instructionthat must be followed.

X Several of these symbols in succes-sion indicate an instruction with sev-eral steps.

(Ypage)

This symbol tells you where you canfind more information about a topic.

YY This symbol indicates a warning or aninstruction that is continued on thenext page.

Dis‐Dis‐playplay

This font indicates a display in themultifunction display/COMAND dis-play.

~ This symbol tells you that you can findfurther information in the DigitalOperator's Manual.

Parts of the software in the vehicle are pro-tected by copyright © 2005The FreeType Projecthttp://www.freetype.org. All rightsreserved.

As at 07.02.2014

Page 3: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-BenzWe urge you to read this Operator's Manualcarefully and familiarize yourself with thevehicle before driving. For your own safetyand a longer vehicle life, follow the instruc-tions and warning notices in this manual.Ignoring them could result in damage to thevehicle or personal injury to you or others.Vehicle damage caused by failure to followinstructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.The equipment or product designation of yourvehicle may vary depending on:RmodelRorderRcountry specificationRavailabilityMercedes-Benz therefore reserves the rightto introduce changes in the following areas:RdesignRequipmentRtechnical featuresThe equipment in your vehicle may thereforediffer from that shown in the descriptions andillustrations.The following are integral components of thevehicle:ROperator's ManualRMaintenance BookletREquipment-dependent supplementsKeep printed copies of the documents in thevehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle,always pass the documents on to the newowner.The technical documentation team atDaimler AG wishes you safe and pleasantmotoring.Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.A Daimler Company

4635845901 É4635845901mËÍ

Page 4: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual
Page 5: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Index ....................................................... 4

Introduction ......................................... 20

At a glance ........................................... 29

Safety ................................................... 39

Opening and closing ........................... 67

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 83

Lights and windshield wipers ............ 97

Climate control ................................. 117

Driving and parking .......................... 131

On-board computer and displays .... 195

Stowage and features ...................... 247

Maintenance and care ...................... 273

Roadside Assistance ........................ 289

Wheels and tires ............................... 305

Technical data ................................... 335

Contents 3

Page 6: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

1, 2, 3 ...4ETS (Electronic Traction System)

Function/notes ................................ 6312 V socket ........................................ 257115 V socket ...................................... 257

AABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Display message ............................ 213Function/notes ................................ 62Important safety notes .................... 62Warning lamp ................................. 237

AccidentAutomaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 52

ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 65Adaptive brake lights .......................... 63Additives (engine oil) ........................ 341Air bags

Deployment ..................................... 49Display message ............................ 218Front air bag (driver, frontpassenger) ....................................... 48Important safety notes .................... 47Introduction ..................................... 47PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica-tor lamp ........................................... 42Window curtain air bag .................... 49

Air ventsImportant safety notes .................. 128Rear ............................................... 129Setting ........................................... 128Setting the center air vents ........... 128Setting the side air vents ............... 128

Air-conditioning systemsee Climate control

Alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

All-wheel driveTransfer case ................................. 186

AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 209Anti-lock braking system

see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)Anti-theft alarm system

see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Approach/departure angle .............. 161

Ashtray ............................................... 255Assistance menu (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 205ASSYST service interval display

Service messages .......................... 279ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Activating/deactivating ................... 66Function ........................................... 66Switching off the alarm .................... 66

Authorized Mercedes-Benz Centersee Qualified specialist workshop

AUTO lightsDisplay message ............................ 221see Lights

Automatic car wash .......................... 281Automatic engine start (ECOstart/stop function) .................................... 137Automatic engine switch-off (ECOstart/stop function) .......................... 136Automatic headlamp mode .............. 100Automatic transmission

Automatic drive program ............... 144Display message ............................ 232Drive position (ECO start/stopfunction) ........................................ 141Driving tips .................................... 143Emergency running mode .............. 147Engaging drive position .................. 141Engaging neutral ............................ 141Engaging reverse gear ................... 140Engaging the park position ............ 140Important safety notes .................. 139Kickdown ....................................... 143Manual drive program .................... 145Neutral (ECO start/stop func-tion) ............................................... 141Overview ........................................ 139Problem (malfunction) ................... 147Program selector button ................ 143Pulling away ................................... 134Selector lever ................................ 139Shift ranges ................................... 145Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 144Trailer towing ................................. 143Transmission position display ........ 140

Automatic transmission emer-gency mode ....................................... 147

4 Index

Page 7: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Axle load, permissible (trailer tow-ing) ...................................................... 347

BBabySmart™

Air bag deactivation system ............. 56Backup lamp

Changing bulbs .............................. 113BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 62Battery

Checking (SmartKey) ....................... 70Important safety guidelines(SmartKey) ....................................... 70Replacing (SmartKey) ...................... 70

Battery (vehicle)Charging ........................................ 295Display message ............................ 223Important safety notes .................. 292Jump starting ................................. 296Overview ........................................ 292

Blind Spot AssistActivating/deactivating ................. 205Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 205Display message ............................ 227Notes/function .............................. 178

Brake fluidDisplay message ............................ 216Notes ............................................. 342

Brake fluid level ................................ 279Brake lamps

Adaptive ........................................... 63Display message ............................ 219

BrakesABS .................................................. 62BAS .................................................. 62Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 342Display message ............................ 213High-performance brake system .... 155Important safety notes .................. 153Maintenance .................................. 154Parking brake ................................ 151Riding tips ...................................... 153Warning lamp ................................. 236

Breakdownsee Flat tiresee Towing away

Brightness control (instrumentcluster lighting) ................................... 31Brush guard ....................................... 266Bulbs

Backup lamp .................................. 113Brake lamp .................................... 113Cornering light function ................. 110Fog lamps ...................................... 110Rear fog lamp ................................ 113Tail lamp ........................................ 113see Replacing bulbs

CCalifornia

Important notice for retail cus-tomers and lessees .......................... 22

Calling up a malfunctionsee Display messages

CareCar wash ........................................ 281Carpets .......................................... 287Chrome parts ................................. 285Display ........................................... 285Gear or selector lever .................... 286Headlamps ..................................... 284Interior ........................................... 285Matte finish ................................... 283Notes ............................................. 281Paint .............................................. 282Plastic trim .................................... 286Power washer ................................ 282Rear view camera .......................... 284Roof lining ...................................... 287Seat belt ........................................ 287Seat covers .................................... 286Sensors ......................................... 284Steering wheel ............................... 286Tail pipes ....................................... 285Trailer coupling .............................. 285Trim strips ..................................... 286Washing by hand ........................... 282Wheels ........................................... 282Windows ........................................ 283Wiper blades .................................. 284Wooden trim .................................. 286

Cargo compartment coverInstalling/removing ....................... 253

Index 5

Page 8: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Notes/how to use ......................... 253Opening and closing ...................... 253Overview ........................................ 253

Cargo compartment enlargementImportant safety notes .................. 250

Cargo tie down rings ......................... 253CD player/CD changer (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 203Center console

Overview .......................................... 34Upper section .................................. 34

Central lockingAutomatic locking (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 208Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 68

Changing bulbsReversing lamps ............................ 113Side marker lamps ......................... 112Turn signals (front) ......................... 111

Changing gears .................................. 142Checklist

After driving off-road ...................... 159Before driving off-road ................... 159

Child seatBabySmart™ air bag deactivationsystem ............................................. 56Forward-facing restraint system ...... 58LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ............................................ 55On the front-passenger seat ............ 58Problem (malfunction) ..................... 59Rearward-facing restraint system .... 58Top Tether ....................................... 55

Child-proof locksImportant safety notes .................... 59Rear doors ....................................... 60

ChildrenRestraint systems ............................ 54Special seat belt retractor ............... 53

Chrome parts (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 285Cigarette lighter ................................ 256Climate control

Controlling automatically ............... 124Cooling with air dehumidification .. 122Defrosting the windows ................. 126Defrosting the windshield .............. 125

Dual-zone automatic climate con-trol ................................................. 119Important safety notes .................. 118Indicator lamp ................................ 124Maximum cooling .......................... 125Notes on using dual-zone auto-matic climate control ..................... 120Overview of systems ...................... 118Problem with the rear windowdefroster ........................................ 127Problems with "cooling with airdehumidification" ........................... 124Refrigerant ..................................... 341Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 342Setting the air distribution ............. 124Setting the air vents ...................... 128Setting the airflow ......................... 124Setting the temperature ................ 124Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ............................................ 127Switching on/off ........................... 121Switching residual heat on/off ...... 127Switching the rear windowdefroster on/off ............................ 126Switching the ZONE function on/off .................................................. 125Windshield defroster ...................... 126

Climate control systemDeactivating/activating ................. 136

CockpitOverview .......................................... 30see Instrument cluster

COMANDsee separate operating instructions

Combination switch .......................... 103Consumption statistics (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 200Convenience opening feature

see Side windowsCoolant (engine)

Checking the level ......................... 278Display message ............................ 221Filling capacity ............................... 343Notes ............................................. 342Temperature (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 209Temperature gauge ........................ 197Warning lamp ................................. 243

6 Index

Page 9: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Coolingsee Climate control

Copyright ............................................. 27Cornering light function

Function/notes ............................. 104Cruise control

Cruise control lever ....................... 163Display message ............................ 229Driving system ............................... 162Function/notes ............................. 162Resuming the stored speed ........... 164Selecting ........................................ 163Storing and maintaining currentspeed ............................................. 164

Cup holderCenter console .............................. 254Important safety notes .................. 254Rear compartment ......................... 254

Customer Assistance Center(CAC) ..................................................... 25Customer Relations Department ....... 25

DData

see Technical dataDaytime running lamps

Display message ............................ 221Switching on/off (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 207Switching on/off (switch) ................ 99

Declarations of conformity ................. 24Delayed switch-off

Exterior lighting (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 207Interior lighting .............................. 208

Differential locksDisengaging ................................... 190Engaging ........................................ 189Front axle ...................................... 190General notes ................................ 188Rear axle ........................................ 190Terrain ........................................... 188Transfer case ................................. 190

Digital speedometer ......................... 201Display (cleaning instructions) ........ 285Display messages

Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 212

Driving systems ............................. 225Engine ............................................ 221General notes ................................ 211Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 212Lights ............................................. 218Safety systems .............................. 213Service interval display .................. 279SmartKey ....................................... 234Tires ............................................... 229Vehicle ........................................... 232

Distance display (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 205Distance recorder

see Trip odometerDistance warning (warning lamp) .... 245DISTRONIC PLUS

Activating ....................................... 171Activation conditions ..................... 171Cruise control lever ....................... 171Deactivating ................................... 176Display message ............................ 227Displays in the multifunction dis-play ................................................ 174Driving tips .................................... 176Function/notes ............................. 169Important safety notes .................. 169Selecting ........................................ 171Setting the specified minimumdistance ......................................... 175Warning lamp ................................. 245

Door control panelOverview .......................................... 37

DoorsAutomatic locking (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 208Automatic locking (switch) ............... 75Central locking/unlocking(SmartKey) ....................................... 68Display message ............................ 233Emergency locking ........................... 75Emergency unlocking ....................... 75Important safety notes .................... 73Opening (from inside) ...................... 73Overview .......................................... 73

Drinking and driving ......................... 153Drive program

Automatic ...................................... 144Display ........................................... 140

Index 7

Page 10: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Manual ........................................... 145SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 210

Driving abroadSymmetrical low beam .................... 98

Driving in mountainous terrainApproach/departure angle ............ 161Driving downhill ............................. 162Gradient-climbing capability(maximum) ..................................... 161

Driving lampssee Daytime running lamps

Driving off-roadsee Off-road driving

Driving on flooded roads .................. 156Driving safety systems

4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-tem) ................................................. 63ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 62ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 65Adaptive brake lights ....................... 63BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 62Electronic brake force distribu-tion .................................................. 65ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) ............................................... 63Important safety information ........... 61Overview .......................................... 61

Driving systemsBlind Spot Assist ............................ 178Cruise control ................................ 162Display message ............................ 225DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 169HOLD function ............................... 180PARKTRONIC ................................. 182Rear view camera .......................... 185SPEEDTRONIC ............................... 166Variable SPEEDTRONIC ................. 166

Driving tipsAutomatic transmission ................. 143Brakes ........................................... 153DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 176Downhill gradient ........................... 153Driving abroad ................................. 98Driving in winter ............................. 157Driving on flooded roads ................ 156Driving on sand .............................. 160Driving over obstacles ................... 160General .......................................... 152

Gravel roads .................................. 160Hydroplaning ................................. 156Icy road surfaces ........................... 157Off-road driving .............................. 158Off-road fording ............................. 156Snow chains .................................. 309Symmetrical low beam .................... 98Tire ruts ......................................... 160Towing a trailer .............................. 191Traveling uphill ............................... 161Wet road surface ........................... 154

DVD audioOperating (on-board computer) ..... 203

DVD videoOperating (on-board computer) ..... 203

EEASY-ENTRY feature

Activating/deactivating ................. 208Function/notes ................................ 92

EASY-EXIT featureFunction/notes ................................ 92Switching on/off ........................... 208

EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution)

Display message ............................ 215Function/notes ................................ 65

ECO start/stop functionGeneral information ....................... 135

Electrical fusesFuse box in the cargo compart-ment .............................................. 303

Electronic Stability Programsee ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

Electronic Traction Systemsee 4ETS (Electronic Traction System)

EmergencyAutomaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 52

Emergency callsee mbrace

Emergency lockingVehicle ............................................. 75

Emergency releaseVehicle ............................................. 75

Emergency Tensioning DevicesActivation ......................................... 49

8 Index

Page 11: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

EngineCheck Engine warning lamp ........... 243Display message ............................ 221ECO start/stop function ................ 135Engine number ............................... 337Irregular running ............................ 138Jump-starting ................................. 296Starting problems .......................... 138Starting the engine with theSmartKey ....................................... 134Switching off .................................. 151Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 301

Engine electronicsProblem (malfunction) ................... 138

Engine oilAdding ........................................... 277Additives ........................................ 341Checking the oil level ..................... 275Display message ............................ 223Filling capacity ............................... 341Notes about oil grades ................... 340Temperature (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 209Viscosity ........................................ 341

Environmental protectionNote ................................................. 20

ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram)

AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 210Deactivating/activating ................... 64Display message ............................ 213Function/notes ................................ 63Important safety information ........... 63Trailer stabilization ........................... 65Warning lamp ................................. 239

Exhaust check ................................... 153Exhaust tail pipe (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 285Exterior lighting

see LightsExterior mirrors

Adjusting ......................................... 93Dipping (automatic) ......................... 94Folding in when locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 209Folding in/out (automatically) ......... 94Folding in/out (electrically) ............. 93Out of position (troubleshooting) ..... 94

Setting ............................................. 93Storing settings (memory func-tion) ................................................. 95Storing the parking position ............. 94

FFiller cap

see Fuel filler flapFirst-aid kit ......................................... 290Flat tire

Preparing the vehicle ..................... 292Floormats ........................................... 270Fog lamps

Switching on/off ........................... 101Folding the seat backrest (rear)forwards/back .................................. 251Front fog lamp (display message) ... 220Fuel

Additives ........................................ 340Consumption information .............. 340Consumption statistics .................. 200Displaying the range ...................... 201Fuel gauge ..................................... 197Grade (gasoline) ............................ 338Important safety notes .................. 338Notes for AMG vehicles ................. 339Premium-grade unleaded gaso-line ................................................. 338Problem (malfunction) ................... 150Refueling ........................................ 147Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 338

Fuel consumptionNotes ............................................. 152

Fuel filler flapEmergency release ........................ 149Opening/closing ............................ 148

Fuel levelCalling up the range (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 201

Fuel tankCapacity ........................................ 338Problem (malfunction) ................... 150

Fuel/water separatorService ........................................... 280

Fuse allocation chart ........................ 301Fuse box

Battery case ................................... 303

Index 9

Page 12: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Dashboard ..................................... 302Front-passenger footwell ............... 302Transmission tunnel ....................... 302

Fuse extractor ................................... 301Fuses

Allocation chart ............................. 301Before changing ............................. 301Dashboard fuse box ....................... 302Fuse allocation chart ..................... 301Fuse box in the front-passengerfootwell .......................................... 302Fuse box in the transmission tun-nel ................................................. 302Important safety notes .................. 301In the battery case ......................... 303

GGarage door opener

Clearing the memory ..................... 270General notes ................................ 266Important safety notes .................. 267Opening/closing the garage door .. 270Programming the remote control ... 267

Gasoline ............................................. 338Gear indicator (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 209Gear or selector lever (cleaningguidelines) ......................................... 286Genuine parts ...................................... 20Genuine wood trim and trim strips(cleaning instructions) ...................... 286Glove box ........................................... 249Gradient-climbing capability (max-imum) ................................................. 161GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) (defini-tion) .................................................... 325

HHazard warning lamps ...................... 104Head restraints

Adjusting ......................................... 86Adjusting (rear) ................................ 87Installing/removing (rear) ................ 88Luxury .............................................. 87Resetting (front) ............................... 87see NECK-PRO head restraints

see NECK-PRO luxury head restraintsHeadlamps

Adding fluid to cleaning system ..... 278Cleaning ......................................... 284Cleaning system (function) ............ 103Cleaning system (notes) ................ 343Fogging up ..................................... 105Protective grille .............................. 112see Automatic headlamp mode

Heatingsee Climate control

High-beam headlampsDisplay message ............................ 219Switching on/off ........................... 103

Hill start assist .................................. 135HOLD function

Function/notes ............................. 180Hood

Closing ........................................... 275Display message ............................ 233Important safety notes .................. 274Opening ......................................... 275

Horn ...................................................... 30Hydroplaning ..................................... 156

IImmobilizer .......................................... 65Instrument cluster

Overview ........................................ 197Warning and indicator lamps ......... 234

Instrument cluster lighting .............. 197Interior lighting

Automatic control .......................... 106Cargo compartment lamp .............. 107Delayed switch-off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 208Manual control ............................... 106Overview ........................................ 105Reading lamp ................................. 105Rear interior lighting ...................... 108

JJack

Pump lever ..................................... 329Storage location ............................ 290Using ............................................. 328

10 Index

Page 13: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Jump starting (engine) ...................... 296

KKey positions

SmartKey ....................................... 133

LLap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 210LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ................................................ 55License plate lamp (display mes-sage) ................................................... 220Light sensor (display message) ....... 221Lights

Activating/deactivating the inte-rior lighting delayed switch-off ....... 208Automatic headlamp mode ............ 100Cornering light function ................. 104Driving abroad ................................. 98Fog lamps ...................................... 101Hazard warning lamps ................... 104High beam flasher .......................... 104High-beam headlamps ................... 103Light switch ..................................... 98Low-beam headlamps ...................... 99Parking lamps ................................ 102Rear fog lamp ................................ 101Standing lamps .............................. 102Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 207Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (switch) ...................... 99Switching the exterior lightingdelayed switch-off on/off (on-board computer) ............................ 207Switching the surround lightingon/off (on-board computer) .......... 207Turn signals ................................... 103see Interior lightingsee Replacing bulbs

LIM indicator lampCruise control ................................ 163DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 171Variable SPEEDTRONIC ................. 167

Limit speedVariable SPEEDTRONIC ................. 166

Load anchorage ................................. 252Loading guidelines ............................ 248Locking

Emergency locking ........................... 75From inside the vehicle (centrallocking button) ................................. 74see Central locking

Locking (doors)Automatic ........................................ 75

Locking centrallysee Central locking

Locking verification signal (on-board computer) ............................... 208LOW RANGE off-road gear ................ 186Low-beam headlamps

Display message ............................ 218Setting for driving abroad (sym-metrical) .......................................... 98Switching on/off .............................. 99

Luggage compartment enlarge-ment

Overview ........................................ 250Lumbar support

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-port .................................................. 88

Luxury head restraints ....................... 87

MM+S tires ............................................ 308Malfunction message

see Display messagesMatte finish (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 283mbrace

Call priority .................................... 262Display message ............................ 216Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 263Downloading routes ....................... 265Emergency call .............................. 260Geo fencing ................................... 265Important safety notes .................. 258Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 264MB info call button ........................ 262Remote vehicle locking .................. 263

Index 11

Page 14: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Roadside Assistance button .......... 261Self-test ......................................... 259Speed alert .................................... 265System .......................................... 259Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 266Vehicle remote malfunction diag-nosis .............................................. 264Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 263

Mechanical keyFunction/notes ................................ 69General notes .................................. 69Removing ......................................... 70

Memory card (audio) ......................... 203Memory function ................................. 95Message memory (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 212Messages

see Display messagesMirrors

Sun visor ........................................ 255see Exterior mirrorssee Rear-view mirror

Mobile phoneMenu (on-board computer) ............ 204

Mounting wheelsMounting a new wheel ................... 330Raising the vehicle ......................... 328Removing a wheel .......................... 330Securing the vehicle against roll-ing away ........................................ 328

MP3Operation ....................................... 203see separate operating instructions

Multifunction displayFunction/notes ............................. 199Permanent display ......................... 207

Multifunction steering wheelBack button ................................... 199Operating the on-board computer .. 198Overview .......................................... 33

NNavigation

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 201see separate operating instructions

NECK-PRO head restraintsOperation ......................................... 51

Resetting triggered .......................... 51NECK-PRO luxury head restraints

Important safety notes .................... 51Operation ......................................... 51Resetting when triggered ................. 52

Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-cle ....................................................... 132

OOccupant safety

Automaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 52BabySmart™ air bag deactivationsystem ............................................. 56Children in the vehicle ..................... 52Important safety notes .................... 41Pets in the vehicle ........................... 61

Off-roadDifferential locks ............................ 188Off-road ABS .................................... 62

Off-road drivingChecklist ........................................ 159Driving on sand .............................. 160Important safety notes .................. 158Traveling uphill ............................... 161

Off-road fording ................................. 156Off-road system

Permanent all-wheel drive ............. 181Oil

see Engine oilOn-board computer

AMG menu ..................................... 209Assistance menu ........................... 205Audio menu ................................... 203Convenience submenu .................. 208Display messages .......................... 211DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 174Factory settings submenu ............. 209Important safety notes .................. 196Instrument cluster submenu .......... 206Lighting submenu .......................... 207Menu overview .............................. 200Message memory .......................... 212Navigation menu ............................ 201Operation ....................................... 198RACETIMER ................................... 210Service menu ................................. 206

12 Index

Page 15: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Settings menu ............................... 206Standard display ............................ 200Telephone menu ............................ 204Trip menu ...................................... 200Vehicle submenu ........................... 208Video DVD operation ..................... 203

Operating safetyDeclaration of conformity ................ 24Important safety notes .................... 23

Operating systemsee On-board computer

Outside temperature display ........... 198Overhead control panel ...................... 36Override feature

Rear side windows ........................... 60

PPaint code number ............................ 336Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 282Panic alarm .......................................... 40Parcel net ........................................... 250Parking

Engaging park position .................. 140Important safety notes .................. 150Position of exterior mirror, front-passenger side ................................. 94see PARKTRONIC

Parking aidsee Exterior mirrorssee PARKTRONIC

Parking brakeApplying ......................................... 151Display message ............................ 215Warning lamp ................................. 242

Parking lampsSwitching on/off ........................... 102

PARKTRONICDeactivating/activating ................. 184Driving system ............................... 182Function/notes ............................. 182Important safety notes .................. 182Problem (malfunction) ................... 185Range of the sensors ..................... 182Trailer towing ................................. 184Warning display ............................. 183

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFIndicator lamp .................................. 42

Problems (malfunctions) .................. 59Pedals ................................................. 153Permanent all-wheel drive

Off-road system ............................. 181Pets in the vehicle ............................... 61Plastic trim (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 286Power supply (trailer) ....................... 193Power washers .................................. 282Program selector button .................. 143Programming

SmartKey ......................................... 69Pulling away

Automatic transmission ................. 134

QQualified specialist workshop ........... 24

RRACETIMER

Deleting all laps ............................. 211Displaying and starting .................. 210Displaying the intermediate time ... 210Resetting the current lap ............... 211Starting a new lap .......................... 210Stopping ........................................ 210

RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 210Radio

Selecting a station ......................... 203see separate operating instructions

Radio-wave reception/transmis-sion in the vehicle

Declaration of conformity ................ 24Reading lamp ..................................... 105Rear bench seat

Folding forward .............................. 252Rear compartment

Setting the air vents ...................... 129Rear door

Closing ............................................. 77Display message ............................ 233Important safety notes .................... 76Opening ........................................... 77Opening/closing .............................. 76

Rear fog lampDisplay message ............................ 220

Index 13

Page 16: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Switching on/off ........................... 101Rear lamps

see LightsRear seat bench

Folding into an upright position ..... 252Rear view camera

Function/notes ............................. 185Rear view camera (cleaninginstructions) ...................................... 284Rear window defroster

Problem (malfunction) ................... 127Switching on/off ........................... 126

Rear window wiperSwitching on/off ........................... 115

Rear-view mirrorDipping (automatic) ......................... 94

Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-tem)

Important safety notes .................. 341Refueling

Fuel gauge ..................................... 197Important safety notes .................. 147Refueling process .......................... 148see Fuel

Remote controlProgramming (garage dooropener) .......................................... 267

Replacing bulbsImportant safety notes .................. 108Overview of bulb types .................. 109

Reporting safety defects .................... 25Reserve (fuel tank)

see FuelReserve fuel

Display message ............................ 224Warning lamp ................................. 243see Fuel

Residual heatSwitching on/off ........................... 127

Restraint systemDisplay message ............................ 216Introduction ..................................... 40Warning lamp ................................. 242Warning lamp (function) ................... 41

Reversing lamps (display mes-sage) ................................................... 220Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 22

Roof lining and carpets (cleaningguidelines) ......................................... 287Route (navigation)

see Route guidance (navigation)Route guidance (navigation) ............ 201

SSafety

Child restraint systems .................... 54Children in the vehicle ..................... 52

Safety systemsee Driving safety systems

Seat backrestFolding back .................................. 251

Seat beltsAdjusting the height ......................... 44center rear-compartment seat ......... 45Cleaning ......................................... 287Correct usage .................................. 44Fastening ......................................... 44Important safety guidelines ............. 43Introduction ..................................... 42Releasing ......................................... 46Warning lamp ................................. 235Warning lamp (function) ................... 46

Seat heatingIndicator lamp (malfunction) ............ 89

Seat ventilationIndicator lamp (malfunction) ............ 90

SeatsAdjusting (electrically) ..................... 86Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-port .................................................. 88Adjusting the head restraint ............ 86Cleaning the cover ......................... 286Correct driver's seat position ........... 84Important safety notes .................... 85Overview .......................................... 85Storing settings (memory func-tion) ................................................. 95Switching seat heating on/off ......... 89Switching seat ventilation on/off .... 90

Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 284Service interval display

Displaying a service message (on-board computer) ............................ 280

14 Index

Page 17: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Service menu (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 206Service products

Brake fluid ..................................... 342Coolant (engine) ............................ 342Engine oil ....................................... 340Fuel ................................................ 337Important safety notes .................. 337Notes ............................................. 337Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-tem) ............................................... 341Washer fluid ................................... 343

Setting a speed limitsee SPEEDTRONIC

Setting the air distribution ............... 124Settings

Calling up a stored setting ............... 96Factory (on-board computer) ......... 209On-board computer ....................... 206

SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 210Shift ranges ....................................... 145Side marker lamp (display mes-sage) ................................................... 220Side marker lamps (changingbulbs) ................................................. 112Side windows

Convenience opening feature .......... 78Important safety information ........... 77Opening/closing .............................. 77Overview .......................................... 77Troubleshooting ............................... 78

Ski rack .............................................. 254Sliding sunroof

Important safety notes .................... 79Opening/closing .............................. 79Operating manually .......................... 79Problem (malfunction) ..................... 80

SmartKeyChanging the battery ....................... 70Changing the programming ............. 69Checking the battery ....................... 70Convenience opening feature .......... 78Display message ............................ 234Door central locking/unlocking ....... 68Important safety notes .................... 68Loss ................................................. 72Malfunction ...................................... 72

Mechanical key ................................ 69Overview .......................................... 68Problem (malfunction) ..................... 72Starting the engine ........................ 134

Snow chains ...................................... 309Sockets

Front-passenger footwell ............... 257Luggage compartment ................... 257Rear compartment ......................... 257

SOSsee mbrace

Spare fuses ........................................ 301Spare wheel

Mounting ....................................... 327Notes/data .................................... 333Spare wheel bracket at the rear .... 291Stainless-steel spare hub cap ........ 291

Special seat belt retractor .................. 53Specialist workshop ............................ 24Speed, controlling

see Cruise controlSpeedometer

Digital ............................................ 201In the Instrument cluster ............... 197Segments ...................................... 198Selecting the unit of measure-ment .............................................. 206see Instrument cluster

SPEEDTRONICDisplay message ............................ 228Selecting ........................................ 167Variable ......................................... 166

Standing lampsDisplay message ............................ 220Switching on/off ........................... 102

Starting the engineImportant safety notes .................. 134

Steering (display message) .............. 233Steering wheel

Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 91Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 198Cleaning ......................................... 286Important safety notes .................... 90Paddle shifters ............................... 144Steering wheel heating .................... 91Storing settings (memory func-tion) ................................................. 95

Index 15

Page 18: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Steering wheel heatingIndicator lamp (malfunction) ............ 91

Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 144Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 210Stowage areas ................................... 249Stowage compartment

Door stowage compartment .......... 250Stowage compartments

Armrest (under) ............................. 250Cup holders ................................... 254Glove box ....................................... 249Important safety information ......... 249Stowage pockets ........................... 250

Summer tires ..................................... 308Sun visor ............................................ 254Surround lighting (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 207SUV

(Sport Utility Vehicle) ....................... 23Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ................................................. 127Switching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 66

TTachometer ........................................ 198Tail lamps

Display message ............................ 220see Lights

Tank contentFuel gauge ..................................... 197

Technical dataCapacities ...................................... 337Tires ............................................... 331Tires/wheels ................................. 331Trailer loads ................................... 347Vehicle data ................................... 344Wheels ........................................... 331

TELEAIDCall priority .................................... 262Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 263Downloading routes ....................... 265Emergency call .............................. 260Geo fencing ................................... 265Important safety notes .................. 258Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 264MB info call button ........................ 262

Remote vehicle locking .................. 263Roadside Assistance button .......... 261Self-test ......................................... 259Speed alert .................................... 265System .......................................... 259Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 266Vehicle remote malfunction diag-nosis .............................................. 264Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 263

TelephoneAccepting a call ............................. 204Display message ............................ 234Menu (on-board computer) ............ 204Number from the phone book ........ 204Redialing ........................................ 205Rejecting/ending a call ................. 204

Telephone compartment .................. 250Temperature

Coolant .......................................... 197Coolant (on-board computer) ......... 209Engine oil (on-board computer) ...... 209Outside temperature ...................... 198Setting (climate control) ................ 124

Theft deterrent systemsATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 66Immobilizer ...................................... 65

Tilt/sliding sunroofsee Sliding sunroof

Timesee separate operating instructions

Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 210Tire pressure

Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 313Checking manually ........................ 312Display message ............................ 229Maximum ....................................... 312Notes ............................................. 311Recommended ............................... 309Table (single tires) ......................... 310

Tire pressure monitorChecking the tire pressure elec-tronically ........................................ 314Function/notes ............................. 313Restarting ...................................... 315Warning lamp ................................. 246Warning message .......................... 315

TiresAspect ratio (definition) ................. 326

16 Index

Page 19: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Average weight of the vehicleoccupants (definition) .................... 325Bar (definition) ............................... 325Changing a wheel .......................... 327Characteristics .............................. 324Checking ........................................ 307Curb weight (definition) ................. 326Definition of terms ......................... 324Direction of rotation ...................... 328Display message ............................ 229Distribution of the vehicle occu-pants (definition) ............................ 327DOT (Department of Transporta-tion) (definition) ............................. 325DOT, Tire Identification Number(TIN) ............................................... 324GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)(definition) ..................................... 325GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) (defi-nition) ............................................ 325GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def-inition) ........................................... 325GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-ing) (definition) .............................. 325Important safety notes .................. 306Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipment (definition) ...... 325Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 326Labeling (overview) ........................ 321Load bearing index (definition) ...... 327Load index ..................................... 323Load index (definition) ................... 326Maximum load on a tire (defini-tion) ............................................... 326Maximum loaded vehicle weight(definition) ..................................... 326Maximum permissible tire pres-sure (definition) ............................. 326Maximum tire load ......................... 323Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 326Optional equipment weight (defi-nition) ............................................ 326PSI (pounds per square inch) (def-inition) ........................................... 326Replacing ....................................... 327Service life ..................................... 308Sidewall (definition) ....................... 326Speed rating (definition) ................ 325

Storing ........................................... 328Structure and characteristics(definition) ..................................... 324Technical data ............................... 331Temperature .................................. 320TIN (Tire Identification Number)(definition) ..................................... 327Tire bead (definition) ...................... 326Tire pressure (definition) ................ 326Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 325Tire size (data) ............................... 331Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity, speed rating .................... 321Tire tread ....................................... 307Tire tread (definition) ..................... 326Total load limit (definition) ............. 327Traction ......................................... 320Traction (definition) ....................... 327Tread wear ..................................... 320TWR (permissible trailer drawbarnoseweight) (definition) ................. 327Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards ...................................... 319Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards (definition) .................... 325Wear indicator (definition) ............. 327Wheel rim (definition) .................... 325see Flat tire

Top Tether ............................................ 55Tow-starting

Emergency engine starting ............ 301Important safety notes .................. 298

Towing a trailerAxle load, permissible .................... 347Driving tips .................................... 191Lights display message .................. 218Mounting dimensions .................... 346Shift range ..................................... 143Trailer loads ................................... 347Trailer tow hitch ............................. 346

Towing awayImportant safety guidelines ........... 298In the event of malfunctions .......... 300With both axles on the ground ....... 299

Towing eyeFront .............................................. 299Rear ............................................... 299

Index 17

Page 20: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Trailer7-pin connector ............................. 193Power supply ................................. 193

Trailer coupling (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 285Trailer loads

Technical data ............................... 347Trailer tow hitch

Ball position ................................... 347Trailer towing

ESP® ............................................... 65PARKTRONIC ................................. 184

Transfer caseGeneral notes ................................ 186Shift range ..................................... 186Shifting .......................................... 186Shifting (general notes) .................. 187Shifting (important safety notes) ... 186Shifting to neutral .......................... 188Switching off the off-road gearratio ............................................... 187Switching on the off-road gearratio ............................................... 187

Transmissionsee Automatic transmission

Transmission positions .................... 142Transporting the vehicle .................. 300Traveling uphill

Brow of hill ..................................... 162Trip computer (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 200Trip odometer

Calling up ....................................... 200Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 201

Turn signalsChanging bulbs (front) ................... 111Display message ............................ 219Switching on/off ........................... 103

TWR (Tongue Weight Rating) (defi-nition) ................................................. 327Type identification plate

see Vehicle identification plate

UUnlocking

Emergency unlocking ....................... 75

From inside the vehicle (centralunlocking button) ............................. 74

VVanity mirror

Sun visor ........................................ 255Variable SPEEDTRONIC

Function/notes ............................. 166Vehicle

Correct use ...................................... 25Data acquisition ............................... 26Display message ............................ 232Emergency locking ........................... 75Emergency unlocking ....................... 75Equipment ....................................... 21Individual settings .......................... 206Limited Warranty ............................. 25Loading .......................................... 316Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 68Lowering ........................................ 330Maintenance .................................... 22Parking for a long period ................ 152Pulling away ................................... 134Raising ........................................... 328Reporting problems ......................... 25Securing from rolling away ............ 328Tow-starting ................................... 298Towing away .................................. 298Transporting .................................. 300Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 68Vehicle data ................................... 344

Vehicle data ....................................... 344Vehicle data (off-road driving)

Approach/departure angle ............ 346Fording depth ................................ 345Maximum gradient climbing abil-ity .................................................. 346

Vehicle dimensions ........................... 344Vehicle identification number

see VINVehicle identification plate .............. 336Vehicle tool kit .................................. 290Ventilation

Setting the airflow ......................... 124Video

Operating the DVD ......................... 203VIN ...................................................... 336

18 Index

Page 21: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

WWarning and indicator lamps

ABS ................................................ 237Brakes ........................................... 236Check Engine ................................. 243Coolant .......................................... 243Cruise control ................................ 163Distance warning ........................... 245DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 245ESP® ............................................. 239ESP® OFF ...................................... 240Fuel tank ........................................ 243LIM (DISTRONIC PLUS) .................. 171LIM (variable SPEEDTRONIC) ......... 167Overview .................................. 32, 234Parking brake ................................ 242PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ............... 42Reserve fuel ................................... 243Restraint system ............................ 242Seat belt ........................................ 235Tire pressure monitor .................... 246

Warning triangle ................................ 290Warranty .............................................. 21Washer fluid

Display message ............................ 234Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 330Wheels

Changing a wheel .......................... 327Checking ........................................ 307Cleaning ......................................... 282Important safety notes .................. 306Interchanging/changing ................ 327Mounting a new wheel ................... 330Mounting a wheel .......................... 328Overview ........................................ 306Removing a wheel .......................... 330Storing ........................................... 328Technical data ............................... 331Tightening torque ........................... 330Wheel size/tire size ....................... 331

Window curtain air bagDisplay message ............................ 217Operation ......................................... 49

Windowssee Side windows

Windows (cleaning instructions) ..... 283

WindshieldDefrosting ...................................... 125

Windshield heating ........................... 126Windshield washer fluid

see Windshield washer systemWindshield washer system

Adding washer fluid ....................... 278Notes ............................................. 343

Windshield wipersProblem (malfunction) ................... 116Rear window wiper ........................ 115Replacing the wiper blades ............ 115Switching on/off ........................... 114

WinterDriving in winter ............................. 157Winter operation ............................ 308

Winter drivingSnow chains .................................. 309

Winter operationOverview ........................................ 308

Winter tiresM+S tires ....................................... 308

Wiper bladesCleaning ......................................... 284Important safety notes .................. 115Replacing ....................................... 115

Index 19

Page 22: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Protection of the environment

General notes

H Environmental noteDaimler's declared policy is one of compre-hensive environmental protection.The objectives are for the natural resourcesthat form the basis of our existence on thisplanet to be used sparingly and in a mannerthat takes the requirements of both natureand humanity into account.You too can help to protect the environmentby operating your vehicle in an environmen-tally responsible manner.Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,transmission, brake and tire wear are affectedby these factors:Roperating conditions of your vehicleRyour personal driving styleYou can influence both factors. You shouldbear the following in mind:Operating conditions:Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con-sumption.Ralways make sure that the tire pressuresare correct.Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.Rremove roof racks once you no longer needthem.Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contributeto environmental protection. You shouldtherefore adhere to the service intervals.Ralways have service work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style:Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal whenstarting the engine.Rdo notwarmup the enginewhen the vehicleis stationary.Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front.Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration andbraking.

Rchange gear in good time and use each gearonly up toÔ of its maximum engine speed.Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-tion.

Environmental concerns and recom-mendationsWherever the operating instructions requireyou to dispose of materials, first try to regen-erate or re-use them. Observe the relevantenvironmental rules and regulations whendisposing of materials. In this way you willhelp to protect the environment.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

H Environmental noteDaimler AG also supplies reconditionedmajorassemblies and parts which are of the samequality as new parts. They are covered by thesame Limited Warranty entitlements as newparts.

! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-ces, as well as control units and sensors forthese restraint systems, may be installed inthe following areas of your vehicle:RdoorsRdoor pillarsRdoor sillsRseatsRcockpitRinstrument clusterRcenter consoleDo not install accessories such as audiosystems in these areas. Do not carry outrepairs or welding. You could impair theoperating efficiency of the restraint sys-tems.Have aftermarket accessories installed at aqualified specialist workshop.

20 Introduction

Page 23: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

You could jeopardize the operating safety ofyour vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheelsas well as accessories relevant to safetywhich have not been approved by Mercedes.This could lead to malfunctions in safety-rel-evant systems, e.g. the brake system. Useonly genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts ofequal quality. Only use tires, wheels andaccessories that have been specificallyapproved for your vehicle.Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject tostrict quality control. Every part has been spe-cifically developed, manufactured or selectedfor and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts shouldtherefore be used.More than 300,000 different genuineMercedes-Benz parts are available forMercedes-Benz models.All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers main-tain a supply of genuineMercedes-Benz partsfor necessary service and repair work. In addi-tion, strategically located parts delivery cen-ters provide quick and reliable parts service.Always specify the vehicle identification num-ber (VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz parts (Y page 336).

Operator's Manual

Vehicle equipmentThis Operator's Manual describes all modelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of going toprint. Country-specific differences are possi-ble. Bear in mind that your vehicle may notfeature all functions described here. This alsoapplies to safety-relevant systems and func-tions. The equipment in your vehicle maytherefore differ from that shown in thedescriptions and illustrations.The original purchase agreement lists all sys-tems installed in your vehicle.Should you have any questions concerningequipment and operation, please consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The Operator's Manual and the MaintenanceBooklet are important documents and shouldbe kept in the vehicle.

Service and vehicle operation

WarrantyYour vehicle is covered under the terms of thewarranties printed in the Service and War-ranty Information booklet.Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center willreplace and repair all factory-installed parts inaccordancewith the followingwarranty termsand conditions:RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyREmission Systems WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-setts, New York, Pennsylvania, RhodeIsland and Vermont Emission Control Sys-tem WarrantyRState warranty enforcement laws (LemonLaws)

Replacement parts and accessories are cov-ered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Acces-sories warranties. These are available at anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

i If you lose the Service andWarranty Infor-mation booklet, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center to arrange areplacement. It will be mailed to you.

Introduction 21

Z

Page 24: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Information for customers in Califor-niaIn California, you have the right to exchange avehicle or receive a refund of the purchase orleasing price if Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCand/or an authorized workshop or mainte-nance facility cannot, after several authorizedrepairs, rectify considerable damage to ormalfunctions of the vehicle that are coveredby the contractual warranty. During theperiod of 18 months from original delivery ofthe vehicle or the accumulation of 18,000miles (approximately 29,000 km) on theodometer of the vehicle, whichever occursfirst, a reasonable number of repair attemptsis presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if oneor more of the following occurs:(1) the serious defect or damage can result

in deadly or serious injury to the vehicleoccupants while driving AND this defecthas already been repaired at least twiceAND Mercedes-Benz, LLC has beeninformed in writing of the necessity of arepair.

(2) the defect or damage, though less seri-ous than (1) above, has already beenrepaired at least four times ANDMercedes-Benz has been informed inwriting of the necessity of a repair.

(3) the vehicle cannot be used for longerthan 30 calendar days because of repairwork resulting from this or other seriousdefects or damage.

Please send your written notice to:Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCCustomer Assistance CenterOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350

MaintenanceThe Service and Warranty Booklet describesall the necessary maintenance work whichshould be done at regular intervals.

Always have the Service and Warranty Book-let with you when you bring the vehicle to anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The ser-vice advisor will record every service for youin the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Roadside AssistanceThe Mercedes-Benz Roadside AssistanceProgramoffers technical help in the event of abreakdown. Calls to the toll-free RoadsideAssistance Hotline are answered by ouragents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)(USA)1-800-387-0100 (Canada)For additional information, refer to theMercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-gram brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assis-tance" section in the Service and Warrantybooklet (Canada). You will find both in yourvehicle literature portfolio.

Change of address or change of own-ershipIn the event of a change of address, pleasesend us the "Notification of Address Change"in the Service and Guarantee booklet or sim-ply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-tance Center (USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service Center (Canada) at1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in con-tacting you in a timely manner should theneed arise.If you sell your Mercedes, please leave theentire literature in the vehicle so that it isavailable to the next owner.If you have purchased a used car, please sendus the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" inthe Service and Guarantee booklet or simplycall the Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter (USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or

22 Introduction

Page 25: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Customer Service (Canada) at1-800-387-0100.

Vehicle operation outside the USAand CanadaIf you plan to operate your vehicle in foreigncountries, please be aware that:Rservice facilities or replacement parts maynot be readily available.Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalyticconvertermay not be available. Leaded fuelmay cause damage to the catalytic con-verter.Rthe fuel may have a considerably loweroctane rating. Unsuitable fuel can causeengine damage.

Some Mercedes-Benz models are availablefor delivery in Europe through our EuropeanDelivery Program. For details, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write toone of the following addresses.In the USAMercedes-Benz USA, LLCEuropean Delivery DepartmentOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.European Delivery Department98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Sports Utility Vehicle

G WARNINGDue to the high center of gravity, the vehiclemay start to skid and roll over in the event ofan abrupt steering maneuver and/or whenthe vehicle's speed is not adapted to the roadconditions. There is a risk of an accident.

Always adapt your speed and driving style tothe vehicle's driving characteristics and to theprevailing road and weather conditions.

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher roll-over rate than other types of vehicles.Failure to operate this vehicle safely mayresult in an accident, rollover of the vehicle,and severe or fatal injury.In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is sig-nificantly more likely to die than a personwearing a seat belt.You and all vehicle occupants should alwayswear your seat belts.

Operating safety

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not have the prescribed service/maintenance work or any required repairscarried out, this can result in malfunctions orsystem failures. There is a risk of an accident.Always have the prescribed service/mainte-nance work as well as any required repairscarried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system. There is a riskof fire.When driving off road or on unpaved roads,check the vehicle's underside regularly. Inparticular, remove parts of plants or otherflammable materials which have becometrapped. In the case of damage, contact aqualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGModifications to electronic components, theirsoftware as well as wiring can impair theirfunction and/or the function of other net-worked components. In particular, systemsrelevant to safety could also be affected. As a

Introduction 23

Z

Page 26: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

result, these may no longer function as inten-ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety ofthe vehicle. There is an increased risk of anaccident and injury.Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-tronic components or their software. Youshould have all work to electrical and elec-tronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

If you make any changes to the vehicle elec-tronics, the general operating permit is ren-dered invalid.

! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a highcurb or an unpaved roadRyou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. acurb or a hole in the roadRa heavy object strikes the undercarriageor parts of the chassis

In situations like this, the body, the under-carriage, chassis parts, wheels or tirescould be damaged without the damagebeing visible. Components damaged in thisway can unexpectedly fail or, in the case ofan accident, no longer withstand the strainthey are designed to.If the underbody paneling is damaged,combustible materials such as leaves,grass or twigs can gather between theunderbody and the underbody paneling. Ifthese materials come in contact with hotparts of the exhaust system, they can catchfire.In such situations, have the vehiclechecked and repaired immediately at aqualified specialist workshop. If on con-tinuing your journey you notice that drivingsafety is impaired, pull over and stop thevehicle immediately, paying attention toroad and traffic conditions. In such cases,visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Declarations of conformity

Vehicle components which receiveand/or transmit radio wavesUSA: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Oper-ation is subject to the following two condi-tions: 1) These devices may not cause harm-ful interference, and 2) These devices mustaccept any interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesired oper-ation. Changes ormodifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible for com-pliance could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment."Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Industry Canada license-exemptRSS standard(s). Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) These devicesmay not cause interference, and (2) Thesedevicesmust accept any interference, includ-ing interference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device."

Qualified specialist workshopAn authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is aqualified specialist workshop. It has the nec-essary specialist knowledge, tools and quali-fications to correctly carry out the workrequired on your vehicle. This is especially thecase for work relevant to safety.Observe the notes in the Maintenance Book-let.Always have the following work carried out atan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:Rwork relevant to safetyRservice and maintenance workRrepair workRalterations, installation work and modifica-tionsRwork on electronic components

24 Introduction

Page 27: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Correct useIf you remove any warning stickers, you orothers could fail to recognize certain dangers.Leave warning stickers in position.Observe the following information when driv-ing your vehicle:Rthe safety notes in this manualRthe technical data section in this manualRtraffic rules and regulationsRlaws and safety standards pertaining tomotor vehicles

Problems with your vehicleIf you should experience a problem with yourvehicle, particularly one that you believe mayaffect its safe operation, we urge you to con-tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerimmediately to have the problem diagnosedand rectified. If the problem is not resolved toyour satisfaction, please discuss the problemagain with a Mercedes-Benz Center or con-tact us at one of the following addresses.In the USACustomer Assistance CenterMercedes-Benz USA, LLCOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaCustomer Relations DepartmentMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Reporting safety defectsUSA only:The following text is reproduced as requiredof all manufacturers according to Title 49,Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575pursuant to the National Traffic and MotorVehicle Safety Act of 1966.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could causeinjury or death, you should immediatelyinform the National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition to notify-ing Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles, itmay order a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, yourdealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); goto http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA Headquarters,1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, West Building,Washington, DC 20590.You can obtain additional information aboutvehicle safety from:http://www.safercar.gov

Limited Warranty! Follow the instructions in this manualabout the proper operation of your vehicleas well as about possible vehicle damage.Damage to your vehicle that arises fromculpable contraventions against theseinstructions is not covered either by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by theNew or Used-Vehicle Warranty.

QR codes for rescue cards

The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flapand on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In thecase of an accident, the rescue services canfind the QR codes quickly on the appropriaterescue cards for your vehicle. The currentrescue card contains the most importantinformation about your vehicle in a compactform, e.g. the routing of the electric cables.

Introduction 25

Z

Page 28: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

You can findmore information under https://portal.aftersales.i.daimler.com.

Data stored in the vehicle

Data recordingThis vehicle is capable of recording diagnosticinformation relating to vehicle operation,mal-functions, and user settings. This may includeinformation about the performance or statusof various systems, including but not limitedto, engine, throttle, steering or brake sys-tems, that is stored and can be read out withsuitable devices, particularly when the vehi-cle is serviced. The data obtained is used toproperly diagnose and service your vehicle orto further optimize and develop vehicle func-tions.

COMAND/mbrace (Canada: TELEAID)If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND ormbrace, additional data about the vehicle’soperation, the use of the vehicle in certainsituations, and the location of the vehiclemaybe compiled through COMAND or thembracesystem.For additional information please refer to theCOMAND User Manual and/or the mbraceTerms and Conditions.

Event data recordersThis vehicle is equipped with an event datarecorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDRis to record data that will assist in under-standing how a vehicle’s systems performedin certain crash or near crash-like situations,such as during air bag deployment or whenhitting a road obstacle. The EDR is designedto record data related to vehicle dynamicsand safety systems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to recordsuch data as:Rhow various systems in your vehicle areoperatingRwhether or not the driver and passengerseat belts are fastenedRhow far (if at all) the driver is depressing theaccelerator and/or brake pedal andRhow fast the vehicle is travelingThis data can help provide a better under-standing of the circumstances in whichcrashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data isrecorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data is recorded bythe EDR under normal driving conditions andno personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,and crash location) are recorded. However,other parties, such as law enforcement, cancombine the EDR data with the type of per-sonal identification data routinely acquiredduring a crash investigation.To read data recorded by an EDR, specialequipment is required, and access to the vehi-cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to thevehicle manufacturer, other parties that havethe special equipment, such as law enforce-ment, can read the information by accessingthe vehicle or the EDR.EDR data may be used in civil and criminalmatters as a tool in accident reconstruction,accident claims, and vehicle safety. Since theCrash Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used toextract data from the EDR is commerciallyavailable, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all lia-bility arising from the extraction of this infor-mation by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz per-sonnel.MBUSA will not share EDR data with otherswithout the consent of the vehicle owners or,if the vehicle is leased, without the consent ofthe lessee. Exceptions to this representationinclude responses to subpoenas by lawenforcement; by federal, state or local gov-ernment; in connection with or arising out of

26 Introduction

Page 29: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

litigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiariesand affiliates; or, as required by law.Warning: The EDR is a component of the Sup-plemental Restraint System ("SRS") Module.Tampering with, altering, modifying or remov-ing the EDR component may result in a mal-function of the SRS Module and other sys-tems.State laws or regulations regarding EDRs thatconflict with federal regulation are pre-emp-ted. This means that in the event of such con-flict, the federal regulation governs. As ofFebruary 2013, 13 states have enacted lawsrelating to EDRs.

Information on copyright

General informationInformation on license for free and open-source software used in your vehicle and itselectronic components is available on the fol-lowing website:http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

Introduction 27

Z

Page 30: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

28

Page 31: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Cockpit ................................................. 30Instrument cluster .............................. 31Multifunction steering wheel ............. 33Center console .................................... 34Overhead control panel ...................... 36Door control panel .............................. 37

29

Ataglance

Page 32: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Cockpit

Function Page

: Combination switch 103

; Steering wheel paddle shifters 144

= Instrument cluster 197

? Horn

A Overhead control panel 36

B PARKTRONIC warning display 182

C Climate control systems 118

D Ignition lock 133

E Adjusts the steering wheel 90

F Cruise control lever 163

G Light switch 98

H Opens the hood 275

30 CockpitAt

aglance

Page 33: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Instrument cluster

Displays and controls

Function Page

: Speedometer with segments 198

; Multifunction display 199

= Tachometer 198

? Coolant temperature display 197

A Fuel gage

B Instrument cluster lighting control 197

Instrument cluster 31

Ataglance

Page 34: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Warning and indicator lamps

Function Page

: L Low-beam head-lamps 99

; ÷ ESP® 239

= K High-beam head-lamps 103

? J Brakes (yellow) 236

A · Distance warning 245

B #! Turn signals 103

C h Tire pressure monitor 246

D 6 Restraint system 40

E ü Seat belt 235

Function Page

F ? Coolant 243

G R Rear fog lamp 101

H O Front fog lamps 101

I ; Check Engine 243

J 8 Reserve fuel 243

K å ESP® OFF 239

L ! ABS 237

M Brakes (red)$ (USA only)J (Canada only) 236

32 Instrument clusterAt

aglance

Page 35: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page

: Multifunction display ~

; COMAND display ~

= ?

Switches on the Voice Con-trol System; see the sepa-rate operating instructions

? ~ ~

Rejects or ends a callExits phone book/redialmemory6

Makes or accepts a callSwitches to the redialmem-oryWX

Adjusts the volume8

Mute

Function Page

A =; ~

Selects a menu9:

Selects a submenu orscrolls through listsa

Confirms selections andhides messages

B %

BackSwitches off the Voice Con-trol System; see the sepa-rate operating instructions

Multifunction steering wheel 33

Ataglance

Page 36: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Center console

Center console, upper section

Function Page

: COMAND; see the separateoperating instructions ~

; Seat heating 89

= s Seat ventilation 90

? c PARKTRONIC 182

A ¤ ECO start/stop func-tion (AMG vehicles only) 135

Function Page

B £ Hazard warninglamps 104

C 4 5 PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF indicator lamp 42

D å ESP® 63

34 Center consoleAt

aglance

Page 37: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Center console, lower section

Function Page

F Stowage compartment/ashtray 255

G Automatic transmissionselector lever 139

H Selects park position 140

I + Selects/deselectsLOW RANGE off-road gear 186

J Stowage compartment ~

K Opens/closes the stowagecompartment 249

L Cigarette lighter 256

Function Page

M Audio controller, see theseparate operating instruc-tionsCOMAND controller ~

N Switches the windshieldheating on/off 126

O Û Selects the drive pro-gram 143Ñ Selects the drive pro-gram (AMG vehicles)

P Parking brake 151

Center console 35

Ataglance

Page 38: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Overhead control panel

Function Page

: p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off 105

; c Switches the frontinterior lighting on 106

= u Switches the rearinterior lighting on/off 106

? | Switches the frontinterior lighting/automaticinterior lighting control off 106

A p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off 105

B ¡ Opens/closes thesliding sunroof 79

C F Roadside Assistancecall button (mbrace sys-tem) 261

Function Page

D G SOS button (mbracesystem) 260

E ï MB Info call button(mbrace system) 262

F Rear-view mirror 92

G Buttons for the garage dooropener 270

H Microphone for mbrace(emergency call system),telephone and the VoiceControl System

36 Overhead control panelAt

aglance

Page 39: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Door control panel

Function Page

: n Activates/deacti-vates the override featurefor the side windows in therear compartment 60

; W Opens/closes theside windows 77

= 7Zö\Adjusts and folds the exte-rior mirrors in/out electri-cally 93

Function Page

? r45=Stores settings for the seat,exterior mirrors and steer-ing wheel (memory func-tion) 95

A Adjusts the seats 86

B %& Unlocks/locksthe vehicle 74

C Opens the door 73

Door control panel 37

Ataglance

Page 40: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

38

Page 41: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Useful information .............................. 40Panic alarm .......................................... 40Occupant safety .................................. 40Children in the vehicle ........................ 52Pets in the vehicle .............................. 61Driving safety systems ....................... 61Theft deterrent locking system ......... 65

39

Safety

Page 42: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops: (Y page 24).

Panic alarm

X To activate: press! button: for atleast one second.An alarm sounds and the indicator lampflashes.

X To deactivate: press! button:again.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

i USA only:This device complies with part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions:1. This device may not cause interference,and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.The Product label with FCC ID and IC cer-tification number can be found in the bat-tery case of the SmartKey.

i Canada only:This device complies with the RSS-210Rules of Industry Canada. Operation is sub-ject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause interference,and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.The Product label with FCC ID and IC cer-tification number can be found in the bat-tery case of the SmartKey.

Occupant safety

Restraint system: introductionThe restraint system reduces the risk of vehi-cle occupants coming into contact with partsof the vehicle's interior in the event of anaccident. The restraint system can alsoreduce the forces to which vehicle occupantsare subjected during an accident.The restraint system comprises:RSeat belt systemRAir bagsRChild restraint systemRChild seat securing systems

40 Occupant safetySafety

Page 43: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

The components of the restraint systemworkin conjunction with each other. They can onlydeploy their protective function if, at all times,all vehicle occupants:Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly(Y page 44)Rhave adjusted their seat and head restraintproperly (Y page 85).

As the driver, you also have to make sure thatthe steering wheel is adjusted correctly.Observe the information relating to the cor-rect driver's seat position (Y page 84).You also have tomake sure that an air bag caninflate properly if deployed (Y page 47).An air bag supplements a correctly worn seatbelt. As an additional safety device, the airbag increases the level of protection for vehi-cle occupants in the event of an accident. Forexample, if, in the event of an accident, theprotection offered by the seat belt is suffi-cient, the air bags are not deployed. When anaccident occurs, only the air bags thatincrease protection in that particular accidentsituation are deployed. However, seat beltsand air bags generally do not protect againstobjects penetrating the vehicle from the out-side.Information on restraint system operationcan be found under "Deployment of Emer-gency Tensioning Devices and air bags"(Y page 49).For more information about children travelingwith you in the vehicle and on child restraintsystems, see "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 52).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGModifications to the restraint system maycause it to no longer work as intended. Therestraint system may then not perform itsintended protective function andmay fail in anaccident or trigger unexpectedly, for example.

This poses an increased risk of injury or evenfatal injury.Never modify parts of the restraint system.Never tamper with the wiring, the electroniccomponents or their software.If it is necessary tomodify an air bag system toaccommodate a person with disabilities, con-tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center fordetails. USA only: for further information con-tact our Customer Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1‑800‑367‑6372).

Restraint system warning lampThe functions of the restraint system arechecked after the ignition is switched on andat regular intervals while the engine is run-ning. Therefore, malfunctions can be detec-ted in good time.The 6 restraint system warning lamp inthe instrument cluster lights upwhen the igni-tion is switched on. It goes out no later than afew seconds after the vehicle is started. Thecomponents of the restraint system are inoperational readiness.A malfunction has occurred if the 6restraint system warning lamp:Rdoes not light up after the ignition isswitched onRdoes not go out after a few seconds withthe engine runningRlights up again while the engine is running

G WARNINGIf restraint system is malfunctioning, restraintsystem components may be triggered unin-tentionally or might not be triggered at all inthe event of an accident with a high rate ofvehicle deceleration. This can affect the Emer-gency Tensioning Device or air bag, for exam-ple. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.Have the restraint system checked andrepaired in a qualified specialist workshop assoon as possible.

Occupant safety 41

Safety

Z

Page 44: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp:is part of the BabySmart™ air bag deactiva-tion system.A permanently lit PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp informs you that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated.Depending on the person in the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger front airbag must either be disabled or enabled; seethe following points. You must make sure ofthis both before and during a journey.RChildren in a child restraint system:whether the front-passenger front air bag isenabled or deactivated depends on theinstalled child restraint system, and the ageand size of the child. Therefore, alwaysobserve the information on "Children in thevehicle" (Y page 52). There you will alsofind instructions on rearward and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat.RAll other persons: the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be off. Besure to observe the notes on "Seatbelts“ (Y page 42) and "Air bags"(Y page 47). There you can also find infor-mation on the correct seat position.

Observe the information on the BabySmart™air bag deactivation system in the front-passenger seat (Y page 56).

Seat belts

IntroductionSeat belts are the most effective means ofrestricting the movement of vehicle occu-pants in the event of an accident or the vehi-cle rolling over. This reduces the risk of vehi-cle occupants coming into contact with partsof the vehicle interior or being ejected fromthe vehicle. Furthermore, the seat belt helpsto keep the vehicle occupant in the best posi-tion in relation to the air bag.The seat belt system comprises:RSeat beltsREmergency Tensioning Devices for thefront seat belts and the outer seat belts inthe rearRSeat belt force limitersIf the seat belt is pulled out at the belt sashguide quickly or with a jerky movement, thebelt retractor locks. The belt strap cannot beextracted any further.The Emergency Tensioning Device tightensthe seat belt in an accident, pulling the beltclose against the body. However it does notpull the vehicle occupant back in the directionof the backrest.The Emergency Tensioning Device does notcorrect an incorrect seat position or the rout-ing of an incorrectly fastened seat belt.When triggered, seat belt force limiters helpto reduce the force exerted by the seat belt onthe vehicle occupant.The seat belt force limiters for the front seatsare synchronized with the front air bags,which absorb part of the deceleration force.This can reduce the force exerted on the vehi-cle occupants during an accident.

! If the front-passenger seat is unoccupied,do not insert the belt tongue into the buckleof the front-passenger seat. This may oth-erwise lead to the triggering of the Emer-gency Tensioning Device in the event of anaccident, which will then need to bereplaced.

42 Occupant safetySafety

Page 45: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Important safety notesThe use of seat belts and child restraint sys-tems is required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesEven where this is not required by law, allvehicle occupants should correctly fastentheir seat belts before starting the journey.

G WARNINGIf the seat belt is incorrectly fastened, it can-not protect as intended. Furthermore, anincorrectly fastened seat belt can cause addi-tional injury, for example, in an accident, dur-ing braking or when abruptly changing direc-tion. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants areseated properly with a correctly fastened seatbelt.

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if you have not moved the back-rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-ing or in the event of an accident, you couldslide underneath the seat belt and sustainabdomen or neck injuries, for example. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always ensure that the backrestis in an almost vertical position and that theshoulder section of your seat belt is routedacross the center of your shoulder.

G WARNINGPersons under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height cannotfasten the seat belt correctly without an addi-tional suitable restraint system. If the seatbelt is incorrectly fastened, it cannot protectas intended. Furthermore, an incorrectly fas-tened seat belt can cause additional injury, for

example, in an accident, during braking or anabrupt change of direction. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.For this reason, always secure persons under5 ft (1.50 m) in height in suitable restraintsystems.

If a child younger than 12 years and under 5 ft(1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle:Ralways secure the child in a child restraintsystem suitable for this Mercedes-Benzvehicle. The child restraint system must beappropriate to the age, weight and size ofthe childRalways observe the instructions and safetynotes in the "Children in the vehicle" sec-tion of this Operator's Manual(Y page 52) in addition to the childrestraint system manufacturer's installa-tion instructions

G WARNINGThe seat belts may not perform their intendedprotective function if:Rthey are damaged, modified, extremelydirty, bleach or dyedRthe seat belt buckle is damaged orextremely dirtyRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, beltanchorages or inertia reels have beenmodi-fied

Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage inan accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modi-fied or damaged seat belts may tear or fail,e.g. in an accident. Modified Emergency Ten-sioning Devices could accidentally trigger orfail to deploy when necessary. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten-sioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertiareels. Make sure that the seat belts areundamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow-ing an accident, have the seat belts checkedimmediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Occupant safety 43

Safety

Z

Page 46: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Only use seat belts that have been approvedfor your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Any suchmodifications could invalidate the vehicle'sgeneral operating permit.

Proper use of the seat beltsObserve the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 43).All vehicle occupants must be wearing theseat belt correctly before beginning the jour-ney. Also make sure that all vehicle occu-pants are always wearing the seat belt cor-rectly while the vehicle is in motion.When fastening the seat belt, always makesure that:Rthe seat belt tongue is only inserted to thebelt buckle belonging to that seat.Rthe seat belt is tight across your body.Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a wintercoat.Rthe seat belt is not twisted.Only then can the forces which occur bedistributed over the area of the belt.Rthe shoulder section of the belt is alwaysrouted across the center of your shoulder.The shoulder section of the belt must notcome into contact with your neck or berouted under your arm. Where possible,adjust the seat belt to the appropriateheight.Rthe lap belt passes tightly and as low downas possible across your lap.The lap belt must always be routed acrossyour hip joints and not across your abdo-men. This applies particularly to pregnantwomen. If necessary, push the lap beltdown to your hip joint and pull it tight usingthe shoulder section of the belt.Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp,pointed or fragile objects.If you have such items located on or in yourclothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses,store these in a suitable place.

Ronly one person is using a seat belt at atime.Infants and children must never travel sit-ting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In theevent of an accident, they could be crushedbetween the vehicle occupant and seatbelt.Robjects are never secured with a seat belt ifthe seat belt is also being used by one of thevehicle's occupants.

Seat belts are only intended to secure andrestrain vehicle occupants. Always observethe "Loading guidelines" for securing objects,luggage or loads (Y page 248).

Fastening and adjusting the seat beltsPlease take note of the safety notes on seatbelts (Y page 43) and the notes on their cor-rect use (Y page 44).If the center rear seat belt is used, observethe information about the seat belt for thecenter rear seat (Y page 45).

44 Occupant safetySafety

Page 47: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

X Adjust the seat (Y page 84).The seat backrest must be in an almostupright position.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly out of belt sashguide= and engage belt tongue; intobelt buckle:.

X If necessary, pull upwards on the shouldersection of the seat belt to tighten the beltacross your body.

The shoulder section of the belt must alwaysrun over the center of the shoulder. Adjust thebelt sash guide if necessary.X To raise: slide the belt sash guide upwards.The belt sash guide engages in various posi-tions.

X To lower: pull release button? and slidethe belt sash guide downwards.

X Let go of release button? in the desiredposition and make sure that the belt sashguide engages.

All seat belts in the vehicle, except the driv-er's seat belt, are equippedwith a special seatbelt retractor to secure child restraint sys-tems properly. Further information can befound under "Special seat belt retractor"(Y page 53).

Seat belt for the center rear seat

G WARNINGWhen the three-point seat belt for the centerrear seat is not in use, it may be thrownaround while driving, e.g. when braking or inan accident. There is a risk of injury.

When the three-point seat belt for the centerrear seat is not in use, always secure both beltbuckle tongues in the retainer.

: Bracket for seat belt tongues; Belt buckle for fixed belt tongue= Release button for fixed belt tongue? Fixed belt tongueA Belt buckle for movable belt tongueB Release button for movable belt tongueC Movable belt tongue

X Pull both seat belt tongues? andC frombracket:.

Occupant safety 45

Safety

Z

Page 48: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the beltoutlet and engage fixed belt tongue? inbelt buckle;.

X To fasten the seat belt: pull the seat beltsmoothly from the belt outlet and engagemovable belt tongueC in belt buckleA.

X If necessary, pull upwards on the shouldersection of the seat belt to tighten the beltacross your body.

Releasing seat belts

! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolledup. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tonguewill be trapped in the door or in the seat

mechanism. This could damage the door,the door trim panel and the seat belt. Dam-aged seat belts can no longer fulfill theirprotective function and must be replaced.Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

X Press release button:, hold belttongue; firmly and guide it back towardsbelt sash guide=.

Belt warning for the driver and frontpassengerThe7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster is a reminder that all occupantsmust fasten their seat belts. It may light upcontinuously or flash. In addition, there maybe a warning tone.Regardless of whether the driver's seat belthas already been fastened, the7 seat beltwarning lamp lights up for six seconds eachtime the engine is started. If, aftersix seconds, the driver or front-passengerseat belt has not been fastened and the doorsare closed, the 7 seat belt warning lamplights up again. As soon as the driver's andfront-passenger seat belts are fastened or afront door is opened again, the 7 seat beltwarning lamp goes out.If the driver's seat belt is not fastened afterthe engine is started, an additional warningtone will sound. This warning tone stops after

46 Occupant safetySafety

Page 49: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

six seconds or when the driver's seat belt isfastened.If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph(25 km/h) once and the driver's and front-passenger seat belts are not fastened, awarning tone sounds. The warning tonesounds with increasing intensity for60 seconds or until the driver or frontpassenger have fastened their seat belts.If the driver or front passenger unfasten theirseat belts during the journey, the seat beltwarning is activated again.

i For more information on the 7 seatbelt warning lamp, see "Warning and indi-cator lamps in the instrument cluster, seatbelts" (Y page 235).

Air bags

IntroductionThe installation point of an air bag can be rec-ognized by the AIR BAG symbol.An air bag complements the correctly fas-tened seat belt. It is no substitute for the seatbelt. The air bag provides additional protec-tion in applicable accident situations.Not all air bags are deployed in an accident.The different air bag systems function inde-pendently from one another (Y page 49).However, no system available today can com-pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injurycaused by an air bag due to the high speed atwhich the air bag must be deployed.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not sit in the correct seat position,the air bag cannot protect as intended andcould even cause additional injury whendeployed. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.

To avoid hazardous situations, always makesure that all of the vehicle's occupants:Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly,including pregnant womenRare sitting correctly andmaintain the great-est possible distance to the air bagsRfollow the following instructionsAlways make sure that there are no objectsbetween the air bag and the vehicle's occu-pants.

RAdjust the seats properly before beginningyour journey. Always make sure that theseat is in an almost upright position. Thecenter of the head restraint must supportthe head at about eye level.RMove the driver's and front-passengerseats as far back as possible. The driver'sseat position must allow the vehicle to bedriven safely.ROnly hold the steering wheel on the out-side. This allows the air bag to be fullydeployed.RAlways lean against the backrest while driv-ing. Do not lean forwards or lean againstthe door or side window. You may other-wise be in the deployment area of the airbags.RAlways keep your feet in the footwell infront of the seat. Do not put your feet on thedashboard, for example. Your feet may oth-erwise be in the deployment area of the airbag.RFor this reason, always secure persons lessthan 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraintsystems. Up to this height, the seat beltcannot be worn correctly.

If a child is traveling in your vehicle, alsoobserve the following notes:RAlways secure children under 12 years ofage and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) in height insuitable child restraint systems.RChild restraint systems should be installedon the rear seats.

Occupant safety 47

Safety

Z

Page 50: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facingchild restraint system on the front-passenger seat when the front-passengerfront air bag is deactivated. If thePASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp ispermanently lit, the front-passenger frontair bag is deactivated (Y page 42).RAlways observe the instructions and safetynotes on "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 52) and on the "Child restraintsystem on the front-passenger seat"(Y page 58) in addition to the childrestraint system manufacturer's installa-tion instructions.

Objects in the vehicle interior may pre-vent an air bag from functioning correctly.Before starting your journey and to avoid risksresulting from the speed of the air bag as itdeploys, make sure that:Rthere are no people, animals or objectsbetween the vehicle occupants and an airbag.Rthere are no objects between the seat, doorand B-pillar.Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang onthe grab handles or coat hooks.Rno accessories, such as cup holders, areattached to the vehicle within the deploy-ment area of an air bag, e.g. to doors, sidewindows, rear side trim or side walls.Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objectsare in the pockets of your clothing. Storesuch objects in a suitable place.

G WARNINGIf you modify the air bag cover or affix objectssuch as stickers to it, the air bag can no longerfunction correctly. There is an increased riskof injury.Never modify an air bag cover or affix objectsto it.

G WARNINGSensors to control the air bags are located inthe doors. Modifications or work not per-formed correctly to the doors or door panel-

ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to thefunction of the sensors being impaired. The airbags might therefore not function properlyany more. Consequently, the air bags cannotprotect vehicle occupants as they aredesigned to do. There is an increased risk ofinjury.Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.Always have work on the doors or door pan-eling carried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Front air bags

Driver's air bag: deploys in front of thesteering wheel. Front-passenger air bag;deploys in front of and above the glove box.When deployed, the front air bags offer addi-tional head and thorax protection on the frontseats.The permanently lit PASSENGERAIRBAGOFFindicator lamp shows you that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated(Y page 42).Front-passenger bag; is only deployed if:Ran occupant is detected on the front-passenger seatRthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is not lit (Y page 56)Rthe restraint system control unit predicts ahigh accident severity

48 Occupant safetySafety

Page 51: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Window curtain air bags

Window curtain air bags: are integratedinto the side of the roof frame and deployed inthe area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.When deployed, the window curtain air bagenhances the level of protection for the head.However, it does not protect the chest orarms.In the event of a side impact, the window cur-tain air bag is deployed on the side on whichthe impact occurs.If the system determines that they can offeradditional protection to that provided by theseat belt, a window curtain air bag may bedeployed in other accident situations(Y page 49).

Deployment of Emergency TensioningDevices and air bags

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe air bag parts are hot after an air bag hasbeen deployed. There is a risk of injury.Do not touch the air bag parts. Have adeployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe-cialist workshop as soon as possible.

G WARNINGA deployed air bag no longer offers any pro-tection and cannot provide the intended pro-tection in an accident. There is an increasedrisk of injury.

Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special-ist workshop in order to have a deployed airbag replaced.

It is important for your safety and that of yourpassenger to have deployed air bags replacedand to have any malfunctioning air bagsrepaired. This will help to make sure the airbags continue to perform their protectivefunction for the vehicle occupants in theevent of a crash.

G WARNINGPyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devicesthat have been deployed are no longer opera-tional and are unable to perform their inten-ded protective function. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency Ten-sioning Devices which have been triggeredimmediately replaced at a qualified specialistworkshop.

If Emergency Tensioning Devices are trig-gered or air bags are deployed, you will hear abang, and a small amount of powder may alsobe released. The 6 restraint system warn-ing lamp lights up.Only in rare cases will the bang affect yourhearing. The powder that is released gener-ally does not constitute a health hazard, but itmay cause short-term breathing difficulties inpeople with asthma or other respiratory prob-lems. To avoid this, youmay wish to get out ofthe vehicle or open the windows as soon as itis safe to do so.Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tension-ing Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate mate-rial, which may require special handling andregard for the environment. National guide-lines must be observed during disposal. InCalifornia, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.

Occupant safety 49

Safety

Z

Page 52: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Method of operationDuring the first stage of a collision, therestraint system control unit evaluates impor-tant physical data relating to vehicle deceler-ation or acceleration, such as:RdurationRdirectionRintensityBased on the evaluation of this data, therestraint system control unit triggers theEmergency Tensioning Devices during a fron-tal or rear collision.An Emergency Tensioning Device can only betriggered, if:Rthe ignition is switched on.Rthe components of the restraint system areoperational; see "Restraint system warninglamp" (Y page 41)Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle onthe respective front-passenger seat

The Emergency Tensioning Devices in therear compartment are triggered independ-ently of the lock status of the seat belts.If the restraint system control unit detects amore severe accident, further components ofthe restraint system are activated independ-ently of each other in certain frontal collisionsituations:RDriver's air bagRFront-passenger front air bagThe front-passenger front air bag is activatedor deactivated depending on the person onthe front-passenger seat. The front-passenger front air bag can only deploy in anaccident if the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indi-cator lamp is off. Observe the information onthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp(Y page 42).Your vehicle has a two-stage driver's air bag.During the first deployment stage the driver'sair bag fills with sufficient propellant gas toreduce the risk of injuries. The front air bag isfully deployed with the maximum amount of

propellant gas if a second deployment thresh-old is reached within a few milliseconds.The activation threshold of the EmergencyTensioning Devices and the air bag are deter-mined by evaluating the rate of vehicle decel-eration or acceleration which occurs at vari-ous points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. Deployment should takeplace in good time at the start of the collision.The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelera-tion and the direction of the force are essen-tially determined by:Rthe distribution of forces during the colli-sionRthe collision angleRthe deformation characteristics of the vehi-cleRthe characteristics of the object with whichthe vehicle has collided

Factorswhich can only be seen andmeasuredafter a collision has occurred do not play adecisive role in the deployment of an air bag.Nor do they provide an indication of air bagdeployment.The vehicle can be deformed considerably,without an air bag being deployed. This is thecase if only parts which are relatively easilydeformed are affected and the rate of decel-eration is not high. Conversely, air bags maybe deployed even though the vehicle suffersonly minor deformation. This is the case if, forexample, very rigid vehicle parts such as lon-gitudinal bodymembers are hit, and sufficientdeceleration occurs as a result.If the restraint system control unit detects aside impact or if the vehicle rolls over, theapplicable components of the restraint sys-tem are activated independently of eachother depending on the apparent type of acci-dent. If the system determines a need foradditional protection for the vehicle occu-pants, the Emergency Tensioning Devices aretriggered.RWindow curtain air bag on the side ofimpact, independently of the use of the

50 Occupant safetySafety

Page 53: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

seat belt and independently of whether thefront-passenger seat is occupiedRWindow curtain air bags on the driver's andfront-passenger side in certain situationswhen the vehicle rolls over, if the systemdetermines that deployment can offer addi-tional protection to that provided by theseat belt

i Not all air bags are deployed in an acci-dent. The different air bag systems workindependently of each other.How the air bag system works is deter-mined by the severity of the accident detec-ted, especially the vehicle deceleration oracceleration and the apparent type of acci-dent:Rfrontal collisionRside impactRrollover

NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe function of the head restraint may beimpaired if you:Rattach objects such as coat hangers to thehead restraints, for exampleRuse head restraint coversIf you do so, the head restraints cannot fulfilltheir intended protective function in the eventof an accident. In addition, objects attachedto the head restraints could endanger othervehicle occupants. There is an increased riskof injury.Do not attach any objects to the headrestraints and do not use head restraint cov-ers.

Method of operationNECK-PROhead restraints/NECK-PRO luxuryhead restraints offer additional protectionagainst head and neck injuries. In the event ofa rear collision of a certain severity, theNECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury headrestraints on the driver's and front-passengerseats are moved forwards and upwards. Thisprovides better head support.If the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PROluxury head restraints have been triggered inan accident, reset the NECK-PRO headrestraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraintson the driver's seat and the front-passengerseat (Y page 51). Otherwise, the additionalprotection will not be available in the event ofanother rear-end collision. You can see that aNECK-PRO head restraint/NECK-PRO luxuryhead restraint has been triggered if it is tiltedforward and can no longer be adjusted.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe functionality of the NECK-PRO headrestraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraintschecked at a qualified specialist workshopafter a rear-end collision.

Resetting a triggered NECK-PRO headrestraint/NECK-PRO luxury headrestraint

NECK-PRO head restraints

Do not insert your finger between the cushionof the head restraint and the cover. Pay par-ticular attention while resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints.

Occupant safety 51

Safety

Z

Page 54: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

X Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraintcushion forwards in the direction ofarrow:.

X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushiondown as far as it will go in the direction ofarrow;.

X With your hand flat, firmly push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion backwards inthe direction of arrow= until it engages.

X Repeat this procedure for the secondNECK-PRO head restraint.

i Resetting the NECK-PRO head restraintsrequires a lot of strength. If you have diffi-culty resetting the NECK-PRO headrestraints, have this work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

NECK-PRO luxury head restraints

Do not insert your finger between the cushionof the head restraint and the cover. Pay par-ticular attention while resetting the NECK-PRO luxury head restraints.X Remove resetting tool: from the vehicledocument wallet.

X Slide resetting tool: into guide;between the NECK-PRO luxury headrestraint and the rear cover of the headrestraint.

X Push resetting tool: downwards until youhear the head restraint deployment mech-anism engage.

X Pull out resetting tool:.X With your hand flat, firmly push the NECK-PRO luxury head restraint cushion back-

wards in the direction of arrow= until itengages.

X Repeat this procedure for the secondNECK-PRO luxury head restraint.

X Put resetting tool: back into the vehicledocument wallet.

i If you have difficulty resetting the NECK-PRO luxury head restraints, have this workcarried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Automatic measures after an acci-dentImmediately after an accident, the followingmeasures are implemented, depending onthe type and severity of the impact:Rthe hazard warning lamps are activatedRthe emergency lighting is activatedRthe vehicle doors are unlockedRthe front side windows are loweredRthe electrically adjustable steering wheel israisedRthe engine is switched off and the fuel sup-ply is cut offRvehicles with mbrace: automatic emer-gency call

Children in the vehicle

Important safety notesAccident statistics show that childrensecured in the rear seats are safer than chil-dren secured in the front-passenger seat. Forthis reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advisesthat you install a child restraint system on arear seat. Children are generally better pro-tected there.If a child younger than 12 years and under 5 ft(1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle:Ralways secure the child in a child restraintsystem suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehi-cles. The child restraint system must be

52 Children in the vehicleSafety

Page 55: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

appropriate to the age, weight and size ofthe childRbe sure to observe the instructions andsafety notes in this section in addition tothe child restraint system manufacturer'sinstallation instructions

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is subjected todirect sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-dren may burn themselves on these parts,particularly on the metal parts of the childrestraint system. There is a risk of injury.If you leave the vehicle, taking the child withyou, always ensure that the child restraintsystem is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-tect it with a blanket, for example. If the childrestraint system has been exposed to directsunlight, let it cool down before securing thechild in it. Never leave children unattended inthe vehicle.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants havetheir seat belts fastened correctly and are sit-

ting properly. Particular attention must bepaid to children.Observe the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 43) and the notes on correct use ofseat belts (Y page 44).A booster seat may be necessary to achieveproper seat belt positioning for children over41 lbs (18 kg) or until they reach a heightwhere a lap/shoulder belt can be fastenedproperly without a booster seat.

Special seat belt retractor

G WARNINGIf the seat belt is released while driving, thechild restraint system will no longer besecured properly. The special seat belt retrac-tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in aportion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannotbe immediately refastened. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivatethe special seat belt retractor and secure thechild restraint system properly.

All seat belts in the vehicle, except the driv-er's seat belt, are equippedwith a special seatbelt retractor. When activated, the specialseat belt retractor ensures that the seat beltcannot slacken once the child seat is secured.Installing a child restraint system:X Make sure you observe the child restraintsystemmanufacturer's installation instruc-tions.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly out of the beltsash guide.

X Engage seat belt tongue in belt buckle.

Children in the vehicle 53

Safety

Z

Page 56: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Activating the special seat belt retractor:X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertiareel retract it again.While the seat belt is retracting, you shouldhear a ratcheting sound. The special seatbelt retractor is enabled.

X Push the child restraint system down sothat the seat belt is tight and does notloosen.

Removing a child restraint system/deactivat-ing the special seat belt retractor:X Make sure you observe the child restraintsystemmanufacturer's installation instruc-tions.

X Press the belt buckle release button, holdthe belt tongue and guide it back towardsthe belt sash guide.The special seat belt retractor is deactiva-ted.

Child restraint systemThe use of seat belts and child restraint sys-tems is required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesYou can obtain further information about thecorrect child restraint system from anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installed incor-rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect asintended. The child cannot then be restrainedin the event of an accident, heavy braking orsudden changes of direction. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Make sure that you observe the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation instruc-tions and the notes on use. Please ensure,that the base of the child restraint system isalways resting completely on the seat cush-

ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, underor behind the child restraint system. Only usechild restraint systems with the original coverdesigned for them. Only replace damagedcovers with genuine covers.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installed incor-rectly or is not secured, it can come loose inthe event of an accident, heavy braking or asudden change in direction. The childrestraint system could be thrown about, strik-ing vehicle occupants. There is an increasedrisk of injury, possibly even fatal.Always install child restraint systems prop-erly, even if they are not being used. Makesure that you observe the child restraint sys-tem manufacturer's installation instructions.

You will find further information on stowingobjects, luggage or loads under "Loadingguidelines" (Y page 248).

G WARNINGChild restraint systems or their securing sys-tems which have been damaged or subjectedto a load in an accident can no longer protectas intended. The child cannot then berestrained in the event of an accident, heavybraking or sudden changes of direction. Thereis an increased risk of injury, possibly evenfatal.Replace child restraint systems which havebeen damaged or subjected to a load in anaccident as soon as possible. Have the secur-ing systems on the child restraint systemchecked at a qualified specialist workshop,before you install a child restraint systemagain.

The securing systems of child restraint sys-tems are:Rthe seat belt systemRthe LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing ringsRthe Top Tether anchorages

54 Children in the vehicleSafety

Page 57: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

i If it is absolutely necessary to carry a childon the front-passenger seat, be sure toobserve the information on "Child restraintsystems on the front-passenger seat"(Y page 58). There you will also find infor-mation on deactivating the front-passengerfront air bag.

All child restraint systems must meet the fol-lowing standards:RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stand-ards 213 and 225RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards213 and 210.2

Confirmation that the child restraint systemcorresponds to the standards can be foundon an instruction label on the child restraintsystem. This confirmation can also be foundin the installation instructions that are inclu-ded with the child restraint system.Observe thewarning labels in the vehicle inte-rior and on the child restraint system.

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur-ing system

G WARNINGLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systemsdo not offer sufficient protective effect forchildren whose weight is greater than 48 lbs(22 kg) who are secured using the safety beltintegrated in the child restraint system. In theevent of an accident, a child might not berestrained correctly. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg),only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraintsystems with which the child is also securedwith the vehicle seat belt. Also secure thechild restraint system with the Top Tetherbelt, if available.

Always comply with the manufacturer'sinstallation and operating instructions for thechild restraint system used.

Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system isengaged correctly in both LATCH-type (ISO-FIX) securing rings

! When installing the child restraint system,make sure that the seat belt for the middleseat does not get trapped. The seat beltcould otherwise be damaged.

: LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing ringsX Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint system on both LATCH-type (ISO-FIX) securing rings:.

ISOFIX is a standardized securing system forspecially designed child restraint systems onthe rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securingrings: for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint systems are installed on the left andright rear seats.Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats mayalso be used and can be installed using thevehicle's seat belt system. Install the childseat according to the manufacturer's instruc-tions.

Top Tether

IntroductionTop Tether provides an additional connectionbetween the child restraint system securedwith a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat mountand the vehicle. This helps reduce the risk ofinjury even further. If the child restraint sys-tem is equipped with a Top Tether belt, thisshould always be used.

Children in the vehicle 55

Safety

Z

Page 58: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the rear seats or the rear seat backrests arenot locked, they could fold forwards in theevent of an accident, heavy braking or suddenchanges of direction. As a result, childrestraint systems cannot perform their inten-ded protective function. Rear seats and rearseat backrests that are not locked can alsocause additional injuries, e.g. in the event ofan accident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Always lock the rear seats and rear seatbackrests after installing a Top Tether belt.Observe the lock verification indicator. Adjustthe rear seat backrests so that they are in anupright position.

Top Tether anchorages

Top Tether anchorages; are on the cargocompartment floor.

X Remove cargo compartment cover(Y page 253).

X Move the head restraint upwards.X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint system with Top Tether. Alwayscomply with the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation instructionswhen doing so.

X Route Top Tether belt= under the headrestraint between the two head restraintbars.

X Hook Top Tether hook: of Top Tether belt= into Top Tether anchorage;.Make sure that Top Tether beltB is nottwisted.

X Tension Top Tether belt=. Always complywith the child restraint systemmanufactur-er's installation instructionswhen doing so.

X Move head restraint back down againslightly if necessary (Y page 87). Makesure that you do not interfere with the cor-rect routing of Top Tether belt=.

BabySmart™ air bag deactivation sys-temThe BabySmart™ air bag deactivation sys-tem's sensor system in the front-passengerseat detects whether a special Mercedes-Benz child restraint system with a trans-ponder for the BabySmart™ air bag deactiva-tion system has been installed. In this case,the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamplights up and remains lit. The front-passengerfront air bag is deactivated.When the SmartKey is removed from the igni-tion lock or is in position 0, the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is not lit.

i If the front-passenger front air bag isdeactivated by the BabySmart™ air bagdeactivation system, the following remainenabled on the front-passenger side:Rthe window curtain air bagRthe Emergency Tensioning Device

56 Children in the vehicleSafety

Page 59: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

G WARNINGIf you secure a child in a child restraint systemon the front-passenger seat and thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp isoff, the front-passenger front air bag candeploy in the event of an accident. The childcould be struck by the air bag. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Make sure that the front-passenger front airbag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.

G WARNINGIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag isdisabled. It will not be deployed in the event ofan accident and cannot perform its intendedprotective function. A person in the front-passenger seat could then, for example, comeinto contact with the vehicle's interior, espe-cially if the person is sitting too close to thedashboard. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.In this case the front-passenger seat may notbe used. Only suitable rearward-facing orforward-facing child restraint systemsmay beinstalled on the front-passenger seat. Alwaysobserve the child restraint system manufac-turer's installation instructions.

G WARNINGIf you secure a child in a forward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seatand you position the front-passenger seat tooclose to the dashboard, in the event of anaccident, the child could:Rcome into contact with the vehicle's inte-rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-cator lamp is lit, for exampleRbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off

This poses an increased risk of injury or evenfatal injury.Move the front-passenger seat as far back aspossible. Always make sure that the shoulderbelt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle

belt sash guide to the shoulder belt guide onthe child restraint system. The shoulder beltstrap must be routed forwards and down-wards from the belt sash guide. If necessary,adjust the belt sash guide and the front-passenger seat accordingly. Always observethe information about suitable positioning ofthe child restraint system in this Operator'sManual as well as the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation instructions.

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp:shows you whether the front-passenger frontair bag is deactivated.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.The system carries out self-diagnostics.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampmust light up for approximately six seconds.If, after the system self-test, thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp:Ris lit: the front-passenger front air bag isdeactivated. It will then not be deployed inthe event of an accident.Ris not lit, the sensor system did not detecta child restraint system with transponderfor the BabySmart™ air bag deactivationsystem. If, in the event of an accident, alldeployment criteria are met, the front-passenger front air bag is deployed.

Children in the vehicle 57

Safety

Z

Page 60: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

G WARNINGElectronic devices on the front-passengerseat can affect the function of the Baby-Smart™ air bag deactivation system, forexample:RLaptopRMobile phoneRTransponder cards such as ski passes oraccess passes

The front-passenger air bag could deploy acci-dentally or not function as intended during anaccident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Do not place any of the devices mentionedabove or similar devices on the front-passenger seat. Be aware of the status of thefront-passenger front air bag both before andduring the journey.

Child restraint system on the front-passenger seat

General notesAccident statistics show that childrensecured in the rear seats are safer than chil-dren secured in the front-passenger seat. Forthis reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advisesthat you install the child restraint system on arear seat.If it is absolutely necessary to install a childrestraint system on the front-passenger seat,always observe the information on the "Baby-Smart™ air bag deactivation system"(Y page 56).You can thus avoid the risks that could ariseas a result of:Ra child restraint system that is not detectedby the BabySmart™ air bag deactivationsystem sensor systemRthe unintentional deactivation of the front-passenger front air bagRthe unsuitable positioning of the childrestraint system, e.g. too close to the dash-board

Rearward-facing child restraint systemIf it is absolutely necessary to install a rear-ward-facing child restraint system on thefront-passenger seat, always make sure thatthe front-passenger front air bag is deactiva-ted. Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp is permanently lit (Y page 42)is the front-passenger front air bag deactiva-ted.Always observe the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation and operatinginstructions.

Forward-facing child restraint systemIf it is absolutely necessary to install aforward-facing child restraint system on thefront-passenger seat, always move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Theentire base of the child restraint systemmustalways rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the childrestraint system must lie as flat as possibleagainst the backrest of the front-passengerseat. The child restraint system must nottouch the roof or be subjected to a load by thehead restraint. Adjust the angle of the seatbackrest and the head restraint positionaccordingly. Alwaysmake sure that the shoul-der belt strap is correctly routed from thevehicle belt sash guide to the shoulder beltguide on the child restraint system. The shoul-der belt strap must be routed forwards anddownwards from the belt sash guide. If nec-essary, adjust the belt sash guide and thefront-passenger seat accordingly.Always observe the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation and operatinginstructions.

58 Children in the vehicleSafety

Page 61: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Problems with the BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicatorlamp on the center con-sole is lit.

A special Mercedes-Benz child restraint system with a trans-ponder for the BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system has beeninstalled on the front-passenger seat. The front-passenger air baghas therefore been deactivated as desired.

G WARNINGThere is no child restraint system installed on the front-passengerseat. The BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system is malfunc-tioning, for example due to electronic devices on the front-passenger seat.There is a risk of injury.X Remove electronic equipment from the front-passenger seat,for example:RLaptopRMobile phoneRCard with a transponder, such as a ski pass or access pass

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, thefront-passenger seat may not be used.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

The 6 restraint sys-tem warning lamplights up and/or thePASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lampdoes not light up brieflywhen you switch theignition on.

G WARNINGThe BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system is malfunctioning.Do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat.It is recommended that you install the child restraint system on asuitable rear seat.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.X Please also refer to the notes about the restraint systemwarninglamp (Y page 242).

Child-proof locks

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen children ride on the vehicle's rear seats,activate the override switch. Otherwise, thechildren could be injured, e.g. by trappingthemselves in the rear side window.

Children in the vehicle 59

Safety

Z

Page 62: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, always remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock. Always takethe SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.Do not leave children unattended in the vehi-cle, even if they are secured in a child restraintsystem, orwith access to an unlocked vehicle.A child's unsupervised access to a vehiclecould result in an accident and/or seriouspersonal injury. The children could:Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicleRbe seriously or fatally injured throughexcessive exposure to extreme heat or coldRinjure themselves or cause an accidentwithvehicle equipment that can be operatedeven if the SmartKey is removed from theignition lock or removed from the vehicle,such as seat adjustment, steering wheeladjustment, or the memory function

If children open a door, they could injure otherpersons or get out of the vehicle and injurethemselves or be injured by following traffic.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. The child restraint system'smetal parts, for example, could become veryhot, and the child could be burned on theseparts.

Child-proof locks for the rear doors

G WARNINGChildren could open a rear door from insidethe vehicle. This could result in serious inju-ries or an accident. Therefore, when childrenride in the rear always secure the rear doorswith the child-proof locks.

You secure each door individually with thechild-proof locks on the rear doors. A doorsecured with a child-proof lock cannot beopened from inside the vehicle. When thevehicle is unlocked, the door can be openedfrom the outside.

X To activate: press the child-proof locklever down in the direction of arrow;.

X Make sure that the child-proof locks areworking properly.

X To deactivate: press the child-proof locklever up in the direction of arrow:.

Override feature for the rear side win-dows

G WARNINGWhen children ride on the vehicle's rear seats,activate the override switch. Otherwise, thechildren could be injured, e.g. by trappingthemselves in the rear side window.

X To activate/deactivate: press button:.If indicator lamp; is lit, operation of therear side windows is disabled. Operation isonly possible using the switches in the driv-er's door. If indicator lamp; is off, oper-ation is possible using the switches in therear compartment.

60 Children in the vehicleSafety

Page 63: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Pets in the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you leave animals unattended or unsecuredin the vehicle, they could press buttons orswitches, for example.As a result, they could:Ractivate vehicle equipment and becometrapped, for exampleRactivate or deactivate systems, therebyendangering other road users

Unsecured animals could also be flung aroundthe vehicle in the event of an accident or sud-den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi-cle occupants. There is a risk of an accidentand injury.Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-cle. Always secure animals properly duringthe journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans-port box.

Driving safety systems

Overview of driving safety systemsIn this section, you will find information aboutthe following driving safety systems:RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)(Y page 62)RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 62)RAdaptive brake lights (Y page 63)RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)(Y page 63)REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)(Y page 65)RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 65)RTrailer stabilization

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe ABS, the BAS, and the ESP® switch offwhen the differential locks are switched on.When the ABS, the BAS, and the ESP® areswitched offRwheels may lock during hard brakingRsteering capabilities are reducedRbraking distance is increasedRvehicle stability in standard driving maneu-vers is increased

Make sure the differential locks are switchedon at all times exceptwhen driving off-road forexample. Switch on the differential locksimmediately when returning from off-roaddriving.

If you fail to adapt your driving style or if youare inattentive, the driving safety systems canneither reduce the risk of an accident noroverride the laws of physics. Driving safetysystems are merely aids designed to assistdriving. You are responsible for the distanceto the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed andfor braking in good time. Always adapt yourdriving style to suit the prevailing road andweather conditions and maintain a safe dis-tance from the vehicle in front. Drive care-fully.

i Please note that the driving safety sys-tems described only work as effectively aspossible if there is adequate contactbetween the tires and the road surface. Payparticular attention to the informationregarding tires, recommended minimumtire tread depths etc. in the "Wheels andtires" section (Y page 306).In wintry driving conditions, always usewinter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary,snow chains. Only in this way will the driv-ing safety systems described in this sectionwork as effectively as possible.

Driving safety systems 61

Safety

Z

Page 64: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 61).

G WARNINGIf the ABSmalfunctions, other driving systemssuch as the BAS or the ESP® are also switchedoff. Observe indicator and warning lamps thatmay come on as well as messages in the mul-tifunction display that may appear.If the ABS malfunctions, the wheels may lockduring hard braking, reducing the steeringcapability and extending the braking distance.

G WARNINGIf ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock whenbraking. The steerability and braking charac-teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-ally, further driving safety systems are deac-tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-ding and accidents.Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-diately at a qualified specialist workshop.

ABS regulates brake pressure in such a waythat the wheels do not lock when you brake.This allows you to continue steering the vehi-cle when braking.Provided that the differential locks are notactive, ABS works from a speed of about5 mph (8 km/h) upwards, regardless of road-surface conditions. ABS works on slipperysurfaces, even if you only brake gently.The yellow ! ABS warning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up when the ignitionis switched on. It goes out when the engine isrunning.

BrakingIf ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel apulsing in the brake pedal.

X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress thebrake pedal vigorously until the braking sit-uation is over.

X To make a full brake application:depress the brake pedal with full force.

The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica-tion of hazardous road conditions, and func-tions as a reminder to take extra care whiledriving.

Off-road ABSIf the LOW RANGE shift range is selected bythe transfer case, (Y page 186), an ABS sys-tem specifically suited to off-road terrain isautomatically activated.At speeds below 37mph (60 km/h), the frontwheels lock cyclically during braking. The dig-ging-in effect achieved in the process reducesthe stopping distance on off-road terrain. Thislimits steering capability.

BAS (Brake Assist System)i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 61).

G WARNINGIf BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distancein an emergency braking situation isincreased. There is a risk of an accident.In an emergency braking situation, depressthe brake pedal with full force. ABS preventsthe wheels from locking.

BAS operates in emergency braking situa-tions. If you depress the brake pedal quickly,BAS automatically boosts the braking force,thus shortening the stopping distance.X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed untilthe emergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once yourelease the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

62 Driving safety systemsSafety

Page 65: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Adaptive brake lightsIf you brake sharply from a speed of morethan 30 mph (50 km/h) or if braking is assis-ted by BAS, the brake lamps flash rapidly. Inthis way, traffic traveling behind you iswarned in an even more noticeable manner.If you brake sharply from a speed of morethan 45 mph (70 km/h) to a standstill, thehazard warning lamps are activated automat-ically. If the brakes are applied again, thebrake lamps light up continuously. The hazardwarning lamps are deactivated automaticallyif you drive faster than 6 mph (10 km/h). Youcan also switch off the hazard warning lampsusing the hazard warning button(Y page 104).

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 61).

G WARNINGIf ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable tostabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv-ing safety systems are deactivated. Thisincreases the risk of skidding and an accident.Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at aqualified specialist workshop.

! Only operate the vehicle for amaximumoften seconds on a brake test dynamometer.Switch off the ignition.Application of the brakes by ESP®may oth-erwise destroy the brake system.

! A function or performance test shouldonly be carried out on a two-axle dyna-mometer. Before you operate the vehicleon such a dynamometer, please consult aqualified workshop. You could otherwisedamage the drive train or the brake system.

ESP® monitors driving stability and traction.Traction is the power transmission betweenthe tires and the road surface.ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lampin the instrument cluster lights up continu-ously when the engine is running.If the ÷ warning lamp and the å warn-ing lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is notavailable due to a malfunction.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 239) and any display messages thatappear in the instrument cluster(Y page 213).If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviatingfrom the direction desired by the driver, oneor more wheels are braked to stabilize thevehicle. If necessary, the engine output is alsomodified to keep the vehicle on the desiredcourse within physical limits. ESP® assiststhe driver when pulling away on wet or slip-pery roads. ESP® can also stabilize the vehi-cle during braking.If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ warning lampflashes in the instrument cluster.If ESP® intervenes:X Do not deactivate ESP® under any circum-stances.

X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary when pulling away.

X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevail-ing road and weather conditions.

i Only use wheels with the recommendedtire sizes. Only then will ESP® functionproperly.

i If differential locks are switched on, ABS,BAS and ESP® switch themselves off auto-matically.

4ETS (Electronic Traction System)Traction control remains active, even if youdeactivate ESP®.

Driving safety systems 63

Safety

Z

Page 66: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

X If appropriate for the driving conditions,engage the LOW RANGE off-road gear(Y page 186).

Traction control is part of ESP®.Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi-vidually if they spin. This enables you to pullaway and accelerate on slippery surfaces, forexample if the road surface is slippery on oneside. In addition, more drive torque is trans-ferred to the wheel or wheels with traction.Traction control remains active, even if youdeactivate ESP®.Traction control is no longer active above aspeed of approximately 37 mph (60 km/h).Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi-vidually if they spin. This enables you to pullaway and accelerate on slippery surfaces, forexample if the road surface is slippery on oneside. In addition, more drive torque is trans-ferred to the wheel or wheels with traction.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-bed in the following.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for anextended period with ESP® deactivated.You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

X To deactivate: press button: until theå warning lamp lights up in the instru-ment cluster.

X To activate: press button: until theåwarning lamp goes out in the instrumentcluster.

ESP® is activated automatically when theengine is started.

i Vehicleswith the ECOstart/stop func-tion: the ECO start/stop function automat-ically switches the engine off when thevehicle comes to a stop. The engine startsautomatically when the driver wants to pullaway again. ESP® remains in its previouslyselected status. For example, if ESP® wasdeactivated before the engine wasswitched off, ESP® remains deactivatedwhen the engine is switched on again.

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the fol-lowing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelIf you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.Rthe engine's torque is no longer limited andthe drive wheels can spin. The spinning ofthewheels results in a cutting action, whichprovides better grip.Rtraction control is still activated.RESP® still provides support when youbrake.Rand are driving at above 37 mph (60 km/h)(on AMG vehicles above 62 mph(100 km/h)), ESP® still intervenes whenone wheel reaches its grip limit eventhough it is deactivated.

i If ESP® is deactivated and one or morewheels start to spin, the÷warning lampin the instrument cluster flashes. In suchsituations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehi-cle.

64 Driving safety systemsSafety

Page 67: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

i If ESP® is deactivated, it is reactivatedautomatically if you are driving at above37mph (60 km/h) (on AMG vehicles above62 mph (100 km/h)) or you exceed a cer-tain lateral acceleration.

Trailer stabilization

G WARNINGIf road and weather conditions are poor,trailer stabilization will not be able to preventthe vehicle/trailer combination from swerv-ing. Trailers with a high center of gravity cantip over before ESP® can detect this. There isa risk of an accident.Always adapt your driving style to the prevail-ing road and weather conditions.

Trailer stabilization does not work if ESP® isdeactivated because of a malfunction.If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailercombination) begins to lurch, you can onlystabilize the vehicle/trailer combination bydepressing the brake firmly.In this situation, ESP® assists you and candetect if the vehicle/trailer combinationbegins to lurch. ESP® slows the vehicle downby braking and limiting the engine output untilthe vehicle/trailer combination has stabi-lized.Trailer stabilization is active above speeds ofabout 37 mph (60 km/h).

EBD (electronic brake force distribu-tion)i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 61).

G WARNINGIf EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels canlock, e.g. under full braking. This increases therisk of skidding and an accident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleto the different handling characteristics. Have

the brake system checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Observe information regarding indicator andwarning lamps (Y page 237) as well as dis-play messages (Y page 215).EBD monitors and controls the brake pres-sure on the rear wheels to improve drivingstability while braking.

ADAPTIVE BRAKEADAPTIVE BRAKE provides increased brakingsafety. In addition to the braking function,ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has the HOLD function(Y page 180) and hill start assist(Y page 135).

Theft deterrent locking system

ImmobilizerX To activate: remove the SmartKey fromthe ignition lock.

X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.The immobilizer prevents your vehicle frombeing started without the correct SmartKey.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Theengine can be started by anyone with a validSmartKey that is left inside the vehicle.

i The immobilizer is always deactivatedwhen you start the engine.In the event that the engine cannot be star-ted when the starter battery is fullycharged, the immobilizer may be faulty.Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in theUSA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

Theft deterrent locking system 65

Safety

Z

Page 68: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

X To arm: lock the vehicle with the Smart-Key.Indicator lamp: flashes. The alarm sys-tem is armed after approximately15 seconds.

X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with theSmartKey.i If you then do not open a side door or therear door, the alarm system switches backon again after approximately 40 seconds.

X To stop the alarm: insert the SmartKeyinto the ignition lock.The alarm is switched off.

orX Press the% or& button on theSmartKey.The alarm is switched off.

A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is armed and you open:Ra doorRa door using the mechanical keyRthe rear doorRthe hoodThe alarm is also triggered if:Rthe position of the vehicle is changed.Ra window is smashed.The alarm is not switched off, even if youclose the open door that triggered it, forexample.

i If the alarm stays on for more than30 seconds, the mbrace emergency callsystem (USA only) or Tele Aid system (Can-ada only) initiates a call to the CustomerAssistance Center automatically. Thembrace emergency call system initiates thecall if:Ryou have subscribed to the Tele Aid ser-vice.Rthe Tele Aid service has been activatedproperly.Rthe requiredmobile phone, power supplyand GPS are available.

66 Theft deterrent locking systemSafety

Page 69: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Useful information .............................. 68SmartKey ............................................. 68Doors .................................................... 73Rear door ............................................. 76Side windows ...................................... 77Sliding sunroof .................................... 79

67

Openingandclosing

Page 70: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops: (Y page 24).

SmartKey

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf you attach heavy or large objects to theSmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-tionally turned in the ignition lock. This couldcause the engine to be switched off. There is arisk of an accident.Do not attach any heavy or large objects to theSmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings beforeinserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

G WARNINGIf you attach heavy or large objects to theSmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-tionally turned in the ignition lock. This couldcause the engine to be switched off. There is arisk of an accident.Do not attach any heavy or large objects to theSmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings beforeinserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

SmartKey functions

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of parkposition P or shift manual transmission intoneutral.Rstart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

: & To lock the vehicle; % To unlock the vehicleX To unlock centrally: press the% but-ton.If you do not open the vehicle withinapproximately 40 seconds of unlocking:Rthe vehicle is locked again.Ranti-theft protection is reactivated

X To lock centrally: press the& button.

68 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

Page 71: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:Rthe doorsRthe rear doorRthe fuel filler flap

i The turn signals flash once when unlock-ing and three times when locking.

You can also set an audible signal to confirmthat the vehicle has been locked. The audiblesignal can be activated and deactivated usingthe on-board computer (Y page 208).When it is dark, the surround lighting alsocomes on if it is activated in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 207).

Changing the settings of the lockingsystem

You can change the setting of the lockingsystem in such a way that only the driver'sdoor and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. Thisis useful if you frequently travel on your own.i If the setting of the locking system ischanged within the signal range of the vehi-cle, pressing the& or% button locksor unlocks the vehicle.

X To change the setting: press and holddown the% and& buttons simulta-neously for approximately six seconds untilbattery check lamp: flashes twice.

The SmartKey now functions as follows:X To unlock the driver's door and fuelfiller flap: press the% button once.

X To unlock centrally: press the% but-ton twice.

X To lock centrally: press the& button.

Restoring the factory settings

X Press the% and& buttons simulta-neously for approximately six seconds untilbattery check lamp: flashes twice.

Mechanical key

General notesIf the vehicle can no longer be unlocked withthe SmartKey, use the mechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door or the rear door, theanti-theft alarm system will be triggered(Y page 66).X To end the alarm: insert the SmartKey intothe ignition lock.

SmartKey 69

Openingandclosing

Z

Page 72: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Removing the mechanical key

: Release catch; Mechanical keyX Push release catch: in the direction ofthe arrow and at the same time removemechanical key; from the SmartKey.

SmartKey battery

Important safety notes

G WARNINGBatteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result insevere health problems. There is a risk of fatalinjury.Keep batteries out of the reach of children. Ifa battery is swallowed, seekmedical attentionimmediately.

The SmartKey batteries contain perchloratematerial, which may require special handlingand regard for the environment. Check yournational disposal guidelines. In California, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe batteries replaced at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Checking the battery

X Press the& or% button.The battery is working properly if batterycheck lamp: lights up briefly.If battery check lamp: does not light upduring the test, the battery is discharged.

X Change the battery (Y page 70).

i You can obtain a battery at any qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i Have the batteries replaced at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i If the SmartKey battery is checked withinthe signal reception range of the vehicle,pressing the& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicle

Replacing the batteryYou require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-Key (Y page 70).

70 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

Page 73: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

: Battery compartment cover; Mechanical keyX Press mechanical key; into the openingin the SmartKey in the direction of thearrow until battery tray cover: opens. Donot hold the cover closed while doing so.

X Remove battery tray cover:.

= BatteryX Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against yourpalm until battery= falls out.

X Insert the new battery with the positive ter-minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free clothto do so.

X Make sure that the surface of the battery isfree from lint, grease and all other forms ofcontamination.

X Insert the front tabs of battery tray cover:and then press to close it.

X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-Key.

X Check the function of all SmartKey buttonson the vehicle.

SmartKey 71

Openingandclosing

Z

Page 74: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Problems with the SmartKey

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

You cannot lock orunlock the vehicleusing the SmartKey.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle from adistance of approximately 1.5 ft (50 cm) and try to unlock or lockthe vehicle again.

If this does not work:X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 70) and replace it if nec-essary (Y page 70).

X Unlock (Y page 75) or lock (Y page 75) the vehicle using themechanical key.

The SmartKey is faulty.X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key(Y page 75).

X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You have lost a Smart-Key.

X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist work-shop.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

You have lost themechanical key.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

The engine cannot bestarted using theSmartKey.

The SmartKey has been in position 0 (Y page 133) for a consid-erable time.X Remove the SmartKey and reinsert it into the ignition lock.X Start the engine.

The on-board voltage is too low.X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interiorlighting, and try to turn the SmartKey again.

If this does not work:X Check the battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 295).orX Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 296).orX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

72 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

Page 75: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Doors

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, always remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock. Always takethe SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.Do not leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system, and do not give them accessto an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervisedaccess to a vehicle could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury. They could:Rinjure themselves on vehicle partsRbe seriously or fatally injured by extremeheat or coldRinjure themselves or have an accident withvehicle equipment that may still be in oper-ation even after the SmartKey has beenremoved from the ignition, such as the seatadjustment, steering wheel adjustment ormemory function.

If children open a door, they could causesevere or even fatal injury to other persons; ifthey get out of the vehicle, they could injurethemselves when doing so or be seriously oreven fatally injured by any passing traffic.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. The child restraint system'smetal parts, for example, could become veryhot, and a child could be burned on theseparts.

G WARNINGDo not carry heavy or hard objects in thepassenger compartment or cargo compart-ment unless they are firmly secured in place.Unsecured or improperly positioned cargoincreases a child's risk of injury in the event ofRstrong braking maneuversRsudden changes of directionRan accident

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of parkposition P or shift manual transmission intoneutral.Rstart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

Unlocking and opening doors fromthe insideIf the vehicle has previously been locked withthe SmartKey, opening a door from the insidewill trigger the anti-theft alarm system.Switch off the alarm (Y page 66).Only open the door when the traffic situationpermits.

Doors 73

Openingandclosing

Z

Page 76: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

X Front doors: pull door handle;.If the door is locked, locking knob: popsup. The door is unlocked and can beopened.

X Rear compartment doors: pull handle:up.The door is unlocked.

X Pull door handle;.

Centrally locking and unlocking thevehicle from the inside

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of parkposition P or shift manual transmission intoneutral.Rstart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

You can centrally lock or unlock the vehiclefrom the inside.The central locking button does not lock orunlock the fuel filler flap.

X To unlock: press button:.X To lock: press button;.The vehicle locks when all the doors andthe tailgate are closed.

You can open a front door from inside thevehicle even if it has been locked. Only openthe door when the traffic situation permits.If the vehicle has been locked with the centrallocking button:Rand the SmartKey is restored to the factorysettings, the entire vehicle is unlocked if afront door is opened from inside the vehi-cle.Rand the SmartKey is set to an individualsetting, only the front door that is openedfrom inside the vehicle is unlocked.

If the vehicle has been locked centrally withthe SmartKey, it does not unlock if you usethe central locking button.

i You cannot unlock the vehicle centrallyfrom the inside if the vehicle has beenlocked from the outside using the Smart-Key.

i It is only possible to lock the vehicle cen-trally if all doors are closed.

74 DoorsOp

eningandclosing

Page 77: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Automatic locking feature

: To deactivate; To activateX To deactivate: press and hold button:for about five seconds until a tone sounds.

X To activate: press and hold button; forabout five seconds until a tone sounds.

i If you press one of the two buttons and donot hear a tone, the relevant setting hasalready been selected.

The vehicle is locked automatically when theignition is switched on and the vehicle'swheels are moving at a speed in excess of9 mph (15 km/h).You could therefore be locked out if:Rthe vehicle is being pushed.Rthe vehicle is being towed.Rthe vehicle is being tested on a dynamom-eter.

You can also switch the automatic lockingfunction on and off using the on-board com-puter (Y page 208).

Unlocking the driver's door (mechan-ical key)If the vehicle can no longer be centrallyunlocked with the SmartKey, use themechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarmsystem will be triggered (Y page 66).

Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey(Y page 70).

X Insert the mechanical key into the lock ofthe driver's door as far as it will go.

X Turn themechanical key counter-clockwiseto position1.The door is unlocked.

X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.

X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-Key.

Locking the vehicleIf the vehicle can no longer be centrallylocked with the SmartKey, use the mechani-cal key.X Close the front-passenger door, the reardoors and the tailgate.

X Press the locking button (Y page 74).X Make sure that the locking knobs on thedoors are still visible. Press down the lock-ing knobs by hand, if necessary.

X Close the driver's door from the outside.

Doors 75

Openingandclosing

Z

Page 78: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-Key (Y page 70).

X Insert the mechanical key into the lock ofthe driver's door as far as it will go.

X Turn themechanical key clockwise as far asit will go to position1.

X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.

X Make sure that the doors and the tailgateare locked.

X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-Key.

i If you lock the vehicle as described above,the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theft alarm system is not armed.

Rear door

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, always remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock. Always takethe SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.Do not leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system, and do not give them accessto an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervisedaccess to a vehicle could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury. They could:Rinjure themselves on vehicle partsRbe seriously or fatally injured by extremeheat or coldRinjure themselves or have an accident withvehicle equipment that may still be in oper-ation even after the SmartKey has beenremoved from the ignition, such as the seatadjustment, steering wheel adjustment ormemory function.

If children open a door, they could causesevere or even fatal injury to other persons; ifthey get out of the vehicle, they could injurethemselves when doing so or be seriously oreven fatally injured by any passing traffic.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. The child restraint system'smetal parts, for example, could become veryhot, and a child could be burned on theseparts.

G WARNINGDo not carry heavy or hard objects in thepassenger compartment or cargo compart-ment unless they are firmly secured in place.Unsecured or improperly positioned cargoincreases a child's risk of injury in the event ofRstrong braking maneuversRsudden changes of directionRan accident

76 Rear doorOp

eningandclosing

Page 79: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. If the reardoor is open when the engine is running, par-ticularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaustfumes could enter the passenger compart-ment. There is a risk of poisoning.Turn off the engine before opening the reardoor. Never drive with the rear door open.

! The tailgate swings out to the side whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance.

i Do not leave the SmartKey in the cargocompartment. Otherwise, you could lockyourself out.

OpeningYou can only open the rear door after unlock-ing it first.X Press the% button on the SmartKey.

X Press release button: and pull door han-dle;.

X Open the rear door.

ClosingX Push the rear door closed from outside thevehicle.

X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the&button on the SmartKey.

Side windows

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhile closing the side windows, body parts inthe closing area could become trapped. Thereis a risk of injury.When closing make sure that no parts of thebody are in the closing area. If somebodybecomes trapped, release the switch or pressthe switch to open the side window again.

G WARNINGWhile opening the side windows, body partscould become trapped between the side win-dow and the door frame as the side windowmoves. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that nobody touches the side win-dow during the opening procedure. If some-body becomes trapped, release the switch orpull the switch to close the sidewindow again.

Opening and closing the side win-dowsThe switches for all side windows are locatedon the driver's door. There is also a switch oneach door for the corresponding sidewindow.The switches on the driver's door take prec-edence.The side windows cannot be operated fromthe rear when the override feature for the sidewindows is activated (Y page 60).

Side windows 77

Openingandclosing

Z

Page 80: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

: Front left; Front right= Rear right? Rear leftX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition.

X To open: press the corresponding switch.X To close: pull the corresponding switch.X To open automatically: press the corre-sponding switch briefly beyond the point ofresistance.The side window opens completely.

X To interrupt automatic operation: pressor pull the corresponding switch again.

i You can continue to operate the side win-dows after you switch off the engine orremove the SmartKey. This function isavailable for up to five minutes or until thedriver's or front-passenger door is opened.

i The side windows cannot be operatedfrom the rear when the override feature forthe side windows is activated (Y page 60).

Convenience openingi The convenience opening feature canonly be operated using the SmartKey. TheSmartKey must be close to the driver'sdoor handle.

You can ventilate the vehicle before you startdriving. To do this, the SmartKey is used tocarry out the following functions simultane-ously:Runlock the vehicleRopen the side windowsRopen the sliding sunroofRswitch on the seat ventilation for the driv-er's seat and front-passenger seat

X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver'sdoor handle.

X Press and hold the% button until theside windows and the sliding sunroof are inthe desired position.

X To interrupt convenience opening:release the% button.

Problems with the side windows

G WARNINGClosing the sidewindowswith increased forceor without the anti-entrapment feature couldlead to serious or even fatal injury. Make surethat nobody can become trapped when clos-ing the side windows.

Problem: a side window cannot be closedbecause objects are trapped between theside window and the door frame.X Remove the objects.X Close the side window.Problem: a side window cannot be closedand you cannot see the cause.If a side window is obstructed during closingand reopens again slightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pullthe corresponding switch again until theside window has closed.

78 Side windowsOp

eningandclosing

Page 81: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

If a side window is obstructed again duringclosing and reopens again slightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pullthe corresponding switch again until theside window has closed.i If a side window no longer opens or closesdue to a malfunction, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Sliding sunroof

Important safety notes! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free ofsnow and ice. Otherwise,malfunctionsmayoccur.Do not allow anything to protrude from thesliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals couldbe damaged.

! If the sliding sunroof still cannot beopened or closed as a result of a malfunc-tion, contact a qualified specialist work-shop.

! The weather can change abruptly. It couldstart to rain or snow. Make sure that thesliding sunroof is closedwhen you leave thevehicle. The vehicle electronics can bedamaged if water enters the vehicle inte-rior.

i Resonance noises can occur in addition tothe usual airflow noises when the slidingsunroof is open. They are caused by minorpressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior.Change the position of the sliding sunroofor open a side window slightly to reduce oreliminate these noises.

Opening and closing the sliding sun-roof

Overhead control panel: To raise; To open= To close/lowerX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2(Y page 133) in the ignition.

X Press or pull the¡ switch in the corre-sponding direction.

X To open automatically: press the¡ switch briefly beyond the point ofresistance in the direction of arrow;.The sliding sunroof opens completely.

X To interrupt automatic operation: pressor pull the¡ switch again.i When opening and raising the roof, auto-matic operation is only available if the slid-ing sunroof is in the closed position.

Operating the sliding sunroof man-uallyThe actuator is located in the cargo compart-ment, on the left-hand side behind the rearwall trim.

Sliding sunroof 79

Openingandclosing

Z

Page 82: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

X Open the rear door.X Pull off edge protection: from the doorpillar in the direction of arrow;.

X Pull away rear panel trim= as far as nec-essary in the direction of arrow? until theelectrical connections can be accessed.

X Disconnect the electrical connections.X Remove rear panel trim= completely.

X Take lug wrenchA out of the vehicle toolkit (Y page 290).

X Place lugwrenchAonto the hexagonal nutof the actuator.

X Toopen: turn lugwrenchA counter-clock-wise.

X To close: turn lug wrenchA clockwise.

X Reconnect the electrical connections.X Re-install rear panel trim=.When doing so, hook lugsB of rear paneltrim= into vehicle side wallC.

X Re-install edge protection:.X Close the rear door.

Problems with the sliding sunroof

G WARNINGYou could be severely or even fatally injuredwhen closing the sliding sunroof withincreased closing force or if the anti-entrap-ment feature is deactivated. Make sure thatnobody can become trappedwhen closing thesliding sunroof.

! If the sliding sunroof still cannot beopened or closed as a result of a malfunc-tion, contact a qualified specialist work-shop.

Problem: the sunroof cannot be closedand you cannot see the cause.

80 Sliding sunroofOp

eningandclosing

Page 83: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed duringclosing and reopens again slightly:X Immediately after the sliding sunroofblocks, pull the¡ switch in the over-head control panel down to the point ofresistance and hold it until the sliding sun-roof is closed.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again dur-ing closing and reopens again slightly:X Immediately after the sliding sunroofblocks, pull the¡ switch in the over-head control panel down to the point ofresistance and hold it until the sliding sun-roof is closed.

Sliding sunroof 81

Openingandclosing

Z

Page 84: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

82

Page 85: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Useful information .............................. 84Correct driver's seat position ............ 84Seats .................................................... 85Steering wheel .................................... 90Mirrors ................................................. 92Memory functions ............................... 95

83

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Page 86: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops: (Y page 24).

Correct driver's seat position

: Steering wheel; Seat belts= BackrestX Observe the safety guidelines on seatadjustment (Y page 85).

X Make sure that seat= is adjusted prop-erly.Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 86)

When adjusting the seat, make sure that:Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bagas possible.Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position.

Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly.Ryou have moved the backrest to an almostvertical position.Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so thatyour thighs are gently supported.Ryou can depress the pedals properly.X Check whether the head restraint is adjus-ted properly (Y page 86).When doing so, make sure that you haveadjusted the head restraint so that the backof your head is supported at eye level by thecenter of the head restraint.

X Observe the safety guidelines on steeringwheel adjustment (Y page 85).

X Make sure that steering wheel: is adjus-ted properly.Adjusting the steering wheel electrically(Y page 91).

When adjusting the steering wheel, makesure that:Ryou can hold the steering wheel with yourarms slightly bent.Ryou can move your legs freely.Ryou can see all the displays in the instru-ment cluster clearly.

X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts(Y page 43).

X Check whether you have fastened seatbelt; properly (Y page 44).

The seat belt should:Rfit snugly across your bodyRbe routed across the middle of your shoul-derRbe routed in your pelvic area across the hipjoints

X Before starting off, adjust the rear-viewmir-ror and the exterior mirrors in such a waythat you have a good view of road and traf-fic conditions (Y page 93).

X Vehicles with a memory function: savethe seat, steering wheel and exterior mirrorsettings with the memory function(Y page 95).

84 Correct driver's seat positionSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Page 87: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Seats

Important safety notes

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they adjustthe seats, particularly when unattended.There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The seats can still be adjusted when there isno SmartKey in the ignition lock.

G WARNINGWhen you adjust a seat, you or other vehicleoccupants could become trapped, e.g. on theseat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.Make sure when adjusting a seat that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"(Y page 47) and "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 52).

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGIf head restraints are not installed and adjus-ted correctly, they cannot provide protectionas intended. There is an increased risk ofinjury in the head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraints instal-led. Before driving off, make sure for everyvehicle occupant that the center of the head

restraint supports the back of the head atabout eye level.

Make sure that you do not rotate the headrestraints of the front and rear seats whenadjusting the head restraints. Otherwise, youcannot adjust the height and angle of thehead restraints correctly.Adjust the head restraint so that it is as closeas possible to your head.

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGAccording to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained on the rearseats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,we strongly recommend that children beplaced in the rear seat whenever possible.Regardless of seating position, children 12years old and under must be seated and prop-erly secured in an appropriately sized childrestraint system or booster seat recommen-ded for the size and weight of the child. Foradditional information, see the "Children inthe vehicle" section.A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is sig-nificantly increased if the child restraints arenot properly secured in the vehicle and/or thechild is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

Seats 85

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Page 88: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

! To avoid damage to the seats and the seatheating, observe the following information:Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. Ifliquid is spilled on the seats, dry them assoon as possible.Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do notswitch on the seat heating. The seatheating should also not be used to drythe seats.Rclean the seat covers as recommended;see the "Interior care" section.Rdo not transport heavy loads on theseats. Do not place sharp objects on theseat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools.The seats should only be occupied bypassengers, if possible.Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, donot cover the seats with insulating mate-rials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat cov-ers, child seats or booster seats.

! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell under or behind the seats whenmoving the seats back. There is a risk thatthe seats and/or the objects could be dam-aged.

! When the rear bench seat is folded for-wards, the front seats cannot be moved totheir rearmost position. You could other-wise damage the seats and the rear benchseat.

! Make sure that the sun visor is folded upbefore adjusting the backrest and headrestraint height. The head restraint and sunvisor could otherwise collidewhen the headrestraint is fully extended.

i If the front door is open, the seats can beadjusted for up to 30minutes after the igni-tion has been switched off.

i The rear-compartment head restraintscan be removed (Y page 88).For more information, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i You can find further information aboutenlarging the cargo compartment (foldingthe rear bench seat forwards) on(Y page 252).

Adjusting the seats electrically! Make sure that the cup holder on the cen-ter console is folded down before youmovethe front-passenger seat forwards.

: Head restraint height; Seat cushion angle= Seat height? Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentA Backrest angle

i You can store the seat settings using thememory function (Y page 95).

Adjusting the head restraints

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf head restraints are not installed and adjus-ted correctly, they cannot provide protectionas intended. There is an increased risk ofinjury in the head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraints instal-led. Before driving off, make sure for everyvehicle occupant that the center of the headrestraint supports the back of the head atabout eye level.

86 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Page 89: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Observe the following when adjusting thehead restraints:X Do not rotate the head restraints of thefront and rear seats.Otherwise, you cannot adjust the heightand angle of the head restraints correctly.

X Adjust the head restraint so that it is asclose as possible to your head.

Adjusting the front seat head restraintheight

: Head restraint height; Seat cushion angle= Seat height? Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentA Backrest angleX Slide head restraint adjustment button:up or down in the direction of the arrow.

Adjusting the luxury head restraints

X To adjust the side bolsters of the headrestraint: push or pull right and/or left-

hand side bolster: into the desired posi-tion.

X To adjust the angle of the headrestraint: push or pull the head restraint inthe direction of arrow;.

Resetting the front seat head restraintsIt is necessary to reset the front seat headrestraints after the voltage supply has beeninterrupted, e.g. if the battery has been com-pletely discharged or disconnected.X Make sure that the cup holder on the centerconsole is folded down (Y page 254).

X Move the seat as far forward as possibleand the head restraint in as far as possible.

Rear seat head restraints

Important safety notesG WARNINGIf head restraints are not installed and adjus-ted correctly, they cannot provide protectionas intended. There is an increased risk ofinjury in the head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraints instal-led. Before driving off, make sure for everyvehicle occupant that the center of the headrestraint supports the back of the head atabout eye level.

Observe the following when adjusting thehead restraints:X Do not rotate the head restraints of thefront and rear seats.Otherwise, you cannot adjust the heightand angle of the head restraints correctly.

X Adjust the head restraint so that it is asclose as possible to your head.

Seats 87

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Page 90: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Adjusting the rear seat head restraintheight

X Once the head restraint is fully lowered,press release catch:.

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to thedesired position.

X To lower: press release catch: and pushthe head restraint down until it is in thedesired position.

Installing/removing the rear seat headrestraintsX To remove: pull the head restraint up tothe stop.

X Press release catch: and pull the headrestraint out of the guides.

X To re-install: place the head restraint inthe guides of the backrest.i The notches on the guide rod must be onthe left-hand side when viewed in the direc-tion of travel.

X Push the head restraint down until you hearit engage in position.

Adjusting the multicontour seat

: To adjust the thigh cushion; To adjust the backrest contour in the lum-

bar region= To adjust the backrest contour in the

upper back region? To adjust the side bolsters of the seat

backrestYou can adjust the contour of the front seatsindividually so as to provide optimum supportfor your back and sides.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position1 or 2 (Y page 133) in the ignition lock.

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar supportYou can adjust the contour of the front seatbackrests individually to provide optimumsupport for your back.

: To raise the backrest contour; To soften the backrest contour= To lower the backrest contour? To harden the backrest contour

88 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Page 91: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Switching the seat heating on/off

General notes

G WARNINGRepeatedly switching on the seat heating cancause the seat cushion and backrest pads tobecome very hot. The health of persons withlimited temperature sensitivity or a limitedability to react to excessively high tempera-tures may be affected or they may even sufferburn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.Therefore, do not switch the seat heating onrepeatedly.

The red indicator lamps in the button indicatethe heating level you have selected.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatheating may switch off.One or more of the indicator lamps in theseat heating button are flashing.

Switching the front-seat heating on/off

X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired heating level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.i The system automatically switches fromlevel 3 to level 2 after approximately8 minutes.

The system automatically switches fromlevel 2 to level 1 after approximately10 minutes.The system automatically switches offapproximately 35 minutes after it is set tolevel 1.

Switching the rear-seat heating on/off

X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired heating level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.i The system automatically switches fromlevel 3 to level 2 after approximately8 minutes.The system automatically switches fromlevel 2 to level 1 after approximately10 minutes.The system automatically switches offapproximately 35 minutes after it is set tolevel 1.

Problems with the seat heatingIf the on-board voltage is too low, the seatheating is switched off automatically.X Switch off electrical consumers that you donot need, such as the rear windowdefroster or interior lighting.If the on-board voltage is only interruptedbriefly, the seat heating will switch back on

Seats 89

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Page 92: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

automatically. If the seat heating is notswitched on automatically:

X Switch on the seat heating manually(Y page 89)

Switching the seat ventilation on/off

Switching on/off

Seat ventilation is only available for the frontseats.The three blue indicator lamps in the buttonsindicate the ventilation level you have selec-ted.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in posi-tion 2 (Y page 133) in the ignition lock.

X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired ventilation level is set.i If you open the side windows and the slid-ing sunroof using the SmartKey(Y page 78), the driver's seat ventilationautomatically switches to the highest level.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatventilation may switch off.

Problems with the seat ventilationIf one or all of the indicator lamps in the seatventilation button are flashing, the seat ven-tilation has switched off automatically. Thevehicle's electrical system voltage is too lowbecause too many electrical consumers areswitched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you donot need, such as the rear windowdefroster or interior lighting.Once the battery is sufficiently charged, theseat ventilation will switch back on auto-matically.

Steering wheel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGChildren could injure themselves if theyadjust the steering wheel. There is a risk ofinjury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The electrically adjustable steering wheel canstill be adjusted when there is no SmartKey inthe ignition lock.

90 Steering wheelSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Page 93: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Adjusting the steering wheel

: To adjust the steering wheel height; To adjust the steering wheel position

(fore-and-aft adjustment)

i If the driver's door is open, the steeringwheel can be adjusted for up to 30minutesafter the ignition has been switched off.

i Further related subjects:REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature(Y page 92)RStoring settings (Y page 95)

Steering wheel heating

Activating/deactivating

: To switch on the steering-wheel heating; To switch off the steering-wheel heating= Indicator lampThe steering-wheel heating heats the leatherareas of the steering wheel.

X To activate:make sure that the SmartKeyis in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

X Turn the catch in the direction of arrow:.Indicator lamp= lights up.

X To deactivate: make sure that the Smart-Key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

X Turn the catch in the direction of arrow;.Indicator lamp= goes out.

i The steering wheel heating does notswitch off automatically.

i The steering wheel heatingmay switch offtemporarily if:Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior isabove 86 ‡ (30 †)Rthe temperature of the steering wheel isabove 95 ‡ (35 †)

Indicator lamp= remains on.

i The steering wheel heating is deactivatedif you remove the SmartKey from the igni-tion lock.

Problems with the steering wheel heat-ing

: To switch on the steering-wheel heating; To switch off the steering-wheel heating= Indicator lamp

Steering wheel 91

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Page 94: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

If steering wheel heating indicator lamp= isflashing, the steering wheel heating hasswitched off automatically. The vehicle'selectrical system voltage is too low becausetoo many electrical consumers are switchedon.X Switch off electrical consumers that you donot need, such as the rear windowdefroster or interior lighting.Once the battery is sufficiently charged, thesteering wheel heating will switch back onautomatically.

Steeringwheel EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea-ture

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjuststhe steering wheel and the driver's seat, youand other vehicle occupants – particularlychildren – could become trapped. There is arisk of injury.While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-ing adjustments, make sure that no one hasany body parts in the sweep of the seat andthe steering wheel.If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress one of the memory function positionbuttons, orRpress one of the memory function memorybuttons, orRmove the switch for steering wheel adjust-ment in the opposite direction to that inwhich the steering wheel is moving

The adjustment process is stopped.

G WARNINGIf you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature is making adjustments, you could losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Always wait until the adjustment process iscomplete before driving off.

! Do not activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature, if the seat backrest is reclined toofar backwards. This can damage the frontor rear seats. Youmust first move the back-rest to a vertical position.

The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes gettingin and out of your vehicle easier.You can activate and deactivate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board com-puter (Y page 208).

Position of the steering wheel when theEASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is activeThe steering wheel moves upwards andtowards the dashboard if:Ryou remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock orRyou open the driver's door with the Smart-Key in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock

i The steering wheel only moves upwardsand towards the dashboard if it has notalready reached the upper steering limiter.

Position of the steering wheel for driv-ingThe steering wheel is moved to the last selec-ted position when:Rthe driver's door is closedRyou insert the SmartKey into the ignitionlock

The last position of the steering column isstored when you switch off the ignition orwhen you store the setting with the memoryfunction (Y page 95).

Mirrors

Rear-view mirrorX Adjust the rear-view mirror by hand so youhave a good overview of the traffic condi-tions behind you.

92 MirrorsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Page 95: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Exterior mirrors

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

G WARNINGThe exterior mirror on the front-passengerside reduces the size of the image. Visibleobjects are actually closer than they appear.This means that you could misjudge the dis-tance from road users traveling behind, e.g.when changing lane. There is a risk of an acci-dent.For this reason, always make sure of theactual distance from the road users travelingbehind by glancing over your shoulder.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 133).

X Press button: to select the left-handexterior mirror.

orX Press button; to select the right-handexterior mirror.

X Press button= up, down, or to the left orright until you have adjusted the exteriormirror to the correct position. You shouldhave a good overview of traffic conditions.

i The convex exterior mirrors provide alarger field of vision.

i The exterior mirrors are heated automat-ically if the rear window defroster isswitched on and the outside temperature islow.

Folding the exteriormirrors in/out elec-trically

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 133).

X Briefly press button:.Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.i Make sure that the exterior mirrors arealways folded out fully while driving. Theycould otherwise vibrate.

i If you are driving faster than 9 mph(15 km/h), you can no longer fold in theexterior mirrors.

Setting the exterior mirrors

If the battery has been disconnected or com-pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors mustbe reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwisenot fold in when you select the "Fold in mir-rors when locking" function in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 209).X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position1 in the ignition lock (Y page 133).

X Briefly press button:.

Mirrors 93

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Page 96: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Folding the exterior mirrors in/outautomaticallyIf the "Fold in mirrors when locking" functionis activated in the on-board computer(Y page 209):Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically assoon as you lock the vehicle from the out-side.Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automat-ically as soon as you unlock the vehicle andthen open the driver's or front-passengerdoor.

Exterior mirror pushed out of positionX Press button: repeatedly until you hearthe mirror engage in position.The mirror housing is engaged again andyou can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual(Y page 93).

Automatic anti-glare mirrorsThe rear-view mirror and the exterior mirroron the driver's side automatically go into anti-glare mode if:Rthe ignition is switched on andRincident light from headlamps strikes thesensor in the rear-view mirror

i Themirrors do not go into anti-glaremodeif reverse gear is engaged or if the interiorlighting is switched on.

Parking position for the exterior mir-ror on the front-passenger side

Setting/storing the parking position

Using reverse gear

: Left-hand exterior mirror; Right-hand exterior mirror= Adjustment button? Memory buttonYou can position the front-passenger sideexterior mirror in such a way that you can seethe rear wheel on that side as soon as youengage reverse gear. You can store this posi-tion.X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary andthat the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 133).

X Press button; for the exterior mirror onthe front-passenger side.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the preset parking position.

X Use adjustment button= to adjust theexterior mirror to a position that allows youto see the rear wheel and the curb.The parking position is stored.i If you shift the transmission to anotherposition, the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side returns to the driving posi-tion.

94 MirrorsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Page 97: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Using the memory button

: Left-hand exterior mirror; Right-hand exterior mirror= Adjustment button? Memory buttonYou can position the front-passenger sideexterior mirror in such a way that you can seethe rear wheel on that side as soon as youengage reverse gear. This setting can bestored using memory button M?.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in posi-tion 2 (Y page 133) in the ignition lock.

X With the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side activated, use adjustmentbutton= to adjust the exterior mirror. Inthe exterior mirror, the rear wheel and thecurb should be visible.

X Press memory buttonM? and one of thearrows on adjustment button= withinthree seconds.The parking position is stored if the exteriormirror does not move.

X If the mirror moves out of position, repeatthe steps.

Calling up a stored parking position set-ting

: Left-hand exterior mirror; Right-hand exterior mirror= Adjustment button? Memory buttonX Turn the SmartKey to position2 (Y page 133) in the ignition lock.

X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side using button;.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the stored parking position.

The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves back to its original position:Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph(15 km/h)Rif you press button: for the exterior mir-ror on the driver's side

Memory functions

Storing settings

G WARNINGIf you use thememory function on the driver'sside while driving, you could lose control ofthe vehicle as a result of the adjustmentsbeing made. There is a risk of an accident.Only use the memory function on the driver'sside when the vehicle is stationary.

Memory functions 95

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Page 98: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

G WARNINGWhen thememory function adjusts the seat orsteering wheel, you and other vehicle occu-pants – particularly children – could becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.While the memory function is making adjust-ments, make sure that no one has any bodyparts in the sweep of the seat or steeringwheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme-diately release the memory function positionbutton. The adjustment process is stopped.

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they acti-vate the memory function, particularly whenunattended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

With the memory function, you can store upto three different settings, e.g. for three dif-ferent people.The following settings are stored as a singlememory preset:Rposition of the seat, backrest and headrestraintRdriver's side: steering wheel positionRdriver's side: position of the exterior mir-rors on the driver's and front-passengersides

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 (Y page 133) or that the respective dooris open.

X Adjust the seat (Y page 86) and headrestraint (Y page 86).

X On the driver's side, adjust the steeringwheel (Y page 91) and the exterior mirrors(Y page 93).

X Press the M memory button.X Press one of memory buttons 1, 2 or 3within three seconds.The settings are stored in the selected stor-age position.

Calling up a stored setting! If you want to move the seat from the fullyreclined position to a stored seat position,first raise the backrest using the seatswitch. The seat could otherwise be dam-aged.

X Press and hold the relevant memory button1, 2 or 3, until the seat, head restraints,steeringwheel andmirrors are in the storedposition.i The setting procedure is interrupted assoon as you release the memory button.

96 Memory functionsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Page 99: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Useful information .............................. 98Exterior lighting .................................. 98Interior lighting ................................. 105Replacing bulbs ................................. 108Windshield wipers ............................ 114

97

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Page 100: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops: (Y page 24).

Exterior lighting

Important safety notesFor reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you drive with the lights switchedon even during the daytime. In some coun-tries, operation of the headlamps varies dueto legal requirements and self-imposed obli-gations.

Driving abroad

Conversion to symmetrical low beamSwitch the headlamps to symmetrical lowbeam in countries in which traffic drives onthe opposite side of the road from the countrywhere the vehicle is registered. This preventsglare to oncoming traffic. When using sym-metrical lights, the edge of the road is not litas widely and as far ahead as normal.Have the headlamps converted at a qualifiedspecialist workshop as close to the border aspossible before driving in these countries.

Conversion to asymmetrical low beamafter returningHave the headlamps converted back to asym-metrical low-beam headlamps at a qualifiedspecialist workshop as soon as possible aftercrossing the border again.

Light switch

Operation

! Switch off the parking lamps and low-beam headlamps when you leave the vehi-cle. This prevents the battery from dis-charging.

! If the battery has been excessively dis-charged, the parking lamps or standinglamps are automatically switched off toenable the next engine start. Always parkyour vehicle safely and sufficiently litaccording to legal standards. Avoid thecontinuous use of the T parking lampsfor several hours. If possible, switch on theX right or the W left standing lamp.

1 W Left-hand standing lamps2 X Right-hand standing lamps3 T Parking lamps, side marker lamps,

license plate and instrument clusterlighting

4Ã Automatic headlamp mode/daytime running lamps

5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsIf you hear a warning tone when you leave thevehicle, the lights may still be switched on.X Turn the light switch toÃ.The turn signals, high-beam headlamps andthe high-beam flasher are operated using thecombination switch (Y page 103).

98 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

Page 101: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

The exterior lighting (except the parking/standing lamps) switches off automatically ifyou:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door with the SmartKey inposition 0

Low-beam headlamps

1 W Left-hand standing lamps2 X Right-hand standing lamps3 T Parking lamps, side marker lamps,

license plate and instrument clusterlighting

4Ã Automatic headlamp mode/daytime running lamps

5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsX To switch on the low-beam headlamps:turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock toposition 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L.The L indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up.

Daytime running lamps

Daytime running lamps in Canada

1W Left-hand standing lamps2X Right-hand standing lamps3T Parking lamps, side marker lamps,

license plate and instrument clusterlighting

4Ã Automatic headlamp mode/daytimerunning lamps

5L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsThe daytime running lamps function isrequired by law in Canada. It cannot thereforebe deactivated.X Turn the light switch toÃ.With the engine running: depending on theambient light, the daytime running lamps orthe low-beam headlamps are switched on.When the low-beam headlamps areswitched on, the L indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

When the engine is running and the vehicle isstationary: if youmove the selector lever froma drive position to P, the daytime runninglamps/low-beam headlamps go out afterthree minutes.When the engine is running, the vehicle isstationary and in high ambient light bright-ness: if you turn the light switch to T, youturn on the daytime running lamps and park-ing lamps.If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to L, the manual settings takeprecedence over the daytime running lamps.

Exterior lighting 99

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Page 102: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Daytime running lamps in the USA

1W Left-hand standing lamps2X Right-hand standing lamps3T Parking lamps, side marker lamps,

license plate and instrument clusterlighting

4Ã Automatic headlamp mode/daytimerunning lamps

5L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsIn the USA, the daytime running lamps aredeactivated upon delivery from the factory.X To activate the daytime running lamps:activate the daytime running lamps func-tion in the on-board computer(Y page 207).

X Turn the light switch toÃ.With the engine running: depending on theambient light, the daytime running lamps orthe low-beam headlamps are switched on.When the low-beam headlamps areswitched on, the L indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to T or L, the manual settingstake precedence over the daytime runninglamps.

Automatic headlamp mode

G WARNINGWhen the light switch is set toÃ, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched onautomatically if there is fog, snow or othercauses of poor visibility due to the weather

conditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

The automatic headlamp feature is only anaid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle'slighting at all times.

1 W Left-hand standing lamps2 X Right-hand standing lamps3 T Parking lamps, side marker lamps,

license plate and instrument clusterlighting

4Ã Automatic headlamp mode/daytime running lamps

5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsX To switch on automatic headlampmode: turn the light switch toÃ.SmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock:the parking lamps are switched on or offautomatically depending on the brightnessof the ambient light.With the engine running: if you have acti-vated the daytime running lamps functionin the on-board computer, the daytime run-ning lamps or the low-beam headlamps areswitched on or off automatically dependingon the brightness of the ambient light.When the low-beam headlamps areswitched on, the L indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

100 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

Page 103: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Fog lamps (except AMG vehicles)

G WARNINGWhen the light switch is set toÃ, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched onautomatically if there is fog, snow or othercauses of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

The automatic headlamp feature is only anaid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle'slighting at all times.

1 W Left-hand standing lamps2 X Right-hand standing lamps3 T Parking lamps, side marker lamps,

license plate and instrument clusterlighting

4Ã Automatic headlamp mode/daytime running lamps

5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsB N Fog lamps (except AMG vehicles)C R Rear Fog Lamp

X To switch on the fog lamps: turn theSmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to T, L orÃ.

X Press the N button.The greenN indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.

X To switch off the front fog lamps: pressthe N button.The greenN indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster goes out.

Only vehicles with front fog lamps have thefog lamps function.

Rear fog lamp

1 W Left-hand standing lamps2 X Right-hand standing lamps3 T Parking lamps, side marker lamps,

license plate and instrument clusterlighting

4Ã Automatic headlamp mode/daytime running lamps

Exterior lighting 101

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Page 104: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsB N Fog lamps (except AMG vehicles)C R Rear Fog LampX To switch on the rear fog lamp: turn theSmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L orÃ.X Press the R button.The yellow R indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press theR button.The yellow R indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

Parking lamps

1 W Left-hand standing lamps2 X Right-hand standing lamps3 T Parking lamps, side marker lamps,

license plate and instrument clusterlighting

4Ã Automatic headlamp mode/daytime running lamps

5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsB N Fog lamps (except AMG vehicles)C R Rear Fog LampX To switch on: turn the light switch toT.

Standing lamps

1 W Left-hand standing lamps2 X Right-hand standing lamps3 T Parking lamps, side marker lamps,

license plate and instrument clusterlighting

4Ã Automatic headlamp mode/daytime running lamps

5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsB N Fog lamps (except AMG vehicles)C R Rear Fog LampSwitching on the standing lamps ensures thecorresponding side of the vehicle is illumina-ted.

102 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

Page 105: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

X To switch on the standing lamps: theSmartKey is not inserted in the ignition lockor it is in position 0 (Y page 133).

X Turn the light switch toW (left-hand sideof the vehicle) or X (right-hand side ofthe vehicle).

Headlamp cleaning systemThe headlamps are cleaned automatically ifthe "Wipe with washer fluid" function is oper-ated ten times while the lights are on and theengine is running (Y page 114). When youswitch off the ignition, the automatic head-lamp cleaning system is reset and counting isresumed from 0.

Combination switch

Turn signal

: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, leftX To indicate briefly: press the combinationswitch briefly to the pressure point in thedirection of arrow; or?.The corresponding turn signal flashes threetimes.

X To indicate: press the combination switchbeyond the pressure point in the directionof arrow; or?.

High-beam headlamps

: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, leftX To switch on the high-beamheadlamps:turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock toposition 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L orÃ.X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction of arrow:.In theà position, the high-beam head-lamps are only switched on when it is darkand the engine is running.The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up when the high-beamheadlamps are switched on.

X To switch off the high-beamheadlamps:move the combination switch back to itsnormal position.The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster goes out.

Exterior lighting 103

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Page 106: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

High-beam flasher

: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, leftX To switch on: turn the SmartKey in theignition lock to position 1 or 2 or start theengine.

X Pull the combination switch briefly in thedirection of arrow=.

Hazard warning lamps

X To switch on the hazardwarning lamps:press button:.All turn signals flash. If you now switch on aturn signal using the combination switch,only the turn signal lamp on the corre-sponding side of the vehicle will flash.

X To switch off the hazardwarning lamps:press button:.

The hazard warning lamps automaticallyswitch on if:Ran air bag is deployed orRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices are trig-gered, orRthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from aspeed of above 45 mph (70 km/h) andcomes to a standstill

The hazard warning lamps switch on auto-matically if an air bag or the Emergency Ten-sioning Devices are triggered and the Smart-Key is in position 1 in the ignition lock.The hazard warning lamps switch off auto-matically if the vehicle reaches a speed ofabove 6 mph (10 km/h) again after a fullbrake application.

i The hazard warning lamps still operate ifthe ignition is switched off.

Cornering light function

The cornering light function improves the illu-mination of the road over a wide angle in thedirection you are turning, enabling better vis-ibility in tight bends, for example. The corner-ing light function can only be activated if thelow-beamheadlamps are switched on and thefog lamps are switched off.Active: if you are driving at speeds below25 mph (40 km/h) and switch on the turnsignal or turn the steering wheel.Not active: if you are driving at speeds above25 mph (40 km/h) or switch off the turn sig-

104 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

Page 107: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

nal or turn the steering wheel to the straight-ahead position.The cornering lamp may remain lit for a shorttime, but is automatically switched off afterno more than three minutes.

Headlamps and indicator lamps fog-ged up on the insideThe headlamps and the indicator lamps in theexterior mirrors may fog up on the inside ifthere is high atmospheric humidity.X Drive with the headlamps switched on.The level of moisture diminishes, depend-ing on the length of the journey and theweather conditions (humidity and temper-ature).

If the level of moisture does not diminish:X Have the headlamps checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Interior lighting

Overview of interior lighting

Front overhead control panel: p Switches the left-hand front reading

lamp on/off; c Switches the front interior lighting

on= t Switches the cargo compartment

lamp/rear compartment lighting on/off? | Switches the front interior lighting/

automatic interior lighting control off

A p Switches the right-hand readinglamp on/off

B Switches the automatic interior lightingcontrol on

Rear-compartment overhead control panel: p Switches the right-hand reading

lamp on/off; p Switches the left-hand reading lamp

on/off

Interior lighting control

General notesThe interior lighting functions are automati-cally deactivated after some time except forwhen the SmartKey is in position 2 in the igni-tion lock. This prevents your vehicle's batteryfrom discharging.The brightness of the ambient lightingmay beset using the control on the instrument clus-ter (Y page 197).

Interior lighting 105

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Page 108: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Automatic interior lighting control

Front overhead control panel: p Switches the left-hand front reading

lamp on/off; c Switches the front interior lighting

on= t Switches the cargo compartment

lamp/rear interior lighting on/off? | Switches the front interior lighting/

automatic interior lighting control offA p Switches the right-hand front read-

ing lamp on/offB Switches the automatic interior lighting

control onX To switch on: move switchB to the cen-ter position.

The interior lighting switches on automati-cally when it is dark if you:Runlock the vehicleRopen a doorRremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockX To switch off: press the | symbol onswitchB.

The interior lighting remains switched offeven when it is dark if you:Runlock the vehicleRopen a door.Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockThe interior light is activated for a short whilewhen the SmartKey is removed from the igni-tion lock. You can activate this delayedswitch-off using the on-board computer(Y page 208).

When a front door is opened, the front interiorlighting comes on. When a rear door isopened, the rear interior lighting comes on. Inaddition, the courtesy lights come on.

i If a door remains open and the SmartKeyis not in the ignition lock, the interior light-ing switches off after a short while.

Manual interior lighting control

Front interior lighting! If the interior lighting has been switchedon manually, it will not be switched offautomatically.This can cause the starter battery to dis-charge.Make sure that the interior lighting doesnot remain switched on too long after theengine has been switched off.

Front overhead control panel: p Switches the left-hand front reading

lamp on/off; c Switches the front interior lighting

on= t Switches the cargo compartment

lamp/rear interior lighting on/off? | Switches the front interior lighting/

automatic interior lighting control offA p Switches the right-hand front read-

ing lamp on/offB Switches the automatic interior lighting

control on

106 Interior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

Page 109: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

X To switch on: press the c symbol onswitchB.

X To switch off: set switchB to the centerposition.

Reading lamps

Front overhead control panel: p Switches the left-hand front reading

lamp on/off; c Switches the front interior lighting

on= t Switches the cargo compartment

lamp/rear interior lighting on/off? | Switches the front interior lighting/

automatic interior lighting control offA p Switches the right-hand front read-

ing lamp on/offB Switches the automatic interior lighting

control onX To switch on/off: press the p button.

Cargo compartment lampG WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. If the tail-gate/rear door is open when the engine isrunning, particularly if the vehicle is moving,exhaust fumes could enter the passengercompartment. There is a risk of poisoning.Turn off the engine before opening the tail-gate/rear door. Never drive off with the tail-gate/rear door open.

! Switch off the cargo compartment lamp ifyou wish to leave the rear door open for a

longer period. The battery may otherwisedischarge.

! Do not close the rear door while lock: isengaged at the bottom. Otherwise, youcould damage lock:.

Front overhead control panel: p Switches the left-hand front reading

lamp on/off; c Switches the front interior lighting

on= t Switches the cargo compartment

lamp/rear compartment lighting on/off? | Switches the front interior lighting/

automatic interior lighting control offA p Switches the right-hand front read-

ing lamp on/offB Switches the automatic interior lighting

control onX To switch on/off: press the t button.i If you open the rear door, the cargo com-partment lamp comes on. You will then beunable to switch it off using the t but-ton.Switch off the cargo compartment lamp ifyou wish to leave the rear door open for alonger period. This prevents the batteryfrom discharging.

Interior lighting 107

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Page 110: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

X Open the rear door.X To switch off with the rear door open:press lock: down in the direction of thearrow until it engages.The cargo compartment lamp is switchedoff.

X To switch on with the rear door open:press lock cylinder; on the door handle.The cargo compartment lamp resumes itsnormal function.

Rear compartment lighting

Front overhead control panel: p Switches the left-hand front reading

lamp on/off; c Switches the front interior lighting

on= t Switches the cargo compartment

lamp/rear interior lighting on/off? | Switches the front interior lighting/

automatic interior lighting control offA p Switches the right-hand reading

lamp on/offB Switches the automatic interior lighting

control on

X To switch on/off: press the t button.i The rear compartment lighting switcheson when you open a rear door. You will thenbe unable to switch it off using the tbutton.If you leave the rear doors open for a longtime, switch the rear compartment lightingoff. This prevents the battery from dis-charging.

Replacing bulbs

Important safety notes

G DANGERXenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You can getan electric shock if you remove the cover ofthe Xenon bulb and touch the electrical con-tacts. There is a risk of fatal injury.Never touch the parts or the electrical con-tacts of the Xenon bulb. Always have work onthe Xenon bulbs carried out at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

G WARNINGBulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hotwhen operating. If you change a bulb, youcould burn yourself on these components.There is a risk of injury.Allow these components to cool down beforechanging a bulb.

Do not use a bulb that has been dropped or ifits glass tube has been scratched.The bulb may explode if:Ryou touch itRit is hotRyou drop itRyou scratch itOnly operate bulbs in enclosed lampsdesigned for that purpose. Only install sparebulbs of the same type and the specified volt-age.Marks on the glass tube reduce the servicelife of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube

108 Replacing bulbsLightsandwindshieldwipers

Page 111: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

with your bare hands. If necessary, clean theglass tubewhen coldwith alcohol or spirit andrub it off with a lint-free cloth.Protect bulbs from moisture during opera-tion. Do not allow bulbs to come into contactwith liquids.Xenon bulbsIf your vehicle is equipped with Xenon bulbs,you can recognize this by the following: thecone of light from the Xenon bulbs movesfrom the top to the bottom and back againwhen you start the engine. For this to beobserved, the lights must be switched onbefore starting the engine.Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times.Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.LED lampsYou can replace neither Xenon bulbs nor LEDbulbs. Have LED bulbs changed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times.Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.Before changing bulbsHave the following bulbs replaced at a quali-fied specialist workshop:RAdditional turn signals in the exterior mir-rorsRHigh-mounted brake lampRHigh-beam/low-beam headlamps (Xenonbulbs)RDaytime running lampsRParking lamps/standing lampsRLicense plate lamp

i Individual segments of the license platelamp LEDs may fail without a display mes-sage appearing in the multifunction dis-play. Regularly check the license platelamp. If necessary, visit a qualified special-ist workshop.

You can replace the following bulbs:RFog lamp/cornering light with fog lampfunctionRTurn signal lamp (front)RBrake/tail lampRTurn signal lamp (rear)RTail lamps/standing lampsRBackup lampRRear Fog LampRSide marker lampsOther bulbsThere are bulbs other than the Xenon bulbsthat you cannot replace yourself. Only replacethe bulbs listed (Y page 109). Have the bulbsthat you cannot replace yourself replaced at aqualified specialist workshop.If you require assistance replacing bulbs, con-sult a qualified specialist workshop.Do not touch the glass tube of new bulbs withyour bare hands. Even minor contaminationcan burn into the glass surface and reducethe service life of the bulbs. Always use a lint-free cloth or only touch the base of the bulbwhen installing.Only use bulbs of the correct type.If the new bulb still does not light up, consulta qualified specialist workshop.Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times.Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.

Overview: changing bulbs/bulb types

Front bulbsYou can replace the following bulbs. The bulbtype can be found in the legend.

Replacing bulbs 109

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Page 112: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

: Turn signal lamp: 1156 NA; Side marker lamp: T 4 W= Cornering light function with fog lamp

function: H1155W (except AMGvehicles)

Rear bulbsYou can replace the following bulbs. The bulbtype can be found in the legend.

: Tail lamp/standing lamp: W 5 W; Brake lamp/tail lamp: P 21/5 W= Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W? Side marker lamp: T 4 WA Backup lamp: P 21 WB Rear fog lamp: P 21 W

Changing the front bulbs

Front fog lamps/cornering lamps withfog lamp function

X Switch off the lights.X Unscrew screws:.X Remove cover;.

X Unscrew screws=.i Only remove screws=. Do not turnadjustment screw?. If adjustmentscrew? has been turned, the front foglamp adjustment must be checked at aqualified workshop.

X Remove lampA.

110 Replacing bulbsLightsandwindshieldwipers

Page 113: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

X Hold lampA.X Lightly press bulb holderB, turn it coun-ter-clockwise to the stop and pull it out.

X Take bulbC out of bulb holderB.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holderB.X Insert bulb holderB into lampA and turnit clockwise to the stop.

X Insert lampA.X Replace and tighten screws=.X Position cover;.X Replace and tighten screws:.

Turn signal

! Make sure that the protective grille doesnot hit any painted surfaces.You could otherwise damage the paint-work.

! Do not fasten the screws too tightly. Youcould otherwise damage the lens.

Turn signal lamp with protection grille (AMG vehi-cles)X Switch off the lights.X AMG vehicles: pull protection grille: inthe direction of the arrow out of mount-ing;.

X Fold up protection grille:.

Example: turn signal lampX Switch off the lights.X Unscrew screws=.X Remove lens?.

Example: turn signal lamp

Replacing bulbs 111

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Page 114: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

X Turn bulbA counter-clockwise, applyingslight pressure, and remove it from the bulbholder.

X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder andturn it clockwise until it engages.

X Install lens?.X Replace and tighten screws=.X AMG vehicles: fold down protectiongrille: and allow it to engage in mount-ing;.

Side marker lamps

! Do not fasten the screws too tightly. Youcould otherwise damage the lens.

Front side marker lamp (example)

The bulbs of the front and rear side markerlamps are changed in the same way.X Switch off the lights.X Unscrew screws:.X Remove housing;.

X Remove dust cover=.X Push the catch to the side and pull the bulbholder with the bulb out of housing;.

X Lightly press bulb?, turn it counter-clock-wise and pull it out.

X Insert the new bulb and, applying slightpressure, turn it clockwise until it engages.

X Insert the bulb holder into housing;.X Attach dust cover=.X Insert housing;.X Replace and tighten screws:.

Changing the rear bulbs

G 55 AMG only: protective grille

! Make sure that the protective grille doesnot hit any painted surfaces.You could otherwise damage the paint-work.

Protection grille (AMG vehicles)

You must remove the protective grille beforeyou can change the bulbs in the tail lamps.

112 Replacing bulbsLightsandwindshieldwipers

Page 115: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

X Unscrew screws;.X Swing protection grille: to the right.X After changing the bulbs, swing protectiongrille: to the left.

X Tighten screws;.

Tail lamps

! When installing the lens, make sure thatthe seal is positioned correctly.

! Do not fasten the screws too tightly. Youcould otherwise damage the lens.

X Switch off the lights.X Unscrew screws:.X Remove lens;.

= Turn signal? Brake/tail lampA Tail lamp/standing lampX Turn the corresponding bulb counter-clock-wise, applying slight pressure, and removeit from the bulb holder.

X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder andturn it clockwise until it engages.

X Install lens;.X Replace and tighten screws:.X AMG vehicles: secure the protection grille(Y page 112).

Backup lamp/rear fog lamp

! Do not fasten the screws too tightly. Youcould otherwise damage the lens.

Example: rear fog lampX Switch off the lights.X Unscrew screws;.X Remove lens:.

X Turn bulb= anti-clockwise, applying slightpressure, and remove it from the bulbholder.

X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder andturn it clockwise until it engages.

X Install lens:.X Replace and tighten screws;.

Replacing bulbs 113

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Page 116: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Windshield wipers

Switching the windshield wiperson/off! Do not operate the windshield wiperswhen the windshield is dry, as this coulddamage the wiper blades. Moreover, dustthat has collected on the windshield/rearwindow can scratch the glass if wipingtakes place when the windshield/rear win-dow is dry.If it is necessary to switch on thewindshieldwipers in dry weather conditions, alwaysuse washer fluid when operating the wind-shield wipers.

! If the windshield wipers leave smears onthe windshield/rear window after the vehi-cle has been washed in an automatic carwash, this may be due to wax or other res-idue. Clean the windshield/rear windowwith washer fluid after an automatic carwash.

! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: dueto optical influences and the windshieldbecoming dirty in dry weather conditions,the windshield wipers may be activatedinadvertently. This could then damage thewindshield wiper blades or scratch thewindshield.For this reason, you should always switchoff the windshield wipers in dry weather.

If the wiper blades are worn, the windshieldwill no longer be wiped properly. This couldprevent you from observing the traffic condi-tions, thereby causing an accident.

Combination switch1 $ Windshield wipers off2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor

set to low sensitivity)3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor

set to high sensitivity)4 ° Continuous wipe, slow5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fastB í Single wipeC î To wipe with washer fluidX Switch on the ignition.X Turn the combination switch to the corre-sponding position.

Intermittent wiping is interrupted if you stopthe vehicle and open a front door. This pro-tects people getting into and out of the vehi-cle from being sprayed with water.Intermittent wiping continues when all doorsare closed and:Ryou shift the automatic transmission todrive position D or reverse gear RorRyou change the wipe setting on the combi-nation switch.

In the Ä or Å position, the appropriatewiping frequency is set automatically accord-ing to the intensity of the rain. In the Åposition, the rain sensor is more sensitivethan in the Ä position, causing the wind-shield wipers to wipe more frequently.

114 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

Page 117: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Switching the rear window wiper on/off

Combination switch: è Switch2 b To wipe with washer fluid3 I To switch on intermittent wiping4 0 To switch off intermittent wiping5 b To wipe with washer fluidX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Turn switch: on the combination switchto the corresponding position.When the rearwindowwiper is switched on,the icon appears in the instrument cluster.i The rear window wiper comes on auto-matically if you shift the selector lever to Rwhile the windshield wipers are on.

Replacing the wiper blades

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the windshield wipers begin to move whileyou are changing the wiper blades, you couldbe trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andignition before changing the wiper blades.

! To avoid damaging the wiper blades,make sure that you touch only the wiperarm of the wiper.

! Never open the hood if a windshield wiperarm has been folded away from the wind-shield.Never fold awindshieldwiper armwithout awiper blade back onto the windshield/rearwindow.Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly whenyou change the wiper blade. If you releasethe windshield wiper arm without a wiperblade and it falls onto the windshield, thewindshield may be damaged by the force ofthe impact.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe wiper blades changed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Removing the wiper blades

: Windshield wiper arm; Wiper blade= Locking spring? Hinge pieceX Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

X Fold wiper arm: away from the wind-shield until it engages.

X Position wiper blade; horizontally.X Press locking spring=.X Slide wiper blade; with hinge piece?from wiper arm:.

Windshield wipers 115

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Page 118: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Installing the wiper blade

: Windshield wiper arm; Wiper blade= Locking spring? Hinge pieceX Slide wiper arm: into newwiper blade;with hinge piece?.

X Engage locking spring= into the end ofthe wiper arm.

X Make sure that wiper blade; is seatedcorrectly.

X Fold wiper arm: back onto the wind-shield.

Problems with the windshield wipers

The windshield wipers are obstructedLeaves or snow, for example, may beobstructing the windshield wiper movement.The wiper motor has been deactivated.X For safety reasons, you should remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock.

X Remove the cause of the obstruction.X Switch the windshield wipers back on.

The windshield wipers are inoperativeThe windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.X Select another wiper speed on the combi-nation switch.

X Have the windshield wipers checked at aqualified specialist workshop.

116 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

Page 119: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Useful information ............................ 118Overview of climate control sys-tems ................................................... 118Operating the climate control sys-tems ................................................... 121Setting the air vents ......................... 128

117

Climatecontrol

Page 120: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops: (Y page 24).

Overview of climate control systems

Important safety notesObserve the settings recommended on thefollowing pages. The windows could other-wise fog up. This could prevent you fromobserving the traffic conditions, therebycausing an accident.Climate control regulates the temperatureand the humidity in the vehicle interior andfilters undesirable substances from the air.Dual-zone automatic climate control is onlyoperational when the engine is running. Opti-mum operation is only achieved if you drivewith the side windows and sliding sunroofclosed.The climatic comfort deteriorates whilst thesliding sunroof is open. The automatic climatecontrol cannot maintain the set temperaturewith the sliding sunroof open. You have toadjust the climate control manually.

i The residual heat function can only beactivated or deactivated with the ignitionswitched off (Y page 127).

i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief periodduring warm weather, e.g. using the con-venience opening feature (Y page 78). Thiswill speed up the cooling process and thedesired vehicle interior temperature will bereached more quickly.

i The integrated filter can filter out mostparticles of dust, and completely filters outpollen. A clogged filter reduces the amountof air supplied to the vehicle interior. Forthis reason, you should always observe theinterval for replacing the filter, which isspecified in the Maintenance Booklet. As itdepends on environmental conditions, e.g.heavy air pollution, the interval may beshorter than stated in the MaintenanceBooklet.

118 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Page 121: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control

Canada only: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 124); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 125)= Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 125)? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 122)A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 126)B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 124)C Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 127)D Sets the air distribution (Y page 124)E Increases the airflow (Y page 124)F Reduces the airflow (Y page 124)G DisplayH Switches climate control on/off (Y page 121)I Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 124)

Overview of climate control systems 119

Climatecontrol

Page 122: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

USA only: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 124); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 125)= Switches maximum cooling on/off (Y page 125)? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 122)A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 126)B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 124)C Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 127)D Sets the air distribution (Y page 124)E Increases the airflow (Y page 124)F Reduces the airflow (Y page 124)G DisplayH Switches climate control on/off (Y page 121)I Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 124)

Optimum use of dual-zone climatecontrolThe following contains notes and recommen-dations on optimum use of dual-zone climatecontrol.RActivate climate control using theà andÁ buttons. The indicator lamps in theà andÁ buttons light up.RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).ROnly use the defrosting function brieflyuntil the windshield is clear again.ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.if there are unpleasant outside odors or

when in a tunnel. The windows could oth-erwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawninto the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.RUse the ZONE function to adopt the tem-perature settings on the driver's side forthe front-passenger side as well. The indi-cator lamp in theá button goes out.

120 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Page 123: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Operating the climate control sys-tems

Switching climate control on/off

Points to observe before use

G WARNINGWhen the climate control system is deactiva-ted, the outside air supply and circulation arealso deactivated. Only choose this setting fora short time.Otherwise thewindows could fogup, impairing visibility and endangering youand others.

Switching climate control on/offX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 133).

X To switch on: press theà button.The indicator lamp in theà button lightsup. Airflow and air distribution are set toautomatic mode.

orX Press the^ button.The indicator lamp in the^ button goesout. The previously selected settings arerestored.

X To switch off: press the^ button.The indicator lamp in the^ button lightsup.

Operating the climate control systems 121

Climatecontrol

Z

Page 124: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification

General notesIf you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle willnot be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can fog upmore quickly. Therefore, only deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" functionbriefly.The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is only available when the engine is running.The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected.Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This isnormal and not a sign that there is a malfunction.

Switching cooling with air dehumidification on/off

! If the cooling with air dehumidification does not switch on, it is possible that the climatecontrol system has lost coolant.Have the cooling with air dehumidification checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Canada only: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 124); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 125)= Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 125)? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 122)A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 126)B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 124)C Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 127)D Sets the air distribution (Y page 124)E Increases the airflow (Y page 124)F Reduces the airflow (Y page 124)G Display

122 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Page 125: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

H Switches climate control on/off (Y page 121)I Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 124)X To activate: press theÁ button.The indicator lamp in theÁ button lights up.

X To deactivate: press theÁ button.The indicator lamp in theÁ button goes out. The "Cooling with air dehumidification"function has a delayed switch-off feature.

USA only: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 124); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 125)= Switches maximum cooling on/off (Y page 125)? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 122)A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 126)B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 124)C Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 127)D Sets the air distribution (Y page 124)E Increases the airflow (Y page 124)F Reduces the airflow (Y page 124)G DisplayH Switches climate control on/off (Y page 121)I Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 124)X To activate: press theÁ button.The indicator lamp in theÁ button lights up.

X To deactivate: press theÁ button.The indicator lamp in theÁ button goes out. The "Cooling with air dehumidification"function has a delayed switch-off feature.

Operating the climate control systems 123

Climatecontrol

Z

Page 126: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" functionWhen you press theÁ button, the indicator lamp in the button flashes three times orremains off. You can no longer switch on the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Setting climate control to automatic

G WARNINGIf you switch off the cooling function, the vehi-cle will not be cooled when weather condi-tions are warm. The windows can fog up morequickly. Window fogging may impair visibilityand endanger you and others.

In automatic mode, the set temperature ismaintained at a constant level. The systemautomatically regulates the temperature ofthe dispensed air, the airflow and the air dis-tribution.Automatic mode will achieve optimal opera-tion if cooling with air dehumidification is alsoactivated. If desired, cooling with air dehu-midification can be deactivated.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 (Y page 133) in the ignition lock.

X Set the desired temperature.X To switch on: press theà button.The indicator lamp in theà button lightsup. Automatic air distribution and airfloware activated.

X To deactivate: press the_ button.orX Press theI orK button.The indicator lamp in theà button goesout.

Setting the temperatureYou can set the temperature separately forthe driver's and front-passenger sides withcontrols: orB (Y page 119).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 133).

X Set control: orB (Y page 119) to thedesired temperature.Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

Setting the air distributionX Turn the SmartKey to position2 (Y page 133) in the ignition lock.

X Press the_ button repeatedly until thedesired symbol appears in the display.

P Directs the airflow through the centervents

O Directs the airflow through the foot-well air vents

S Directs the airflow through the centerand footwell vents

¯ Directs air through the defroster ventsb Canada only: directs the airflow

through the defroster and center ventsa Directs air through the defroster and

footwell vents_ Canada only: directs the airflow

through the defroster, center and sideair vents and the footwell

Setting the airflowX Turn the SmartKey to position2 (Y page 133) in the ignition lock.

X To increase: press theK button.X To reduce: press theI button.

i The airflow from the rear-compartmentvents and the center vents is the same.

124 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Page 127: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Switching the ZONE function on/offX To switch on: press theá button.The indicator lamp in theá button lightsup.i The temperature setting for the driver'sside is not adopted for the front-passengerside and the rear compartment. The tem-perature for the front-passenger side andthe rear compartment must be set sepa-rately.

X To switch off: press buttoná.The indicator lamp in theá button goesout.i The temperature setting for the driver'sside is adopted for the front-passenger sideand the rear compartment.

Defrosting the windshieldYou can use this function to defrost the wind-shield or to defrost the inside of the wind-shield and the side windows.i You should only select the defrostingfunction until the windshield is clear again.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 (Y page 133) in the ignition lock.

X To activate: press the¬ button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button lightsup.The climate control system switches to thefollowing functions:Rcooling with air dehumidification (onlywith engine running)Rhigh airflow (depending on the outsidetemperature)Rhigh temperature (depending on the out-side temperature)Rair distribution to the windshield andfront side windowsRair-recirculation mode off

X To deactivate: press the¬ button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button goesout. The previously selected settings are

restored. The cooling with air dehumidifi-cation function remains on. Air-recircula-tion mode remains deactivated.

orX Press theà button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button goesout. Airflow and air distribution are set toautomatic mode.

orX Turn controls: orB clockwise or coun-ter-clockwise (Y page 119).

orX Press theK orI button.

Activating/deactivating MAX COOLmaximum coolingThe MAX COOL function is only available invehicles for the USA.

MAX COOL is only operational when theengine is running.X To activate: press theÙ button.The indicator lamp in the button lights up.

X To activate: press off-road buttonÙagain.The indicator lamp goes out. The previouslyselected settings are restored.

When you activate MAX COOL, climate con-trol switches to the following functions:Rmaximum coolingRmaximum airflowRair-recirculation mode on

Operating the climate control systems 125

Climatecontrol

Z

Page 128: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Defrosting the windows

Windows fogged up on the insideX Activate theÁ cooling with air dehu-midification function.

X Activate automatic modeÃ.X If the windows continue to fog up, activatethe defrosting function (Y page 125).i You should only select this setting untilthe windshield is clear again.

Windows fogged up on the outsideX Switch on the windshield wipers(Y page 114).

X Press the_ button repeatedly until theP orO symbol appears in the dis-play.i You should only select this setting untilthe windshield is clear again.

Switching the windshield defrosteron/off

G WARNINGAny accumulation of snow and ice should beremoved from the windshield before driving.Otherwise, your vision may be impaired,which could endanger you or others.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 133).

X To switch on: press button;.Indicator lamp: lights up.

X To switch off: press button;.Indicator lamp: goes out.i At outside temperatures above 50 ‡(10 †) the windshield heating cannot beactivated. Indicator lamp: lights upbriefly when you attempt to activate it andthen goes out again.

i The windshield defroster has a high cur-rent draw. You should therefore switch itoff as soon as the windshield is clear. Oth-erwise, the windshield heating switchesitself off automatically after 10 minutes.

i When the windshield heating is switchedon for the fourth time in a row, it switchesitself off automatically after 5 minutes.

i Indicator lamp: flashes if too manyelectrical consumers are switched on at thesame time when the battery voltage is low.After approximately 30 seconds the wind-shield heating switches off automatically.

Switching the rear window defrosteron/off

Switching on/offX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 133).

X Press theª button.The indicator lamp in theª button lightsup or goes out.i The rear window defroster has a high cur-rent draw. You should therefore switch itoff as soon as the rear window is clear. as itonly switches off automatically after sev-eral minutes.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the rearwindow defroster may switch off.

126 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Page 129: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Problems with the rear windowdefrosterIf the indicator lamp in theª rear windowdefroster button flashes, the on-board volt-age is too low. The rear window defroster hasdeactivated prematurely or cannot be activa-ted.X Switch off any consumers that are notrequired, e.g. reading lamps or interiorlighting.When the battery is sufficiently charged,the rear window defroster is activatedagain automatically.

Activating/deactivating air-recircula-tion modeIf you switch on air-recirculation mode, thewindows can fog up more quickly, in particu-lar at low temperatures. Only use air-recircu-lation mode briefly to prevent the windowsfrom fogging up.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 133).

X To activate: press thed button.The indicator lamp in thed button lightsup.i Air-recirculation mode is automaticallyactivated at high levels of pollution or athigh outside temperatures. When air-recir-culation mode is activated automatically,the indicator lamp in thed button is notlit.Outside air is added after approximately30 minutes.

X To deactivate: press thed button.The indicator lamp in thed button goesout.i Air-recirculation mode switches off auto-matically:Rafter approximately five minutes at out-side temperatures below approximately41 ‡Rafter approximately five minutes if cool-ing with air dehumidification is deactiva-tedRafter approximately 30 minutes at out-side temperatures above approximately41 ‡ (5 †)

Activating/deactivating the residualheat functionThe "residual heat" function is only availablein Canada.It is possible to make use of the residual heatof the engine to continue heating the station-ary vehicle for up to 30 minutes after theengine has been switched off. The heatingtimedepends on the coolant temperature andon the interior temperature that has been set.i The blower will run at a low speed regard-less of the airflow setting.

i If you activate the residual heat functionat high temperatures, only the ventilationwill be activated.

X Turn the SmartKey to position0(Y page 133) in the ignition lock orremove it.

X To activate: press theÁ button.The indicator lamp in theÁ button lightsup.

Operating the climate control systems 127

Climatecontrol

Z

Page 130: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

X To deactivate: press theÁ button.The indicator lamp in theÁ button goesout.i Residual heat is deactivated automati-cally:Rafter approximately 30 minutesRwhen the ignition is switched onRif the battery voltage dropsRif the coolant temperature is too low

Setting the air vents

Important safety notes

G WARNINGVery hot or very cold air can flow from the airvents. This could result in burns or frostbite inthe immediate vicinity of the air vents. Thereis a risk of injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants alwaysmaintain a sufficient distance to the air out-lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow toanother area of the vehicle interior.

General notesIn order to ensure the direct flow of fresh airthrough the air vents into the vehicle interior,please observe the following notes:Rkeep the air intake grill on the hood free ofblockages, such as ice, snow or leaves.Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grillesin the vehicle interior.

i For virtually draft-free ventilation, adjustthe sliders of the air vents to the centerposition.

i If the automatic climate control con-stantly differs from the set temperature orif undesired drafts are noticeable, proceedas follows:X Open the side air ventsX Open the center air vents

X Open the rear air ventsX Set the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).The automatic climate control adjuststo the set temperature.

Setting the center air vents

Center air vents: Center air vent, left; Center air vent, right= Center vent thumbwheel, right? Center vent thumbwheel, leftX To open/close: turn thumbwheels=and? to the right or left.

Setting the side air vents

Side air vents: Side air vent; Swiveling side air vent= Control for side air ventX Toopen/close: turn thumbwheel= to theleft or right.

128 Setting the air ventsClimatecontrol

Page 131: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Setting the rear-compartment airvents

X To open/close: turn thumbwheel: up ordown.

X To set the air direction:move slider; forthe corresponding rear-compartment airvent to the left, right, up or down.

Setting the air vents 129

Climatecontrol

Z

Page 132: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

130

Page 133: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Useful information ............................ 132Notes onbreaking-in a newvehicle............................................................. 132Driving ............................................... 132Automatic transmission ................... 139Refueling ............................................ 147Parking ............................................... 150Driving tips ........................................ 152Driving systems ................................ 162Off-road driving systems .................. 186Towing a trailer ................................. 191

131

Drivingandparking

Page 134: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops: (Y page 24).

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle

Important safety notesNew and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect after sev-eral hundred kilometers of driving. Compen-sate for this by applying greater force to thebrake pedal.

The first 1000 miles (1500 km)The more you look after the engine when it isnew, the more satisfied you will be with itsperformance in the future.RYou should therefore drive at varying vehi-cle and engine speeds for the first1,000 miles (1,500 km).RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throt-tle, during this period.RChange gear in good time, before the tach-ometer needle isÔ of the way to the redarea of the tachometer.RDo not manually shift to a lower gear tobrake the vehicle.RIf possible, do not depress the acceleratorpedal past the point of resistance (kick-down).ROnly select shift ranges 3, 2 or 1when driv-ing slowly, e.g. in mountainous terrain.

After 1,000 miles (1,500 km), you canincrease the engine speed gradually and bringthe vehicle to full speed.Additional breaking-in notes for AMG vehi-cles:RDo not drive faster than 85 mph(140 km/h) for the first 1,000 miles(1,500 km).ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximumengine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.RChange gear in good time.RAvoid driving off-road before the differen-tial oil change at 2,000 miles (3,000 km).RIdeally, for the first 1,000miles (1,500 km),drive in program C.

i You should also observe these breaking-in notes if the engine or parts of the drivetrain on your vehicle have been replaced.

i Always observe the respective speed lim-its.

AMG vehicles with rear axle lockingdifferentialChange the oil after a breaking-in period of2,000miles (3,000 km) to improve protectionof the differential. This oil change willlengthen the service life of the differential.Have the oil change carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose.

Driving

Important safety notes

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enter

132 DrivingDrivingandparking

Page 135: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

the driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

G WARNINGUnsuitable footwear can hinder correct usageof the pedals, e.g.:Rshoes with thick solesRshoes with high heelsRslippersThere is a risk of an accident.Wear suitable footwear to ensure correctusage of the pedals.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf the parking brake has not been fullyreleased when driving, the parking brake can:Roverheat and cause a fireRlose its hold function.There is a risk of fire and an accident. Releasethe parking brake fully before driving off.

! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not usethe engine's full performance until it hasreached operating temperature.Only shift the automatic transmission tothe desired drive position when the vehicleis stationary.Where possible, avoid spinning the drivewheels when pulling away on slipperyroads. You could otherwise damage thedrive train.

! Avoid high engine speeds when theengine is cold. The engine's service lifecould otherwise be significantly shortened.Do not use the engine's full performanceuntil it has reached operating temperature.

! AMG vehicles: at low engine oil temper-atures below 68 ‡ (+20 †), the maximumengine speed is restricted in order to pro-tect the engine. To protect the engine andmaintain smooth engine operation, avoiddriving at full throttle when the engine iscold.

Key positions

g To remove the SmartKey1 Power supply for some consumers, such

as the windshield wipers2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)

and drive position3 To start the engineAs soon as the ignition is switched on, all theindicator lamps in the instrument cluster lightup. If an indicator lamp does not go out afterstarting the engine or lights up while driving,see (Y page 236).If the SmartKey is in position 0 in the ignitionlock for an extended period of time, it can nolonger be turned in the ignition lock. Thesteering is then locked. To unlock, remove theSmartKey and reinsert it into the ignition lock.The steering is locked when you remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock.

Driving 133

Drivingandparking

Z

Page 136: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

X Remove the SmartKey when the engine isswitched off.The starter battery could otherwise be dis-charged.

If you cannot turn the SmartKey in the ignitionlock, the starter battery may not be chargedsufficiently.X Check the starter battery and charge it ifnecessary (Y page 295).

orX Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 296).

i You can only remove the SmartKey if:Rthe SmartKey is in position 0 in the igni-tion lock.Rthe automatic transmission selectorlever is in P.

Starting the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

G WARNINGFlammable materials introduced throughenvironmental influence or by animals canignite if in contact with the exhaust system orparts of the engine that heat up. There is a riskof fire.Carry out regular checks to make sure thatthere are no flammable foreign materials inthe engine compartment or in the exhaustsystem.

! Do not depress the accelerator whenstarting the engine.

Starting procedureX Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion P.The transmission position display in themultifunction display shows P.i For further information about the auto-matic transmission, see (Y page 139).

i If you depress the brakewhen starting theengine, pedal travel is unusually long andthere is less pedal resistance.

X Make sure that the parking brake isapplied.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 133) and release it assoon as the engine is running.

i You can also use the touch-start function.To do this, turn the SmartKey to position 3(Y page 133) and release it immediately.The engine then starts automatically.

Pulling away

Automatic transmission

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

! Only shift the automatic transmission toreverse gear R or park position P when thevehicle is stationary. Otherwise, the auto-matic transmission could be damaged.

! Do not depress the accelerator pedalwhile depressing the brake pedal. Thisimpairs engine performance and results inpremature wear on the brake system anddrivetrain.

134 DrivingDrivingandparking

Page 137: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

! If a warning tone sounds and theRelease Park. BrakeRelease Park. Brake message appearsin the multifunction display, the parkingbrake is still applied. Release the parkingbrake.

X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion D or R.i Before driving off, wait until the gearchange is fully completed.

X Release the parking brake (Y page 151).X Release the brake pedal.X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.

i It is only possible to shift the automatictransmission from position P to a differentposition if you depress the brake pedal.Only then is the selector lever lockreleased.

i The vehicle locks centrally once you havepulled away. The locking knobs in the doorsdrop down.You can open the doors from the inside atany time.You can also deactivate the automatic lock-ing feature (Y page 208).

i Upshifts take place at higher enginespeeds after a cold start. This helps thecatalytic converter to reach its operatingtemperature more quickly.

Hill start assist

G WARNINGAfter a short time, hill start assist will no lon-ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away.There is a risk of an accident and injury.Therefore, quickly move your foot from thebrake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Neverleave the vehicle when it is held by hill startassist.

Hill start assist helps you when pulling awayforwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It

holds the vehicle for a short time after youhave removed your foot from the brake pedal.This gives you enough time to move your footfrom the brake pedal to the accelerator pedaland to depress it before the vehicle begins toroll.X Take your foot off the brake pedal.i Once you have taken your foot off thebrake pedal, the vehicle is held for aroundone second.

X Pull away.Hill start assist will not function if:Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on adownhill gradient.Rthe transmission is in position N.Rthe parking brake is applied.RESP® is malfunctioning.

ECO start/stop function (AMG vehi-cles)

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the engine is switched off automatically andyou exit the vehicle, the engine is restartedautomatically. The vehicle may begin moving.There is a risk of accident and injury.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe ignition and secure the vehicle againstrolling away.

General notesThe ECO start/stop function is only availablefor the G 63 AMG.The ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically when the vehiclestops moving.The engine starts automatically when thedriver wants to pull away again. The ECOstart/stop function thereby helps you toreduce the fuel consumption and emissionsof your vehicle.

Driving 135

Drivingandparking

Z

Page 138: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

The ECO start/stop function is activated eachtime the engine is switched on.The ECO start/stop function is only availablein drive program C.The system is operational if all conditions forautomatic engine switch-off have been fulfil-led (Y page 136) and the¤ symbol isshown in green in the multifunction display.In addition, the Stop/Start activeStop/Start active mes-sage is shown in the AMG menu in the multi-function display.If not all conditions for automatic engineswitch-off are fulfilled, (Y page 136), the¤ symbol is shown in yellow in the multi-function display.In addition, the Stop/Start inactiveStop/Start inactivemes-sage is shown in the AMG menu in the multi-function display.If the ECO start/stop function has been man-ually deactivated (Y page 136) or a malfunc-tion has caused the system to be deactivated,the¤ symbol is not displayed.The Stop/Start activeStop/Start active or Stop/StartStop/Startinactiveinactive message in the AMG menu in themultifunction display goes out.

Deactivating/activating the ECO start/stop function

ECO button

X To deactivate: in drive program C, pressbutton:.

orX Switch to drive program S or M(Y page 143).Indicator lamp; on button: and the¤ symbol in themultifunction display goout.The Stop/Start activeStop/Start active or Stop/StartStop/Startinactiveinactivemessage in the AMGmenu in themultifunction display goes out.

X To activate: press button:.Indicator lamp; lights up. If drive pro-gram S orM is active, the automatic trans-mission switches to drive program C.If all conditions for automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 136) are fulfilled, the¤ symbol is shown in green in the mul-tifunction display. In addition, the Stop/Stop/Start activeStart active message is shown in theAMG menu in the multifunction display.If conditions for automatic engine switch-off (Y page 136) have not been fulfilled, the¤ symbol will be shown in yellow. If thisis the case, the ECO start/stop function isnot available. In addition, the Stop/StartStop/Startinactiveinactive display message is shown in theAMG menu in the multifunction display.

i If indicator lamp; is off, the ECO start/stop function has been deactivated man-ually or as the result of a malfunction. Theengine will then not be switched off auto-matically when the vehicle stops.

Automatic engine switch-offIf the vehicle is braked to a standstill inD orN,the ECO start/stop function switches off theengine automatically.The ECO start/stop function is operationaland the¤ symbol is displayed in green inthe multifunction display, if:Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is litgreen.Rno off-road program has been selected.

136 DrivingDrivingandparking

Page 139: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Rthe vehicle is stationary.Rthe outside temperature is within the com-fort range.Rthe engine is at normal operating temper-ature.Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interiorhas been reached.Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.Rthe system detects that the windshield isnot fogged up when the air-conditioningsystem is switched on.Rthe hood is closed.Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver'sseat belt is fastened.

If conditions for automatic engine switch-offhave not been fulfilled, the¤ symbol willbe shown in yellow.In addition, the Stop/Start inactiveStop/Start inactivemes-sage is shown in the AMG menu in the multi-function display.

i If you shift the transmission from R to D,the ECO start/stop function is availableagain once the¤ symbol reappears ingreen in the multifunction display.

i The engine can be automatically switchedoff an unlimited number of times.

i You can still activate the HOLD functionwhen the vehicle is stationary, even if theengine has been switched off automati-cally. It is then not necessary to continueapplying the brakes during the automaticstop phase. When you depress the accel-erator pedal, the engine starts automati-cally and the braking effect of the HOLDfunction is deactivated. Depress the accel-erator pedal carefully, as the engine mustbe started first.

i During automatic engine switch-off, theclimate control system only operates at areduced capacity. If you require full climatecontrol capacity, the ECO start/stop func-tion can be deactivated by pressing theECO button (Y page 136).

Automatic engine startThe engine starts automatically if:RIn general:

- you switch off the ECO start/stop func-tion by pressing the ECO button.

- you release the brakes when in transmis-sion position D or N and when the HOLDfunction is not active.

RBy the driver:- you release the brakes when in transmis-sion position D or N.

- you depress the accelerator pedal.- you engage reverse gear R.- you move the transmission out of posi-tion P.

- you switch to drive program S or M.- you unfasten your seat belt or open thedriver's door.

RBy the system:- the vehicle starts to roll.- the brake system requires this.- the temperature in the vehicle interiordeviates from the set range.

- the system detects moisture on thewindshield when the air-conditioningsystem is switched on.

- the battery's condition of charge is toolow.

i Shifting the transmission to position Pdoes not start the engine.

Driving 137

Drivingandparking

Z

Page 140: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Problems with the engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The engine does notstart. The starter motorcan be heard.

RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.X Turn the SmartKey back to position 0 in the ignition lock beforeattempting to start the engine again.

X Try to start the engine again (Y page 134). Avoid excessivelylong and frequent attempts to start the engine, as this(Y page 133) will drain the battery.

If the engine does not start after several attempts:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does notstart. The starter motorcan be heard. The yel-low reserve fuel warn-ing lamp is lit and theneedle of the fuel gaugedisplay shows 0.

The fuel tank is empty.X Refuel the vehicle.

The engine does notstart. You cannot hearthe starter motor.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak ordischarged.X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 296).If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The startermotor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately twominutes.

X Try to start the engine again.If the engine still does not start:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine is not run-ning smoothly and ismisfiring.

There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanicalcomponent of the engine management system.X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic con-verter and damage it.

X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialistworkshop.

138 DrivingDrivingandparking

Page 141: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The coolant tempera-ture gauge shows avalue above 248 ‡(120†). A displaymes-sagemay also appear inthe multifunction dis-play and a warning tonemay sound.

The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engineis no longer being cooled sufficiently.X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant tocool down.

X Check the coolant level (Y page 278). Observe the warningnotes as you do so and add coolant if necessary.

If the coolant level is correct, the radiator fan may be faulty. Thecoolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled suffi-ciently.X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving inmountainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic.

Automatic transmission

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi-cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.

i Bear in mind that the power transmissionbetween the engine and the transmission isinterrupted when the engine is switchedoff. For this reason, shift the automatictransmission to P when the engine isswitched off and the vehicle is at a stand-

still. Apply the parking brake to prevent thevehicle from rolling away.

Selector lever

Overview of transmission positions

! If the engine speed is too high or if thevehicle is rolling, do not shift the transmis-sion directly from D to R, from R to D ordirectly to P.Do not open the driver's door while thevehicle is in motion. At low speeds in trans-mission position D or R, park position P isotherwise engaged automatically.The transmission could be damaged.

Automatic transmission 139

Drivingandparking

Z

Page 142: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Selector leverj Park positionk Reverse geari Neutralh DriveWhen you select a transmission position, theselector lever subsequently returns to itsoriginal position.The current transmission position P,R,N orDappears in the transmission position displayin the multifunction display.

Transmission position and drive pro-gram display

! If the transmission position display in themultifunction display is not working, youshould pull away carefully to checkwhetherthe desired transmission position isengaged. Select transmission position D.Do not restrict the shift range.

: Transmission position; Drive programCurrent transmission position: and currentdrive program; appear in the multifunctiondisplay.

The current position of the selector lever isshown by the indicators next to the selectorlever.The indicators light up when the SmartKey isinserted into the ignition lock. The indicatorsgo out when the SmartKey is removed fromthe ignition lock.When the selector lever is in position D, youcan influence the gearshifts made by theautomatic transmission by:Rrestricting the shift rangeRchanging gear yourself

Engaging park position PX When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal and keep it depressed.

X Press the P button in the center console.

i If you depress the brake pedal and pushthe selector lever forwards or back to thefirst point of resistance, park position P isdisengaged. The transmission shifts to neu-tral N.

Park position P is automatically engaged:Rif you remove the SmartKey from the igni-tion lockRif you open the driver's door while travelingat low speed in transmission position D orRRif DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 169) brakesyour vehicle until it is stationary and at leastone of the following conditions is fulfilled:- the engine is switched off.- the driver's door is open and the seat beltis not fastened.

- there is a system malfunction.- the power supply is insufficient.

Engaging reverse gear R

! Only shift the automatic transmission toRwhen the vehicle is stationary.

140 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

Page 143: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

X When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal and keep it depressed.

X Push the selector lever forwards past thefirst point of resistance.Transmission position R is engaged.

i For AMG vehicles: when reverse gear isengaged and the ECO start/stop functionis switched on, the engine starts up auto-matically (Y page 135).

Shifting to neutral N

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

If the vehicle is stationary:X Depress the brake pedal.X Depending on the current transmissionposition, press the selector lever forwardsor backwards to the first point of resist-ance.The automatic transmission shifts to N.

If the engine has been switched off, the auto-matic transmission automatically shifts to N.

i For AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stopfunction switches the engine off automati-

cally if the vehicle is braked to a standstillwhen in neutral N and the brake is stilldepressed (Y page 135).

Remaining in neutral N

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

X Make sure that the ignition is switched on.X When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal and keep it depressed.

X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.X If the parking brake is applied, release it.X Switch off the ignition and leave the Smart-Key in the ignition lock.

Shifting to transmission position DX When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal and keep it depressed.

X Push the selector lever back past the firstpoint of resistance.Transmission position D is engaged.

i For AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stopfunction switches the engine off automati-

Automatic transmission 141

Drivingandparking

Z

Page 144: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

cally if the vehicle is braked to a standstillwhen in transmission position D and thebrake is still depressed (Y page 135).

Transmission positions

B Park positionDo not shift the transmission intoposition P (Y page 139) unless thevehicle is stationary. The parkinglock should not be used as a brakewhen parking. In addition to engag-ing the parking lock, you mustalways apply the parking brake tosecure the vehicle.

i The SmartKey can only beremoved if the transmission is inposition P. When there is noSmartKey in the ignition lock, theselector lever is locked in posi-tion P.

C Reverse gearOnly shift the transmission to Rwhen the vehicle is stationary.

A NeutralNo power is transmitted from theengine to the drive wheels.Releasing the brakes will allow youto move the vehicle freely, e.g. topush it or tow it.Do not shift the transmission to Nwhile driving. Otherwise, the auto-matic transmission could be dam-aged.If ESP® is deactivated or faulty:only shift the transmission to posi-tion N if the vehicle is in danger ofskidding, e.g. on icy roads.If you want to engage the transfercase, shift briefly into N(Y page 186).

! Rolling in neutralN can damagethe drive train.

7 DriveThe automatic transmissionchanges gear automatically. Allforward gears are available.

Changing gearThe automatic transmission shifts to the indi-vidual gears automatically when it is in trans-mission position D. This automatic gearshift-ing behavior is determined by:Ra shift range restriction, if selectedRthe position of the transfer case (HIGHRANGE or LOW RANGE)Rthe position of the accelerator pedalRthe road speed

142 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

Page 145: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Driving tips

Accelerator pedal positionYour style of driving influences how the auto-matic transmission shifts gear:Rlittle throttle: early upshiftsRmore throttle: late upshifts

KickdownUse kickdown for maximum acceleration.X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond thepressure point.The automatic transmission shifts to alower gear depending on the engine speed.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal once thedesired speed is reached.The automatic transmission shifts back up.

Kickdown is not available in the permanentmanual drive program on AMG vehicles.

Rocking the vehicle freeShifting the transmission repeatedly betweengearsD and Rmay help to free the vehicle if ithas become stuck in slush or snow. The vehi-cle's engine management system limits thespeed to amaximum of 5mph (9 km/h) whenshifting back and forth. To shift back and forthbetween transmission positions D and R,move the selector lever forwards and back-wards past the point of resistance.

Towing a trailerX Drive in the middle of the engine speedrange on uphill gradients.

X Vehicles except AMG vehicles: shiftdown to shift range3 or2 depending on theuphill or downhill gradient (Y page 145),even if cruise control or SPEEDTRONIC isactivated.AMG vehicles: shift down to gear 3 or 2depending on the uphill or downhill gradi-ent (Y page 145), even if cruise control,

DISTRONIC PLUS or SPEEDTRONIC is acti-vated.

X Shift the transfer case into low-range driv-ing position LOWRANGE on extreme uphillgradients or steep downhill gradients(Y page 186).

Program selector button

General notesThe program selector button allows you tochoose between drive programs with differ-ent driving characteristics.

i In AMG vehicles, drive program E is calleddrive program C.

i The automatic transmission switches toautomatic drive program E (drive programC in AMG vehicles) each time the engine isstarted.

i Only change from automatic drive pro-gram C or S to manual drive program Mwhen the vehicle is stationary.

Drive program except for AMG vehicles

E Economy Comfortable, economicaldriving

S Sport Sporty driving style

Drive programs on AMG vehicles

C ControlledEfficiency

Comfortable, economicaldriving

S Sport Sporty driving style

M Manual Manual gear shifting

i For further information on the automaticdrive program, see (Y page 144).

Automatic transmission 143

Drivingandparking

Z

Page 146: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Selecting the drive program

Program selector button (except for AMG vehicles)

Program selector button (AMG vehicles)X Press program selector button: repeat-edly until the letter for the desired gearshiftprogram appears in the multifunction dis-play.

Steering wheel paddle shifters

In the automatic drive program, you canrestrict or derestrict the shift range by using

steering wheel paddle shifters: and;(Y page 145).In the manual drive program you can changegears manually using steering wheel paddleshifters: and;(Y page 145).

i You can only change gear with the steer-ing wheel paddle shifters when the trans-mission is in position D.

Automatic drive programDrive program E (drive program C on AMGvehicles) is characterized by the following:Rcomfort-oriented engine and transmissionsettingsRoptimal fuel consumption resulting fromthe automatic transmission shifting upsoonerRthe vehicle pulling away more gently inforward and reverse gears, unless theaccelerator pedal is depressed fullyRincreased sensitivity. This improves drivingstability on slippery road surfaces, forexampleRthe automatic transmission shifting upsooner. This results in the vehicle beingdriven at lower engine speeds and thewheels being less likely to spin

Drive program S is characterized by the fol-lowing:Rsporty engine and transmission settingsRthe vehicle pulling away in first gearRthe automatic transmission shifting uplaterRthe fuel consumption possibly being higheras a result of the later automatic transmis-sion shift points

144 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

Page 147: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Shift ranges

IntroductionWhen the automatic transmission is in posi-tion D, it is possible to restrict or derestrictthe shift range.The shift range selected is shown in the mul-tifunction display. The automatic transmis-sion shifts only as far as the selected gear.Setting the shift range is not possible on AMGvehicles.Driving situations

= You can use the engine's brakingeffect

5 The braking effect of the engine canbe utilized on downhill gradients orwhen driving:Ron steep mountain roadsRin mountainous terrainRin arduous conditions

4 The braking effect of the engine canbe utilized on extremely steepdownhill gradients and long down-hill stretches.

Restricting the shift rangeX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 144).The automatic transmission shifts downone gear and restricts the shift range to therelevant gear.

i If the engine exceeds the maximumengine speedwhen shifting down, the auto-matic transmission protects against enginedamage by not shifting down.

i If the maximum engine speed for the shiftrange is reached and you continue to accel-erate, the automatic transmission shifts upin order to prevent the engine from over-revving, even if the shift range is restricted.

Derestricting the shift rangeX Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 144).The automatic transmission shifts up onegear and restricts the shift range to the rel-evant gear.

Clearing the shift range restrictionX Pull and hold the right-hand steering wheelpaddle shifter (Y page 144) untilD is shownagain in the multifunction display.The automatic transmission shifts from thecurrent shift range directly to D.

Selecting the ideal shift rangeX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 144) and hold it in position.The automatic transmission shifts to thegear which allows optimum accelerationand deceleration. To do this, the automatictransmission shifts down one or moregears.

i The automatic transmission cannot shiftdown beyond second gear. To shift to firstgear, you have to pull the left steeringwheel paddle shifter.

Manual drive program

General informationThemanual drive program is only available onAMG vehicles. In manual drive program M,you can permanently change gear yourself byusing the steering wheel paddle shifters. Thetransmission must be in position D. The gearcurrently selected and engaged is shown inthe multifunction display.Manual drive program M differs from driveprograms E and S with regard to spontaneity,responsiveness and smoothness of gearchanges.

Automatic transmission 145

Drivingandparking

Z

Page 148: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Switching on the manual drive programX Shift the transmission to position D.X Press the program selector button repeat-edly until M appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

Upshifting

! Inmanual drive programM, the automatictransmission does not shift up automati-cally even when the engine limiting speedfor the current gear is reached. When theengine limiting speed is reached, the fuelsupply is cut to prevent the engine fromoverrevving. Always make sure that theengine speed does not reach the red area ofthe tachometer. There is otherwise a risk ofengine damage.

X If corresponding gearshift recommenda-tion: appears in themultifunction displayon the instrument cluster, pull on the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter(Y page 144).The automatic transmission shifts to rec-ommended gear;.

DownshiftingX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 144).The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear.

i If you slow down or stop without shiftingdown, the automatic transmission auto-matically shifts down.

Selecting the optimal gear for maxi-mum accelerationX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter until the transmission selects theoptimum gear according to the speed.

Switching off themanual drive programX Press the program selector button repeat-edly until C or S appears in the multifunc-tion display.

146 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

Page 149: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Problems with the automatic transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The acceleration abilityis deteriorating.The transmission nolonger changes gear.

The transmission is in emergency mode.It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.X Stop the vehicle.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock.X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.X Shift the transmission to position D or R.If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R isselected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.

X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-shop immediately.

You hear a warningtone.

You have:Rswitched off the engineRopened the driver's doorRnot moved the selector lever to position PX Move the selector lever to position P.

Refueling

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.

If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Even small amounts of thewrong fuel result in damage to the fuel sys-tem and engine.

! Do not switch on the ignition if you acci-dentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Other-wise, the fuel will enter the fuel lines. Notify

Refueling 147

Drivingandparking

Z

Page 150: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

a qualified specialist workshop and havethe fuel tank and fuel lines drained com-pletely.

! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage thefuel system.

! Take care not to spill any fuel on paintedsurfaces. You could otherwise damage thepaintwork.

! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can.Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injectionsystem could be blocked by particles fromthe fuel can.

If you overfill the fuel tank, pressuremay buildup in the fuel tank. This could cause fuel tospray out when the fuel pump nozzle isremoved. There is a risk of injury. The fueltank is full when the fuel pump nozzle firstswitches off. End the refueling process.For further information on fuel and fuel quality(Y page 337).

Refueling

Vehicles with a fuel filler flap

Example: G 550 fuel filler cap: To open the fuel filler flap; Tire pressure table= Fuel type? To insert the fuel filler capWhen you open or close the vehicle with theSmartKey, the fuel filler flap is automaticallyunlocked or locked.

The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed8 in the instrument cluster. The arrownext to the filling pump indicates the side ofthe vehicle. The fuel filler flap is located to therear on the right.

Opening the fuel filler cap

: To open the fuel filler flap; Tire pressure table= Fuel type? To insert the fuel filler capX Switch the engine off.i When the engine is running and the fuelfiller flap is open, the yellow reserve fuelwarning lamp and the= (USA only)or; (Canada only) Check Engine warn-ing lamp may light up.Further information aboutwarning and indi-cator lamps in the instrument cluster canbe found in the Digital Operator's Manual.

X Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

X Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwiseand remove it.

X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holderbracket on the inside of filler flap?.

RefuelingX Completely insert the filler neck of the fuelpump nozzle into the tank and refuel.

i Do not add any more fuel after the pumpstops filling for the first time. Otherwise,fuel may leak out.

148 RefuelingDrivingandparking

Page 151: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

ClosingX Replace the fuel filler cap and turn it clock-wise. The fuel filler cap audibly engages.

X Close the fuel filler flap.

i Close the fuel filler flap before locking thevehicle. A locking pin otherwise preventsthe fuel filler flap from closing after thevehicle has been locked.

Fuel filler flap emergency release

The emergency release is located in the cargocompartment, on the right-hand side whenviewed in the direction of travel, behind therear panel trim.i The vehicle body in the emergencyrelease area has sharp edges. There is arisk of injury. Avoid contact with the edgeson the inside of the vehicle body.

X Open the rear door.X Remove edge protection:.X Remove rear panel trim;.

X Pull emergency release= in the directionof the arrow.The fuel filler flap is unlocked.

X Open the fuel filler flap.

Refueling 149

Drivingandparking

Z

Page 152: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Problems with the fuel and fuel tank

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Fuel is leaking from thevehicle.

The fuel line or the fuel tank is defective.

G WARNINGRisk of explosion or fire.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 (Y page 133) immediately andremove it.

X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The fuel filler flap can-not be opened.

The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.orThe SmartKey batteries are discharged.X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 68).orX Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 69).X Open the rear door.X Manually unlock the fuel filler flap using the emergency release(Y page 149).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jam-med.X Manually unlock the fuel filler flap using the emergency release(Y page 149).

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system or exhaustgas flow. There is a risk of fire.Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-rials come into contact with parts of the vehi-cle which are hot. Take particular care not topark on dry grassland or harvested grainfields.

150 ParkingDrivingandparking

Page 153: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

Switching off the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi-cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.

Vehicles with automatic transmissionX Shift the transmission to position P.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 133) and remove it.The immobilizer is activated.

X Apply the parking brake firmly.X Turn the steering wheel until the steeringwheel lock engages.

i If you turn off the engine with the Smart-Key and then remove it from the ignition

lock or open a front door, the automatictransmission shifts to P automatically.

i The SmartKey can only be removed if theautomatic transmission is in position P.

Parking brake

G WARNINGIf you must brake the vehicle with the parkingbrake, the braking distance is considerablylonger and the wheels could lock. There is anincreased danger of skidding and accidents.Only use the parking brake to brake the vehi-cle when the service brake is faulty. Do notapply the parking brake too firmly. If thewheels lock, release the parking brake untilthe wheels begin turning again.

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

i When you apply parking brake; to brakethe vehicle, the brake lamps do not light up.

Parking 151

Drivingandparking

Z

Page 154: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

X To apply: pull parking brake; up firmly.Parking brake; is applied.When the ignition is switched on or theengine is running, theF (USA only) orJ (Canada only) indicator lamp is lit inthe instrument cluster.

X To release: depress the brake pedal andkeep it depressed.The selector lever lock is released.

X Pull parking brake; up firmly.X Press release button: on parkingbrake; and move parking brake; downto the stop.When the ignition is switched on or theengine is running, theF (USA only)or! (Canada only) indicator lamp goesout in the instrument cluster.

i If you pull away with parking brake;applied, a warning tone sounds.

Parking the vehicle for a long periodIf you leave the vehicle parked for longer thanfour weeks, the battery may be damaged byexhaustive discharge.X Connect a trickle charger.i You can obtain information about tricklechargers from a qualified specialist work-shop.

If you leave the vehicle parked for longer thansix weeks, the vehiclemay suffer damage as aresult of lack of use.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop andseek advice.

Driving tips

General driving tips

Important safety notes

G WARNINGAlways remember that you must concentrateprimarily on driving the vehicle. The driver's

concentration must always be directed pri-marily at road traffic. For your own safety andthat of others, we recommend that you stopthe vehicle at a safe place and in accordancewith the traffic conditions before making oraccepting a phone call.Comply with all legal requirements if you usethe telephone while driving. Use the hands-free system and only use the telephone whenroad, weather and traffic conditions permit. Insome jurisdictions, it is forbidden for driversto use mobile phones while driving.Only operateCOMAND (CockpitManagementand Data System) in compliance with all legalrequirements andwhen the road, weather andtraffic conditions permit. You may otherwisenot be able to observe the traffic conditions,endangering yourself and others.Remember that your vehicle covers a distanceof 44 ft (approximately 14 m) a second whenit is traveling at only 30 mph (approximately50 km/h).

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

Drive sensibly – save fuelObserve the following tips to save fuel:X The tires should always be inflated to therecommended tire pressure.

X Remove unnecessary loads.X Remove roof carriers when they are notneeded.

X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.X Have all maintenance work performed atthe service intervals specified in the Ser-

152 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

Page 155: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

vice Booklet or indicated by the serviceinterval indicator.

Fuel consumption also increases when driv-ing in cold weather, in stop-start traffic and inhilly terrain.

Drinking and driving

G WARNINGDrinking and driving and/or taking drugs anddriving are very dangerous combinations.Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs canaffect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-ment.The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-dent are greatly increased when you drink ortake drugs and drive.Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allowanyone to drive who has been drinking or tak-ing drugs.

Pedals

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

Emission control

G WARNINGInhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to yourhealth. All exhaust gas contains carbon mon-oxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause uncon-sciousness and possible death.Do not run the engine in confined areas (suchas a garage) which are not properly ventilated.If you think that exhaust gas fumes are enter-

ing the vehicle while driving, have the causedetermined and corrected immediately. If youmust drive under these conditions, drive onlywith at least one window fully open at alltimes.

Certain engine systems are designed to keepthe level of poisonous components in exhaustfumes within legal limits.These systems only work at peak efficiency ifthey are serviced exactly in accordance withthe manufacturer's specifications. For thisreason, all work on the engine should only becarried out by qualified and authorizedMercedes-Benz technicians.The engine settings must not be changedunder any circumstances. Furthermore, allspecific service work must be carried out atregular intervals and in accordance with theMercedes-Benz service requirements. Detailscan be found in the Maintenance Booklet.

Braking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you activate the LOW off-road gear whiledriving on a slippery road surface, the wheelsmay lose traction:Rif you remove your foot from the accelera-tor pedal when drivingRif off road ABS intervenes when brakingIf the wheels lose traction. the vehicle can nolonger be steered. There is an increased dan-ger of skidding and accidents.Never activate the LOW off-road gear whiledriving on a slippery road surface.

Downhill gradients

! On long and steep gradients, you mustreduce the load on the brakes by shiftingearly to a lower gear. This allows you to takeadvantage of the engine braking effect and

Driving tips 153

Drivingandparking

Z

Page 156: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

helps avoid overheating and excessivewear of the brakes.When you take advantage of the enginebraking effect, a drive wheel may not turnfor some time, e.g. on a slippery road sur-face. This could cause damage to the drivetrain. This type of damage is not covered bythe Mercedes-Benz warranty.

Heavy and light loads

G WARNINGIf you rest your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving, the braking system can overheat. Thisincreases the stopping distance and can evencause the braking system to fail. There is arisk of an accident.Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Neverdepress the brake pedal and the acceleratorpedal at the same time.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.

If the brakes have been subjected to a heavyload, do not stop the vehicle immediately, butdrive on for a short while. This allows the air-flow to cool the brakes more quickly.

Wet roadsIf driving in heavy rain for a prolonged periodof time without braking, there may be adelayed reaction from the brakes when brak-ing for the first time. This may also occur afterthe vehicle has been washed.You have to depress the brake pedal morefirmly. Maintain a greater distance from thevehicle in front.After driving on a wet road or having the vehi-cle washed, brake firmly while paying atten-tion to the traffic conditions. Thiswill warmupthe brake discs, thereby drying them morequickly and protecting them against corro-sion.

Limited braking performance on salt-treated roadsIf you drive on salted roads, a layer of saltresidue may form on the brake discs andbrake pads. This can result in a significantlylonger braking distance.RBrake occasionally to remove any possiblesalt residue. Make sure that you do notendanger other road users when doing so.RCarefully depress the brake pedal and thebeginning and end of a journey.RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicleahead.

Servicing the brakes

! If the brake warning lamp lights up in theinstrument cluster and you hear a warningtone even though the parking brake hasbeen released, the brake fluid level may betoo low. Observe additional warning mes-sages in the multifunction display.The brake fluid level may be too low due tobrake pad wear or leaking brake lines.Have the brake system checked immedi-ately. This work should be carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

! A function or performance test shouldonly be carried out on a 2-axle dynamom-eter. If you are planning to have the vehicletested on such a dynamometer, contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center toobtain further information first. Otherwise,you could damage the drive train or thebrake system.

! As the ESP® system operates automati-cally, the engine and the ignition must beswitched off (the SmartKeymust be in posi-tion 0 or 1 in the ignition lock) if the parkingbrake is tested on a brake dynamometer(for a maximum of ten seconds).Braking applications triggered automati-cally by ESP®mayotherwise seriously dam-age the brake system.

154 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

Page 157: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you onlyhave brake pads/linings installed on yourvehicle which have been approved forMercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspondto an equivalent quality standard. Brakepads/linings which have not been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are notof an equivalent quality could affect your vehi-cle's operating safety.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you onlyuse brake fluid that has been speciallyapproved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz,or which corresponds to an equivalent qualitystandard. Brake fluid which has not beenapproved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles orwhich is not of an equivalent quality couldaffect your vehicle's operating safety.All checks and maintenance work on thebrake system must be carried out at a quali-fied specialist workshop.Have brake pads installed and brake fluidreplaced at a qualified specialist workshop.If your brake system is subject only to mod-erate loads, you should test the functionalityof your brakes at regular intervals by pressingfirmly on the brake pedal at high speeds. Thisimproves the grip of the brake pads.You can find a description of Brake Assist(BAS) on (Y page 62).

High-performance brake system forAMG vehiclesThe high-performance brake system is onlyinstalled on the G 63 AMG and the G 65 AMG.The high-performance brake system isdesigned for heavy loads. This may lead tonoise when braking. This will depend on:RSpeedRBraking forceREnvironmental conditions, such as temper-ature and humidity

The wear of individual components of thebrake system, such as the brake pads/liningsor brake discs, depends on the individual driv-ing style and operating conditions.

For this reason, it is impossible to state amileage that will be valid under all circum-stances. An aggressive driving style will leadto high wear. You can obtain further informa-tion about this from your authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.New and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect after sev-eral hundred kilometers of driving. Compen-sate for this by applying greater force to thebrake pedal. Keep this in mind, and adaptyour driving and braking accordingly duringthis break-in period.Excessive heavy braking results in corre-spondingly high brake wear. Observe thebrake system warning lamp in the instrumentcluster and note any brake status messagesin the multifunction display. For high-per-formance driving in particular, it is importantto maintain and have the brake systemchecked regularly.

Parking brake

G WARNINGIf you must brake the vehicle with the parkingbrake, the braking distance is considerablylonger and the wheels could lock. There is anincreased danger of skidding and accidents.Only use the parking brake to brake the vehi-cle when the service brake is faulty. Do notapply the parking brake too firmly. If thewheels lock, release the parking brake untilthe wheels begin turning again.

If you brake the vehicle with the parkingbrake, the brake lamps will not light up.If you drive on wet roads or dirt-covered sur-faces, road salt and/or dirt could get into theparking brake.

Driving tips 155

Drivingandparking

Z

Page 158: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

In order to prevent corrosion and a reductionin the braking power of the parking brake,observe the following:Rpull the parking brake upwards with therelease button depressed from time to timebefore beginning the journey (Y page 151).Rdrive for approximately 110 yds (100 m) ata maximum speed of 12 mph (20 km/h)

Driving on wet roads

HydroplaningIf water has accumulated to a certain depthon the road surface, there is a danger ofhydroplaning occurring, even if:Ryou drive at low speeds.Rthe tires have adequate tread depth.For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or inconditions in which hydroplaning may occur,you must drive in the following manner:Rlower your speed.Ravoid ruts.Rbrake carefully.

Driving on flooded roads

! Do not drive through flooded areas.Check the depth of anywater before drivingthrough it. Drive slowly through standingwater. Otherwise, water may enter thevehicle interior or the engine compartment.This can damage the electronic compo-nents in the engine or the automatic trans-mission. Water can also be drawn in by theengine's air suction nozzles and this cancause engine damage.

If you have to drive on stretches of road onwhich water has collected, please bear inmind that:Rthe maximum permissible still water depthdepends on the vehicle equipmentRyou should drive no faster than at a walkingpace

Off-road fording

! Under no circumstances should youaccelerate before entering the water. Thebow wave could cause water to enter anddamage the engine and other assemblies.

! Do not open any of the vehicle's doorswhile fording. Otherwise, water could getinto the vehicle interior and damage thevehicle's electronics and interior equip-ment.

i You may only drive through fresh water.RObserve the safety notes (Y page 158) andthe general notes (Y page 158) on off-roaddriving.REstablish how deep the water is and thecharacteristics of the body of water beforefording.RSwitch off the air-conditioning system.RShift the transfer case to LOW RANGE(Y page 186).REngage the differential locks, if necessary(Y page 189).RRestrict the shift range to 1 or 2(Y page 145).RAvoid high engine speeds.REnter and exit the water at a flat place andat a steady walking pace.RDrive slowly and at an even speed throughthe water.RDo not stop and do not switch off theengine.RWater offers a high degree of resistance,and the ground is slippery and in somecases unstable. Therefore, it is difficult anddangerous to pull away in the water.REnsure that a bow wave does not form asyou drive.RClean any mud from the tire tread afterfording.RApply the brakes to dry them after fording.Always observe the fording depth values(Y page 345).

156 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

Page 159: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Winter driving

General notes

G DANGERIf the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequateventilation is not possible, poisonous gasessuch as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter thevehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehiclebecomes trapped in snow. There is a risk offatal injury.If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heatingrunning, make sure the exhaust pipe and areaaround the vehicle are clear of snow. Toensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open awindow on the side of the vehicle that is notfacing into the wind.

G WARNINGIf snow chains are installed to the frontwheels, they may drag against the vehiclebody or chassis components. This couldcause damage to the vehicle or the tires.There is a risk of an accident.To avoid hazardous situations:Rnever install snow chains to the frontwheelsRalways install snow chains in pairs to therear wheels.

Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a quali-fied specialist workshop at the onset of win-ter.Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"section (Y page 308).

Driving with summer tiresObserve the notes in the "Winter operation"section (Y page 308).

Slippery road surfaces

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.

There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.

G WARNINGIf you activate the LOW off-road gear whiledriving on a slippery road surface, the wheelsmay lose traction:Rif you remove your foot from the accelera-tor pedal when drivingRif off road ABS intervenes when brakingIf the wheels lose traction. the vehicle can nolonger be steered. There is an increased dan-ger of skidding and accidents.Never activate the LOW off-road gear whiledriving on a slippery road surface.

Drive particularly carefully on slippery roadsurfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steeringand braking maneuvers. Do not use cruisecontrol.If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot bestopped when moving at low speed:X Shift the transmission to position N.X Try to bring the vehicle under control usingcorrective steering.

The outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning deviceand is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.Changes in the outside temperature are dis-played after a short delay.Indicated temperatures just above the freez-ing point do not guarantee that the road sur-face is free of ice. The road may still be icy,especially in wooded areas or on bridges. Youshould pay special attention to road condi-tions when temperatures are around thefreezing point.For more information on driving with snowchains, see (Y page 309).

Driving tips 157

Drivingandparking

Z

Page 160: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Off-road driving

Important safety notes

G WARNINGDo not load items on the basic carrier bars. Itmay cause instability during somemaneuverswhich could result in an accident.Drive slowly in unknown terrain. This willmake it easier to recognize unexpected obsta-cles and avoid damage to the vehicle.To help avoid the vehicle rolling over, neverturn it around on steep inclines. If the vehiclecannot complete the attempted climb, back itdown in reverse gear.Do not drive along the side of a slope. Thevehicle might otherwise rollover. If in doing sothe vehicle begins to show a tendency to roll,immediately steer into a line of gravity(straight up or downhill).Never let the vehicle roll backwards in idle.You may lose control of the vehicle if you useonly the service brake. For information ondriving downhill, see "Driving downhill".

When driving off-road, sand, mud and water,possiblymixedwith oil, for example, could getinto the brakes. This could result in a reducedbraking effect or in total brake failure and alsoin increased wear and tear. The braking char-acteristics change depending on the materialingressing the brakes. Clean the brakes afterdriving off-road. If you detect a reduced brak-ing effect or grinding noises, have the brakesystem checked in a qualified specialist work-shop as soon as possible. Adapt your drivingstyle to the different braking characteristics.Driving off-road increases the likelihood ofdamage to the vehicle, which, in turn, can leadto failure of the mechanical assembly or sys-tems. Adapt your driving style to suit the ter-rain conditions. Drive carefully. Have damageto the vehicle rectified immediately at a quali-fied specialist workshop.

General notes

H Environmental noteProtection of the environment is of primaryimportance. Treat nature with respect.Observe all prohibiting signs.

Read this section carefully before driving yourvehicle off-road. Practice by driving overmoregentle off-road terrain first.Familiarize yourself with the characteristicsof your vehicle and the gear shift operationbefore driving through difficult terrain.The following driving systems are speciallyadapted to off-road driving:R4ETS (Y page 63)RTransfer case (Y page 186)RDifferential locks (Y page 188)Observe the following notes:Rstop your vehicle and, if necessary, shift thetransfer case to LOWRANGE (Y page 186)before driving off-road.RAMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop func-tion is not available in transfer case posi-tion LOW RANGE (Y page 136).Rengage the differential locks, if necessary(Y page 189).

i ABS, 4ETS, ESP® and BAS are deactivatedwhile the differential locks are engaged.This allows the front wheels to lock briefly,so that these can dig into a loose surface.However, please note that locked wheelsskid and can no longer steer.RCheck that items of luggage and loads arestowed safely and are well secured(Y page 253).RTo avoid damaging the vehicle, make surethere is always sufficient ground clearance.RAlways keep the engine running and in gearwhen driving on a downhill gradient.RAlways keep the engine running and in gearwhen driving on a slope.RDrive slowly and evenly, if necessary at awalking pace.

158 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

Page 161: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

REnsure that the wheels are in contact withthe ground at all times.RDrive with extreme care on unfamiliar off-road routes where visibility is poor. Forsafety reasons, get out of the vehicle firstand survey the off-road route.RCheck the depth of water before fordingrivers and streams.RWhen fording, do not stop and do notswitch off the engine.RLook out for obstacles, such as rocks,holes, tree stumps and furrows.RAlways keep the doors, rear door, side win-dows and the sliding sunroof closed whilethe vehicle is in motion.RSwitch off cruise control.RDo not stray from marked routes or paths.RAdapt your speed to the terrain. Therougher, steeper or more ruts on the ter-rain, the slower your speed should be.RDrive slowly and at an even speed throughthe water. Ensure that a bowwave does notform as you drive.ROn sand, drive quickly to overcome the roll-ing resistance. Otherwise the vehicle'swheels could become stuck in looseground.RDo not jump with the vehicle as this willinterrupt the vehicle's propulsion.RAvoid high engine speeds. Drive at appro-priate engine speeds (maximum3,000 rpm).RDo not shift the automatic transmission totransmission position N.RAlways check the vehicle for damage afteroff-road driving.

i Information about retrofitting special all-terrain tires is available from any qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i Do not use the HOLD function when driv-ing off-road, on steep uphill or downhill gra-dients or on slippery or loose surfaces. TheHOLD function cannot hold the vehicle onsuch surfaces.

Checklist before driving off-road

! If the engine oil warning lamp lights upwhile the vehicle is inmotion, stop the vehi-cle in a safe place as soon as possible.Check the engine oil level. The engine oilwarning lampwarningmust not be ignored.Continuing the journey while the symbol isdisplayed could lead to engine damage.

X Oil level: check the engine oil level and addoil if necessary.Only then does the engine receive enoughoil when the vehicle is on a steep incline.

X Tire-changing tool kit: check that the jackis working and make sure you have the lugwrench, a robust tow cable and a foldingspade in the vehicle.

X Wheels and tires: check the tire treaddepth and tire pressure.

X Check for damage and remove any foreignobjects, e.g. small stones, from thewheels/tires.

X Replace any missing valve caps.X Replace dented or damaged wheels.X Carry a sound spare wheel.

Checklist after driving off-roadDriving over rough terrain places greaterdemands on your vehicle than driving on nor-mal roads. After driving off-road, check thevehicle. This allows you to detect damagepromptly and reduce the risk of an accident toyourself and other road users.X Shift the transfer case to HIGHRANGE(Y page 186).

X Disengage the differential locks(Y page 190).

X Clean the headlamps and rear lights andcheck for damage.

X Clean the front and rear license plates.X Clean the wheels and tires with a water jetand remove any foreign objects.

Driving tips 159

Drivingandparking

Z

Page 162: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

X Clean thewheels, tires, wheel housings andthe vehicle underside with a water jet;check for any foreign objects and damage.

X Check whether twigs or other parts ofplants have become trapped. Theseincrease the risk of fire and can damagefuel pipes, brake hoses or the rubber bel-lows of the axle joints and propeller shafts.

X After the trip, examine without fail theentire undercarriage, wheels, tires, brakes,bodywork structure, steering, chassis andexhaust system for damage.

X After driving for extended periods acrosssand, mud, gravel, water or in similarly dirtyconditions, have the brake discs, wheels,brake pads/linings and axle joints checkedand cleaned.

X If you notice strong vibrations after off-roaddriving, check for foreign objects in thewheels and drive train and, if necessary,remove them.Foreign objects can disturb the balanceand cause vibrations.

X Test the brakes.

Driving on sandObserve the following rules when driving onsand:RShift the transfer case to LOWRANGE(Y page 186).RAvoid high engine speeds.RLimit the shift range of the automatic trans-mission according to the off-road condi-tions.RDrive quickly to overcome the rolling resist-ance. Otherwise the vehicle's wheels couldbecome stuck in loose ground.RDrive in the tracks of other vehicles if pos-sible. When doing so, make sure that:- the tire ruts are not too deep.- the sand is sufficiently firm.- your vehicle has sufficient ground clear-ance

Tire ruts and gravel roads

! Check that the ruts are not too deep andthat your vehicle has sufficient clearance.Otherwise, your vehicle could be damagedor bottom out and get stuck.

Observe the following rules when drivingalong ruts in off-road terrain or on roads withloose gravel:RShift the transfer case to LOWRANGE(Y page 186).RAvoid high engine speeds.RObserve the safety notes (Y page 158) andthe general notes (Y page 158) on off-roaddriving.RRestrict the shift range of the automatictransmission to 1(Y page 145).RDrive slowly.RWhere ruts are too deep, drive with thewheels of one side on the center grassyarea, if possible.

Driving over obstacles

! Obstacles could damage the floor of thevehicle or components of the chassis. Askpassengers for guidance when driving overlarge obstacles. The passenger shouldalways keep a safe distance from the vehi-cle when doing so in order to avoid injury asa result of unexpected vehicle movements.After driving off-road or over obstacles,check the vehicle for possible damage,especially to the underbody and the com-ponents of the chassis.

! Drive with particular care when drivingover an obstacle while driving up or down asteep slope.The vehicle could otherwise tilt and slidesideways or tip over.

160 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

Page 163: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Observe the following rules when driving overtree stumps, large stones and other obsta-cles:RObserve the safety notes (Y page 158) andthe general notes (Y page 158) on off-roaddriving.RShift the transfer case to LOW RANGE(Y page 186).RAvoid high engine speeds.RRestrict the shift range to 1 (Y page 145).RMake sure that you have enough groundclearance before driving across an obsta-cle.RDrive very slowly.RTry to drive straight over the center ofobstacles: front wheel first, then rearwheel.

Traveling uphill

Approach/departure angle

G WARNINGIf you drive on a steep incline at an angle orturn when driving on an incline, the vehiclecould slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is arisk of an accident.Always drive on a steep incline in the line offall (straight up or down) and do not turn thevehicle.

Always observe the approach/departureangle values (Y page 346).

RObserve the safety notes (Y page 158) andthe general notes (Y page 158) on off-roaddriving.RDo not drive at an angle on slopes, inclinesor gradients, but instead follow the directline of fall. Note that the climbing ability ofyour vehicle depends on the terrain condi-tions.RBefore driving on extreme uphill and down-hill gradients, shift the transfer case toLOW RANGE (Y page 186).REngage the differential locks, if necessary(Y page 189).RDrive slowly.RAccelerate gently and make sure that thewheels are gripping.RAvoid high engine speeds, except whendriving on sandy and muddy routes withhigh driving resistance.RAvoid high engine speeds – drive at anappropriate engine speed (maximum3,000 rpm).RWhen driving down an incline, make use ofthe engine's braking effect. Observe theengine speed; do not overrev the engine.

i Further information on the maximumengine speed: (Y page 198).RSelect a shift range appropriate to the gra-dient.RBefore tackling steep downhill gradients,select shift range 1 (Y page 145).RAlways check the brakes after driving off-road.

i Hill start assist will aid you when pullingaway on a hill.For more information, see "Hill start assist"(Y page 135).

Maximum gradient-climbing capabilityAlways observe the maximum gradient climb-ing ability values (Y page 346).

Driving tips 161

Drivingandparking

Z

Page 164: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

HilltopsWhen driving on an uphill gradient, reducepressure slightly on the accelerator immedi-ately before reaching the top of the hill (do notshift the transmission to position N). Use thevehicle's own impetus to drive over the top ofthe hill.This style of driving prevents:Rthe vehicle from lifting off the ground on thebrow of a hillRloss of tractionRthe vehicle from traveling too quickly downthe other side

Driving downhillRBefore tackling steep downhill gradients,select shift range 1(Y page 145).This way you use the engine's brakingeffect to reduce the speed. If this is notsufficient, brake gently. When doing so,make sure that the vehicle is facing in thedirection of the line of fall.RObserve the notes on driving in mountain-ous terrain (Y page 161).RDrive slowly.RDo not drive at an angle down steepinclines. Steer into the line of fall and drivewith the front wheels aligned straight. Oth-erwise, the vehicle could slip sideways, tipand roll over.RCheck that the brakes areworking normallyafter a long downhill stretch.

i The special off-road ABS setting(Y page 62) enables repeated, brief, pre-cise locking of the front wheels, whichleads to the wheels digging into the looseground. Note that when the front wheelsare fully braked, they slide easily over thesurface of the ground, making it difficult tosteer.

Driving systems

Cruise control

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe brake pedal moves when cruise controlbrakes the vehicle. A foot in the area underthe brake pedal could become trapped. Themovement of the pedal, and therefore thevehicle's ability to brake, may be restricted byobjects in the area under the brake. There is arisk of an accident and injury.Do not place your foot under the brake pedal.Keep the area under the brake pedal free fromobstructions.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruisecontrol can neither reduce the risk of acci-dent nor override the laws of physics. Cruisecontrol cannot take account of road, weatherand traffic conditions. Cruise control is onlyan aid. You are responsible for the distance tothe vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and forbraking in good time. Adjust your driving styleto the traffic conditions. Only engage cruisecontrol when the current road, weather andtraffic conditions permit it to be done safely.Drive carefully and maintain a suitable dis-tance to the vehicle in front.Do not use cruise control:Rin traffic conditions that do not allow you todrive at a constant speed, e.g. heavy traffic,on winding roads or off-roadRon slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-erating could cause the drivewheels to losetraction and the vehicle could then skidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow

General notesCruise control maintains a constant roadspeed for you. On long and steep downhillgradients, especially if the vehicle is laden,you must select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in goodtime. By doing so, you will make use of the

162 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Page 165: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

braking effect of the engine. This relieves theload on the brake system and prevents thebrakes from overheating and wearing tooquickly.Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-ditions make it appropriate to maintain asteady speed for a prolonged period. You canstore any road speed above 20 mph(30 km/h).

i Cruise control should not be activatedwhen driving off-road.

Cruise control lever

: To activate or increase speed; LIM indicator lamp= To activate at the current speed/last

stored speed? To activate or reduce speedA To switch between cruise control and var-

iable SPEEDTRONICB To deactivate cruise controlYou can operate cruise control and variableSPEEDTRONIC with the cruise control lever.When you activate cruise control, the storedspeed is shown in the multifunction displayfor five seconds.The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise controllever indicates which system you have selec-ted:RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control isselected.RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEED-TRONIC is selected.

Activation conditionsTo activate cruise control, all of the followingactivation conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe parking brake must be released.Ryou are driving faster than 20 mph(30 km/h).RESP® must be active, but not intervening.Rthe transmission must be in position D.

Selecting cruise control

: To activate or increase speed; LIM indicator lamp= To activate at the current speed/last

stored speed? To activate or reduce speedA To switch between cruise control and var-

iable SPEEDTRONICB To deactivate cruise controlX Checkwhether LIM indicator lamp; is off.If it is off, cruise control is already selected.If it is not, press the cruise control lever inthe direction of arrowA.LIM indicator lamp; in the cruise controllever goes out. Cruise control is selected.

Driving systems 163

Drivingandparking

Z

Page 166: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Storing, maintaining and calling up aspeed

Storing and maintaining the currentspeed

: To activate or increase speed; LIM indicator lamp= To activate at the current speed/last

stored speed? To activate or reduce speedA To switch between cruise control and var-

iable SPEEDTRONICB To deactivate cruise controlYou can store the current speed if you aredriving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).X Accelerate the vehicle to the desiredspeed.

X Briefly press the cruise control lever up:or down?.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.Cruise control is activated. The vehicleautomatically maintains the stored speed.

i Cruise control may be unable to maintainthe stored speed on uphill and downhillgradients. The stored speed is resumedwhen the gradient levels out. Cruise controlmaintains the stored speed on downhillgradients by automatically applying thebrakes.

Calling up the stored speedG WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it is lowerthan the current speed, the vehicle deceler-ates. If you do not know the stored speed, thevehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. Thereis a risk of an accident.Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-tions before calling up the stored speed. If youdo not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

: To activate or increase speed; LIM indicator lamp= To activate at the current speed/last

stored speed? To activate or reduce speedA To switch between cruise control and var-

iable SPEEDTRONICB To deactivate cruise controlX Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou=.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.Cruise control is activated and adjusts thevehicle's speed to the last speed stored.

i If no speed is stored, cruise control storesthe current speed and maintains it.

164 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Page 167: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Setting a speed

Adjusting

: To activate or increase speed; LIM indicator lamp= To activate at the current speed/last

stored speed? To activate or reduce speedA To switch between cruise control and var-

iable SPEEDTRONICB To deactivate cruise controlKeep in mind that it may take a brief momentuntil the vehicle accelerates or decelerates tothe set speed.X To increase the speed: press the cruisecontrol lever up:.

X To decrease the speed: press the cruisecontrol lever down?.

X Keep the cruise control lever pressed untilthe desired speed is reached.

X Release the cruise control lever.The new speed is stored.

Making adjustments in 1mph increments(1 km/h increments in Canada)

: To activate or increase speed; LIM indicator lamp= To activate at the current speed/last

stored speed? To activate or reduce speedA To switch between cruise control and var-

iable SPEEDTRONICB To deactivate cruise controlX Briefly press the cruise control lever up:for a higher speed or down? for a lowerspeed.The last speed stored is increased orreduced.

Making adjustments in 5mph increments(10 km/h increments):

: To activate or increase speed; LIM indicator lamp= To activate at the current speed/last

stored speed? To activate or reduce speed

Driving systems 165

Drivingandparking

Z

Page 168: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

A To switch between cruise control and var-iable SPEEDTRONIC

B To deactivate cruise controlX Briefly press the cruise control lever up:or down? to beyond the pressure point.The last speed stored is increased orreduced.

i Cruise control is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. For exam-ple, if you accelerate briefly to overtake,cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speedto the last speed stored after you have fin-ished overtaking.

Deactivating cruise control

: To activate or increase speed; LIM indicator lamp= To activate at the current speed/last

stored speed? To activate or reduce speedA To switch between cruise control and var-

iable SPEEDTRONICB To deactivate cruise controlThere are several ways to deactivate cruisecontrol:X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-wardsB.

orX Brake.

orX Briefly press the cruise control lever in thedirection of arrowA.Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. LIMindicator lamp; in the cruise control leverlights up.

Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:Ryou apply the parking brakeRyou are driving at less than 20 mph(30 km/h)RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Ryou shift the transmission to position Nwhile driving

i The last speed stored is cleared when youswitch off the engine.

SPEEDTRONIC

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you rest your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving, the braking system can overheat. Thisincreases the stopping distance and can evencause the braking system to fail. There is arisk of an accident.Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Neverdepress the brake pedal and the acceleratorpedal at the same time.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, SPEED-TRONIC can neither reduce the risk of acci-dent nor override the laws of physics. SPEED-TRONIC cannot take account of road,weatherand traffic conditions. SPEEDTRONIC is onlyan aid. You are responsible for the distance tothe vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, forbraking in good time and for staying in lane.Only engage SPEEDTRONIC when the currentroad, weather and traffic conditions permit itto be done safely. Drive carefully and main-tain a suitable distance to the vehicle in front.

166 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Page 169: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

General notesSPEEDTRONIC brakes automatically so thatyou do not exceed the set speed. On long andsteep downhill gradients, especially if thevehicle is laden or towing a trailer, you mustselect shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. Bydoing so, you will make use of the brakingeffect of the engine, which relieves the loadon the brake system and prevents the brakesfrom overheating and wearing too quickly. Ifyou need additional braking, depress thebrake pedal repeatedly rather than continu-ously.

i The speed indicated in the speedometermay differ slightly from the limit speedstored.

Cruise control lever

: To store the current speed or a higherspeed

; LIM indicator lamp= To call up the last speed stored? To store the current speed or a lower

speedA To switch between cruise control and var-

iable SPEEDTRONICB To deactivate variable SPEEDTRONICYou can operate cruise control and variableSPEEDTRONIC with the cruise control lever.

The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise controllever indicates which system you have selec-ted:RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control isselected.RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEED-TRONIC is selected.

You can use the cruise control lever to limitthe speed to any speed above 30 km/h whilethe engine is running.

Selecting variable SPEEDTRONIC

: To activate or increase speed; LIM indicator lamp= To activate at the current speed/last

stored speed? To activate or reduce speedA To switch between cruise control and var-

iable SPEEDTRONICB To deactivate cruise controlIf you fail to adapt your driving style, SPEED-TRONIC can neither reduce the risk of acci-dent nor override the laws of physics. SPEED-TRONIC cannot take account of road,weatherand traffic conditions. SPEEDTRONIC is onlyan aid. You are responsible for the distance tothe vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, forbraking in good time and for staying in lane.Only engage SPEEDTRONIC when the currentroad, weather and traffic conditions permit itto be done safely. Drive carefully and main-tain a suitable distance to the vehicle in front.X Checkwhether LIM indicator lamp; is on.

Driving systems 167

Drivingandparking

Z

Page 170: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

If it is on, variable SPEEDTRONIC is alreadyselected.If it is not, press the cruise control lever inthe direction of arrowA.LIM indicator lamp; in the cruise controllever lights up. Variable SPEEDTRONIC isselected.

Storing the current speed

: To activate or increase speed; LIM indicator lamp= To activate at the current speed/last

stored speed? To activate or reduce speedA To switch between cruise control and var-

iable SPEEDTRONICB To deactivate cruise controlYou can use the cruise control lever to limitthe speed to any speed above 18 mph whilethe engine is running.X Briefly press the cruise control lever up:or down?.The current speed is stored and shown inthe multifunction display.

i On downhill gradients, the speed can beexceeded despite variable SPEEDTRONIC.In this case, you will hear a warning toneand the Limit ExceededLimit Exceeded message willappear in the multifunction display. If nec-essary, apply the brakes yourself.

Calling up the last speed stored

Calling up the last speed stored

: To activate or increase speed; LIM indicator lamp= To activate at the current speed/last

stored speed? To activate or reduce speedA To switch between cruise control and var-

iable SPEEDTRONICB To deactivate cruise controlIf you fail to adapt your driving style, SPEED-TRONIC can neither reduce the risk of acci-dent nor override the laws of physics. SPEED-TRONIC cannot take account of road,weatherand traffic conditions. SPEEDTRONIC is onlyan aid. You are responsible for the distance tothe vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, forbraking in good time and for staying in yourlane. Only activate SPEEDTRONIC when theprevailing road, weather and traffic condi-tions permit. Drive carefully and maintain asuitable distance to the vehicle in front.X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou=.

i If you call up the stored speed and yourcurrent speed is higher, you will hear awarning tone. The Limit ExceededLimit Exceeded mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

i If no speed is stored, variable SPEED-TRONIC stores the current speed andmain-tains it.

168 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Page 171: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Deactivating variable SPEEDTRONIC

There are several ways to deactivate variableSPEEDTRONIC:X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-wardsB.

orX Briefly press the cruise control lever in thedirection of arrowA.LIM indicator lamp; in the cruise controllever goes out. Variable SPEEDTRONIC isdeactivated.Cruise control is selected.

It is not possible to deactivate variableSPEEDTRONIC by braking.Variable SPEEDTRONIC is deactivated auto-matically when you depress the acceleratorpedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown),but only if your current speed does not differby more than 12 mph from the stored speed.

DISTRONIC PLUS

Important safety notes

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:Rpeople or animalsRstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop-ped or parked vehiclesRoncoming and crossing trafficAs a result, DISTRONIC PLUSmay neither givewarnings nor intervene in such situations.There is a risk of an accident.

Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly iden-tify other road users and complex traffic sit-uations.In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenbrake the vehicleRneither give a warning nor interveneRaccelerate or brake unexpectedlyThere is a risk of an accident.Continue to drive carefully and be ready tobrake, in particular when warned to do so byDISTRONIC PLUS.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with upto 40% of the maximum braking force. If thisbraking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC PLUSwarns you visually and audibly. There is a riskof an accident.In such cases, apply the brakes yourself andtry to take evasive action.

G WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it differsfrom the current speed, the vehicle acceler-ates or decelerates. If you do not know thestored speed, the vehicle could accelerate orbrake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-tions before calling up the stored speed. If youdo not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

If you fail to adapt your driving style,DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the riskof accident nor override the laws of physics.DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take account ofroad, weather and traffic conditions.DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in good

Driving systems 169

Drivingandparking

Z

Page 172: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

time and for staying in your lane. Only engageDISTRONIC PLUS when the current road,weather and traffic conditions permit it to bedone safely, and adapt your driving styleaccordingly. Drive carefully and maintain asuitable distance to the vehicle in front.When DISTRONIC PLUS detects a risk of col-lision with the vehicle in front but is unable tosufficiently decelerate the vehicle in order tomaintain the set distance from the vehicle infront, you will be warned visually and acous-tically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot prevent acollision without your intervention. An inter-mittent warning tone will then sound and thedistance warning lamp will light up in theinstrument cluster. Brake immediately inorder to increase the distance from the vehi-cle in front, or take evasive action, provided itis safe to do so.DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrowvehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, orvehicles driving on a different line. Therefore,always pay attention to traffic conditionseven when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.Otherwise, you may fail to recognize dangersin time, cause an accident and injure yourselfand others.In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rthe sensor is dirty or coveredRthere is snow or heavy rainRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere is the possibility of strong radarreflections, for example, in parkinggarages.

If DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, the vehiclebrakes automatically in certain situations.This can happen unexpectedly, especiallywhen towing or in a car wash. There is a risk ofan accident. In these or similar situations,deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS.If you want DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you,the following activation conditions must befulfilled (Y page 171) and the radar sensorsystem must be operational.

General notesDISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed andautomatically helps you maintain the dis-tance to the vehicle detected in front.DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically sothat the set speed is not exceeded.On long and steep downhill gradients, espe-cially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer,you must select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in goodtime. By doing so, you will make use of thebraking effect of the engine. This relieves theload on the brake system and prevents thebrakes from overheating and wearing tooquickly.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a slower-movingvehicle in front, your vehicle is braked in orderto maintain the preset distance to the vehiclein front.If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONICPLUS operates in the same way as cruisecontrol in the speed range between 20 mph(Canada: 30 km/h) and 120 mph (Canada:200 km/h). If a vehicle is driving in front ofyou, it operates in the speed range between0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (Canada:200 km/h).Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving onroads with steep gradients.As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, itcan resemble the radar detectors of theresponsible authorities. You can refer to therelevant chapter in the Operator's Manual ifquestions are asked about this.

i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCCas a "Vehicular Radar System". The radarsensor is intended for use in an automotiveradar system only. Removing, tamperingwith, or altering the device will void anywarranties, and is not permitted by theFCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

170 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Page 173: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

i Canada only: This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful inter-ference, and2. This devicemust accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Removal, tampering, or altering of thedevice will void any warranties, and is notpermitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or usein any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

Cruise control lever

: To activate or increase speed; To set the specified minimum distance= LIM indicator lamp? To activate at the current speed/last

stored speedA To activate or reduce speedB To switch between DISTRONIC PLUS and

variable SPEEDTRONICC To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUSWith the cruise control lever, you can operateDISTRONIC PLUS and variable SPEED-TRONIC.X To switch between variable SPEED-TRONIC and DISTRONIC PLUS: press the

cruise control lever in the direction of arrowB.

LIM indicator lamp= on the cruise controllever indicateswhich function you have selec-ted:RLIM indicator lamp== off: DISTRONICPLUS is selected.RLIM indicator lamp== on: variableSPEEDTRONIC is selected.

Activating DISTRONIC PLUS

Activation conditionsIn order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the fol-lowing conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe engine must be started. It may take upto two minutes after pulling away beforeDISTRONIC PLUS is operational.Rthe parking brake must be released.Rthe differential lock must be disengaged.RESP® must be active, but not intervening.Rthe transmission must be in position D.Rthe driver's door must be closed when youshift from P to D or your seat belt must befastened.Rthe front-passenger door and rear doorsmust be closed.Rthe vehicle must not skid.Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS function must beselected (Y page 171).Rthe transfer case must be in the HIGHRANGE transmission position.Rthe vehicle must not be on an uphill ordownhill gradient of more than 22‑25%.Rthe radar sensor must be free from dirt(Y page 284).

Driving systems 171

Drivingandparking

Z

Page 174: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Activating while driving

When driving at speeds below 20 mph(30 km/h), you can activate DISTRONICPLUS if the vehicle in front has been detectedand is shown in the multifunction display. Ifthe vehicle in front is no longer detected anddisplayed, DISTRONIC PLUS switches off anda tone sounds.X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou?, or press it up: or downA.DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

X Press the cruise control lever up: ordownA repeatedly until the desired speedis set.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of thevehicle in front, but only up to the desiredstored speed.

i If you do not fully release the acceleratorpedal, the DISTRONICDISTRONIC PLUSPLUS PassivePassivemes-sage appears in the multifunction display.The set distance to a slower-moving vehiclein front will then not bemaintained. Youwillbe driving at the speed you determine bythe position of the accelerator pedal.

Switching on while stationaryThis function may be useful if you want tokeep up with the traffic flow, e.g. at the end ofa tailback.You can only activate DISTRONIC PLUS if:Rthe vehicle in front andRyour vehicle are stationary

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou?, or press it up: or downA.DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.i DISTRONIC PLUS can only be activatedwhen the vehicle is stationary and atspeeds below 20 mph (30 km/h) if a vehi-cle in front has been detected. Therefore,the DISTRONIC PLUS distance display inthe instrument cluster should be activated(Y page 205).

X Keep the cruise control lever pressed up:or downA until the desired speed is set.i You can use the cruise control lever to setthe stored speed and the control on thecruise control lever to set the specifiedminimum distance (Y page 175).

Activating at the current speed/laststored speedG WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it differsfrom the current speed, the vehicle acceler-ates or decelerates. If you do not know thestored speed, the vehicle could accelerate orbrake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-tions before calling up the stored speed. If youdo not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou?.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The firsttime it is activated, the current speed isstored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruisespeed to the previously stored value.

172 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Page 175: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

Pulling away and driving

X If the vehicle in front pulls away: removeyour foot from the brake pedal.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou?, or press it up: or downA.

orX Accelerate briefly.Your vehicle pulls away and adapts itsspeed to that of the vehicle in front.

If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONICPLUS operates in the same way as cruisecontrol.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle infront has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle.In this way, the distance you have selected ismaintained.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle infront is driving faster, it accelerates your vehi-cle, but only up to the speed you have stored.If you depress the brake, DISTRONIC PLUS isdeactivated unless your vehicle is stationary.

Changing lanesIf you change to the passing lane, DISTRONICPLUS supports you when:Ryou are driving faster than 40 mph(60 km/h)RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the dis-tance to a vehicle in frontRyou switch on the appropriate turn signalRDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a dangerof collision

If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle isaccelerated. Acceleration will be interruptedif changing lanes takes too long or if the dis-tance between your vehicle and the vehicle infront becomes too small.

i When changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUSmonitors the left lane on left-hand drivevehicles and the right lane on right-handdrive vehicles.

StoppingG WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, even if it is brakedonly by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivatedwith the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehi-cle occupant or from outside the vehicle.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnected.Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

There is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offDISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle infront is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until itis stationary.Once your vehicle is stationary, it remainsstationary and you do not need to depress thebrake.

i Depending on the specified minimum dis-tance, your vehicle will come to a standstillat a sufficient distance behind the vehicle infront. The specified minimum distance isset using the control on the cruise controllever.

On steep uphill or downhill inclines or if thereis a malfunction, the transmission may alsoautomatically be shifted into position P.

Driving systems 173

Drivingandparking

Z

Page 176: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Displays in the instrument cluster

Displays in the speedometer

Example: DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the speed-ometer

When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one ortwo segments; in the set speed range lightup.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,segments; between speed of the vehicle infront: and stored speed= light up.

i For design reasons, the speed displayedin the speedometer may differ slightly fromthe speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deacti-vated

Distance display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deacti-vated: Vehicle in front, if detected; Distance indicator, current distance to

the vehicle in front= Specified minimum distance to the vehi-

cle in front; adjustable? Own vehicle

You can select the distance display in theAssistance menu (Y page 205) of the on-board computer.X Select the Distance DisplayDistance Display functionusing the on-board computer.

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activa-ted

Distance display with DISTRONIC PLUS activatedin the multifunction display: DISTRONIC PLUS activated; Own vehicle= Specified minimum distance to the vehi-

cle in front; adjustable? Vehicle in front, if detectedIn the Assistance menu (Y page 205) of theon-board computer, you can select the dis-tance display.X Select the Distance DisplayDistance Display functionusing the on-board computer(Y page 205).

You will see the stored speed for about fivesecondswhen you activateDISTRONICPLUS.

174 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Page 177: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Setting a speed

: To store the current speed or a higherspeed

; To store the current speed or a lowerspeed

X Press the cruise control lever up: for ahigher speed or down; for a lower speed.

X Keep the cruise control lever pressed untilthe desired speed is reached.

X Release the cruise control lever.The new speed is stored. DISTRONIC PLUSis activated and adjusts the vehicle's speedto the new speed stored.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-ments (1 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up: ordown; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up: or down; the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-ments (10 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up: ordown; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up: or down;, the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. If you accel-erate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUSadjusts the vehicle's speed to the lastspeed stored after you have finished over-taking.

Setting the specifiedminimumdistance

You can set the specified minimum distancefor DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time spanbetween one and two seconds.With this func-tion, you can set the minimum distance thatDISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle infront, dependent on vehicle speed. You cansee this distance in the multifunction display(Y page 205).X To increase: turn control= in direc-tion;.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greaterdistance between your vehicle and thevehicle in front.

X To decrease: turn control= in direc-tion:.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorterdistance between your vehicle and thevehicle in front.

i Make sure that you maintain the mini-mum distance to the vehicle in front asrequired by law. Adjust the distance to thevehicle in front if necessary.

Driving systems 175

Drivingandparking

Z

Page 178: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS

There are several ways to deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS:X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-wards:.

orX Brake, unless the vehicle is stationaryorX Briefly press the cruise control lever in thedirection of arrow=.Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. LIMindicator lamp; in the cruise control leverlights up.

When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, youwill see the DISTRONICDISTRONIC PLUSPLUS OffOffmessage inthe multifunction display for approximatelyfive seconds.

i The last speed stored remains stored untilyou switch off the engine.

DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactiva-ted if:Ryou engage the parking brakeRyou are driving slower than 15 mph(25 km/h) and there is no vehicle in front,or if the vehicle in front is no longer detec-tedRESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Rthe transmission is in the P, R orN positionRyou pull the cruise control lever towardsyou in order to pull away and the front-

passenger door or one of the rear doors isopenRthe vehicle has skiddedIf DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you willhear a warning tone. You will see theDISTRONIC PLUS OffDISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the multi-function display for approximately five sec-onds.In the Assistance menu (Y page 205) of theon-board computer, you can select the dis-tance display.

Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

General notesThe following contains descriptions of certainroad and traffic conditions in which you mustbe particularly attentive. In such situations,brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is thendeactivated.

Cornering, going into and coming out of abend

The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehi-cles when cornering is limited. Your vehiclemay brake unexpectedly or late.

176 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Page 179: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Vehicles traveling on a different line

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehiclestraveling on a different line. The distance tothe vehicle in front will be too short.

Other vehicles changing lanes

DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehi-cle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehiclewill be too short.

Narrow vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected thevehicle in front on the edge of the road,

because of its narrow width. The distance tothe vehicle in front will be too short.

Obstructions and stationary vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obsta-cles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, thedetected vehicle turns a corner and revealsan obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONICPLUS will not brake for these.

Crossing vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS may detect vehicles thatare crossing your lane by mistake. ActivatingDISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with cross-ing traffic, for example, could cause your vehi-cle to pull away unintentionally.

Driving systems 177

Drivingandparking

Z

Page 180: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Blind Spot Assist

Important safety notes

G WARNINGBlind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles which approach with a large speeddifferential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not givewarnings in such situations. There is a risk ofan accident.Always observe the traffic conditions care-fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

G WARNINGBlind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles being overtaken at a speed differ-ence of more than 7.5 mph (12 km/h)Rvehicles which approach with a large speeddifferential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not givewarnings in such situations. There is a risk ofan accident.Always observe the traffic conditions care-fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail todetect some vehicles and is no substitute forattentive driving.In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRvisibility is poor, e.g. due to fog, heavy rainor snowRthere is a narrow vehicle traveling in front,e.g. a motorcycle or bicycleRthe road has very wide lanesRthe road has narrow lanes

Ryou are not driving in the middle of the laneRthere are barriers or other road boundaries

i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCCas a "Vehicular Radar System". The radarsensor is intended for use in an automotiveradar system only. Removing, tamperingwith, or altering the device will void anywarranties, and is not permitted by theFCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

General notesBlind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor systemtomonitor both the left and right sides of yourvehicle. It supports you from a speed ofapproximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warningdisplay in the exterior mirrors draws yourattention to vehicles detected in the moni-tored area. If you then switch on the corre-sponding turn signal to change lanes, you willalso receive a visual and audible collisionwarning. For this purpose, Blind Spot Assistuses sensors in the rear bumper.

Monitoring range of the sensors

178 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Page 181: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Blind Spot Assistmonitors the area up to 10 ft(3 m) behind your vehicle and directly next toyour vehicle, as shown in the diagram.If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehicle maybe indicated, especially if the vehicles are notdriving in themiddle of their lane. This may bethe case if the vehicles are driving on the innerside of their lane.Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv-ing close to crash barriers or similar solidlane borders.Rthe warning is canceled when driving for anextended period next to long vehicles, suchas trucks.

The two sensors for Blind Spot Assist areintegrated into the sides of the rear bumper.Make sure that the bumper is free of dirt, iceor slush in the vicinity of the sensors. Theradar sensors must not be covered, for exam-ple rear bicycle racks or overhanging loads.Following a severe impact or in the event ofdamage to the bumpers, have the function ofthe radar sensors checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may oth-erwise not work properly.

Indicator and warning display

G WARNINGBlind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles being overtaken at a speed differ-ence of more than 7.5 mph (12 km/h)Rvehicles which approach with a large speeddifferential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not givewarnings in such situations. There is a risk ofan accident.Always observe the traffic conditions care-fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lampWhen Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicatorlamp: in the exterior mirrors lights up yel-low at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). Atspeeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indica-tor lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist isoperational.If a vehicle is detected within the monitoringrange of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp: on thecorresponding side lights up red. Thiswarningoccurs when a vehicle enters the blind spotmonitoring range from behind or from theside. When you overtake a vehicle, the warn-ing only occurs as long as the difference inspeed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reversegear is engaged. In this event, Blind SpotAssist is no longer active.The brightness of the indicator/warninglamps is adjusted automatically according tothe ambient light.

Collision warning

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp

Driving systems 179

Drivingandparking

Z

Page 182: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

If a vehicle is detected in themonitoring rangeof Blind Spot Assist and you switch on thecorresponding turn signal, a double warningtone sounds. Red warning lamp: flashes. Ifthe turn signal remains on, vehicles detectedare indicated by the flashing of red warninglamp:. There are no further warning tones.

Switching on Blind Spot Assist

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lampX Make sure that Blind Spot Assist is activa-ted in the on-board computer(Y page 205).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 133).Warning lamps: in the exterior mirrorslight up red for approximately 1.5 secondsand then turn yellow.

HOLD function

General notesThe HOLD function can assist the driver in thefollowing situations:Rwhen pulling away, especially on steepslopesRwhen maneuvering on steep slopesRwhen waiting in trafficThe vehicle is kept stationary without thedriver having to depress the brake pedal.The braking effect is canceled and the HOLDfunction deactivated when you depress theaccelerator pedal to pull away.

i Do not use the HOLD function when driv-ing off-road, on steep uphill or downhill gra-dients or on slippery or loose surfaces. TheHOLD function cannot hold the vehicle onsuch surfaces.

Activation conditionsYou can activate the HOLD function if:Rthe vehicle is stationary.Rthe engine is running or it has beenswitched off by the ECO start/stop func-tion (AMG vehicles).Rthe engine is running.Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat beltis fastened.Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N.RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.

Activating the HOLD functionThe vehicle's brakes are applied when theHOLD function is activated. For this reason,deactivate the HOLD function while in the carwash or while towing.X Make sure that the activation conditionsare met.

X Depress the brake pedal.X Quickly depress the brake pedal furtheruntilë appears in the multifunction dis-play.The HOLD function is activated. You canrelease the brake pedal.

i If depressing the brake pedal the firsttime does not activate the HOLD function,wait briefly and then try again.

180 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Page 183: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Deactivating the HOLD function

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, it can still roll awaydespite being braked by the HOLD function if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated bypressing the accelerator pedal or the brakepedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnectedThere is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe HOLD function and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

The HOLD function is deactivated automati-cally if:Ryou accelerate and the transmission is inposition D or R.Ryou shift the transmission to position P.Ryou depress the brake pedal again with acertain amount of pressure untilë dis-appears from the multifunction display.Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS.On steep uphill or downhill gradients or ifthere is a malfunction, the transmission mayalso be automatically shifted into position P.

Permanent all-wheel drive! Never tow the vehicle with one axleraised. This may damage the transfer case.Damage of this sort is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Allwheelsmust remain either on the ground orbe fully raised. Observe the instructions fortowing the vehicle with all wheels in fullcontact with the ground.

! When testing the parking brake, operatethe vehicle only briefly (for a maximum of

ten seconds) on a brake test dynamometer.When doing this, turn the SmartKey to posi-tion 0 or 1 in the ignition. Failure to do thiscan cause damage to the drive train or thebrake system.

! A function or performance test shouldonly be carried out on a two-axle dyna-mometer. Before you operate the vehicleon such a dynamometer, please consult aqualified workshop. You could otherwisedamage the drive train or the brake system.

The all-wheel drive system ensures that allfour wheels are permanently driven. The all-wheel drive system improves vehicle tractiontogether with ESP® and 4ETS if a drive wheelspins due to insufficient grip.If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip:ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary when pulling away.RTake your foot off the accelerator, slowly,while the vehicle is in motion.

The permanent all-wheel drive system canneither reduce the risk of accident nor over-ride the laws of physics if you fail to adaptyour driving style or if you are inattentive. Theall-wheel drive system cannot take intoaccount road, weather or traffic conditions.The all-wheel drive system is only an aid. Youare responsible for maintaining a safe dis-tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed,for braking in good time and for staying inlane.Inwintry driving conditions, always usewintertires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snowchains (Y page 309). Only in this way can themaximum effect of all-wheel drive be ach-ieved.For information on driving off-road, see(Y page 158).

Driving systems 181

Drivingandparking

Z

Page 184: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

PARKTRONIC

Important safety notes

! When parking, pay particular attention toobjects above or below the sensors, suchas flower pots or trailer drawbars.PARKTRONIC does not detect such objectswhen they are in the immediate vicinity ofthe vehicle. You could damage the vehicleor the objects.The sensorsmay not detect snow and otherobjects that absorb ultrasonic waves.Ultrasonic sources such as an automaticcar wash, the compressed-air brakes on atruck or a pneumatic drill could causePARKTRONIC to malfunction.PARKTRONICmay not function correctly onuneven terrain.

PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid withultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually andaudibly the distance between your vehicleand an object.PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replace-ment for your attention to your immediatesurroundings. You are always responsible forsafe maneuvering, parking and exiting a park-ing space. Ensure that the areas in front,behind and to the side of the vehicle are safebefore maneuvering, parking or pulling away.There must not be any persons, animals orobjects in the area in which you are maneu-vering.PARKTRONIC does not take into account anypersons or objects located below or abovethe detection range. As a result,PARKTRONIC cannot warn you about objectsin this area.PARKTRONIC is activated automatically whenyou:Rswitch on the ignitionRshift the transmission to position D, R or NRrelease the parking brakePARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lowerspeeds.

PARKTRONIC monitors the area around yourvehicle using six sensors in the front bumperand four sensors in the rear bumper.

Range of the sensors

General notes

: Example: sensors in the front bumper,right-hand side

Side view

Top view

The sensors must be free from dirt, ice orslush. Otherwise, they may not function cor-rectly. Clean the sensors regularly, takingcare not to scratch or damage them(Y page 284).

182 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Page 185: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Front sensors

Center Approx. 40 in (approx.100 cm from the brushguard)

Corners Approx. 24 in (approx.60 cm)

Rear sensors

Center Approx. 36 in (90 cm) fromthe spare wheel

Corners Approx. 32 in (approx.80 cm)

Minimum distance

Center Approx. 8 in (approx.20 cm)

Corners Approx. 8 in (approx.20 cm)

If there is an obstacle within this range, therelevant warning displays light up and a warn-ing tone sounds. If the distance falls belowthe minimum, the distance may no longer beshown.

Warning displays

Warning display for the front area: Segments on the left-hand side of the

vehicle; Segments on the right-hand side of the

vehicle= Segments showing operational readiness

The warning displays show the distancebetween the sensors and the obstacle. Thewarning display for the front area is locatedon the dashboard above the center air vents.The warning display for the rear area is loca-ted on the headliner in the rear compartment.The warning display for each side of the vehi-cle is divided into five yellow and two red seg-ments. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellowsegments showing operational readiness=light up.The selected transmission position and thedirection in which the vehicle is rolling deter-minewhichwarning display is activewhen theengine is running.

Transmissionposition

Warning display

D Front area activated

R, N or the vehicleis rolling back-wards

Rear and front areasactivated

P No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicleapproaches an obstacle, depending on thevehicle's distance from the obstacle.From the:Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear anintermittent warning tone for approx-imately two seconds.Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear awarning tone for approximately two sec-onds. This indicates that you have nowreached the minimum distance.

Driving systems 183

Drivingandparking

Z

Page 186: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

: Indicator lamp; To deactivate/activate PARKTRONICIf indicator lamp: lights up, PARKTRONIC isdeactivated.

i PARKTRONIC is automatically activatedwhen you turn the SmartKey to position2 inthe ignition lock.

Towing a trailerPARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear areawhen you establish an electrical connectionbetween your vehicle and a trailer.

184 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Page 187: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Problems with PARKTRONIC

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.You also hear a warningtone for approximatelytwo seconds.PARKTRONIC is deacti-vated after a few sec-onds, and the indicatorlamp in thePARKTRONIC buttonlights up.

PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.PARKTRONIC is deacti-vated after a few sec-onds.

The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 284).X Switch the ignition back on.

The problem may be caused by an external source of radio orultrasound waves.X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Rear view camera

Important safety notesThe rear view camera is only an aid. It is not areplacement for your attention to your imme-diate surroundings. You are always responsi-ble for safe maneuvering and parking. Whenmaneuvering or parking,make sure that thereare no persons, animals or objects in the areain which you are maneuvering.Under the following circumstances, the rearview camera will not function, or will functionin a limited manner:Rthe rear door is openRin heavy rain, snow or fogRat night or in very dark placesRif the camera is exposed to very bright lightRif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LEDlighting (the display may flicker)

Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,e.g. when driving into a heated garage inwinterRif the camera lens is dirty or obstructedRif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In thisevent, have the camera position and settingchecked at a qualified specialist workshopMercedes-Benz recommends that you usean authorized Mercedes-Benz Center forthis purpose

Driving systems 185

Drivingandparking

Z

Page 188: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Activating/deactivating the rear viewcamera

: Rear view camera

X To activate:make sure that the SmartKeyis in position 2 in the ignition lock.

X Make sure that the rear view camera func-tion is selected in COMAND (see the sepa-rate operating instructions for COMAND).

X Engage reverse gear.The area behind the vehicle is shown in theCOMAND display.

To deactivate: the rear view camera is deac-tivated if you:Rshift the transmission to position PRdrive forward ten metersRshift the transmission from R to anotherposition after 15 secondsRdrive forwards at a speed of over 5 mph(10 km/h)

Off-road driving systems

Transfer case

General notesThe vehicle has permanent all-wheel drive.Power is always transmitted to both axles.For further information on driving off-road,see (Y page 158).

Shift ranges

G WARNINGIf you do not wait for the transfer case gearchange process to complete, the transfercase could remain in the neutral position. Thepower transmission to the driven wheels isthen interrupted. There is a danger of thevehicle rolling away unintentionally. There is arisk of an accident.Wait until the transfer case shift process iscompleted.

Do not switch off the engine while changinggear and do not shift the automatic transmis-sion to another gear.

HIGHRANGE

Position for all normal on-road driving conditions

LOWRANGE

Low-range position for driv-ing off-road.Also for use on steep uphillor downhill gradients, espe-cially when towing a trailer.The vehicle travels aroundhalf the speed of on-roaddriving rangeHIGHRANGE.The tractive power is corre-spondingly higher.

Shifts the transfer case

Important safety notesG WARNINGWhen the transfer case is in the neutral posi-tion, power transmission to the driven wheels

186 Off-road driving systemsDrivingandparking

Page 189: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

is interrupted. As a result, the vehicle couldroll away. There is a risk of an accident.Secure the vehiclewith the parking brake, andon uphill or downhill gradients, also secure itwith a device such as a wheel chock.

Always wait for the gear change process fromHIGH RANGE to LOW RANGE and fromLOW RANGE to HIGH RANGE to complete.Do not switch off the engine while changinggear and do not shift the automatic transmis-sion to another gear.

General notes

: Current shift range

: Indicator lamp; LOW RANGE button

Switching on the off-road gear ratio! Only carry out the gear selection if:Rthe engine is running.Rthe vehicle is rolling.Rthe automatic transmission is in selectorlever position N.Ryou are driving no faster than 25 mph(40 km/h).

You could otherwise damage the transfercase.

i AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop func-tion is not available in transfer case posi-tion LOW RANGE (Y page 136).

X Press LOW RANGE button;.When the shift procedure is complete, theLOW RANGELOW RANGE transfer case position appearsin the multifunction display.Indicator lamp: lights up.

X Shift the transmission to position D.

Switching off the off-road gear ratioG WARNINGWhen the transfer case is in the neutral posi-tion, power transmission to the driven wheelsis interrupted. As a result, the vehicle couldroll away. There is a risk of an accident.Secure the vehiclewith the parking brake, andon uphill or downhill gradients, also secure itwith a device such as a wheel chock.

! Only carry out the gear selection if:Rthe engine is running.Rthe vehicle is rolling.Rthe automatic transmission is in selectorlever position N.Ryou are driving no faster than 43 mph(70 km/h).

You could otherwise damage the transfercase.

X Press button;.When the shift procedure is complete, theHIGHHIGH RANGERANGE transfer case position appearsin the multifunction display.

Off-road driving systems 187

Drivingandparking

Z

Page 190: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Indicator lamp: goes out.If the gear change is not completed, the fol-lowing messages could appear in the display:RTC Shift Conditions Not FulfilledTC Shift Conditions Not FulfilledYou have not met one or more shift condi-tions.RTC NEUTRAL OnTC NEUTRAL OnThe transfer case has canceled the gearchange process and is in N. Transfer caseposition NN appears in the multifunction dis-play.RTC Shift CanceledTC Shift CanceledThe transfer case has not performed thegear change process.

X Carry out the gear change process again.Make sure tomeet all conditions for chang-ing gears.RTC Malfunction Visit WorkshopTC Malfunction Visit WorkshopThere is a malfunction in the transfer case.

X Do not shift the transfer case.X Have the vehicle checked as soon as pos-sible at a qualified specialist workshop.

Shifting to neutralG WARNINGWhen the transfer case is in the neutral posi-tion, power transmission to the driven wheelsis interrupted. As a result, the vehicle couldroll away. There is a risk of an accident.Secure the vehiclewith the parking brake, andon uphill or downhill gradients, also secure itwith a device such as a wheel chock.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 133).

X Apply the parking brake.X Depress the brake pedal.

X Move the selector lever to position N(Y page 139).

X Press and hold LOW RANGE button; forapproximately 10 seconds.When the shift procedure is complete, theTC NEUTRALTC NEUTRAL message appears in the mul-tifunction display for 5 seconds.

If the gear change is not completed, the fol-lowing messages could appear in the display(Y page 225).

i If the transfer case is in neutral, theSmartKey is in the ignition lock and youopen the driver's door, the TCTC InIn NeutralNeutralmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play. If you then release the parking brake,a warning tone will sound.

Differential locks

General notes

G WARNINGWhen the differential locks are engaged, ABS,4ETS, ESP® and BAS are deactivated. As aresult, the wheels could lock when brakingand the braking distance is increased. There isa risk of an accident.Disengage the differential locks immediatelyon firm surfaces with good grip.

! In order to avoid damage to the transfercase, you must operate the vehicle on adynamometer (1-axle dynamometer) onlyif:Rthe axle not driven on is jacked uporRthe corresponding propeller shaft is dis-connected and the transfer case differ-ential lock is engaged.

Otherwise, the transfer case can be dam-aged.Differential locks improve the traction of thevehicle.

188 Off-road driving systemsDrivingandparking

Page 191: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Your vehicle is equipped with a differentiallock each for:Rthe transfer case: this controls the balancebetween the front and rear axles.Rthe rear axle: this controls the balancebetween the wheels on the rear axle.Rthe front axle: this controls the balancebetween the wheels on the front axle.

Information on differential gear systemand differential lockWhen the vehicle drives around a curve, thewheels on the outside of the curvemust covera greater distance. Therefore, the wheels turnmore rapidly than on the inside. The differen-tial, a gear system in the drive train, allows fordiffering rotational speeds and facilitates cor-nering.The disadvantage of a differential is that thewheels that have the least grip, get the mostdrive. An example: a wheel of a driven axle ison a snow-covered surface and thereforedoes not have any traction. The differentialsends most of the drive force to this wheelbecause the force takes the route of the low-est resistance. The opposite wheel on thisaxle, however, which stands on firm groundand could therefore allow propulsion,receives no driving power. 4ETS compen-sates for this disadvantage. 4ETS providesgood steerability by automatically braking thespinning wheel. 4ETS provides the wheel onthe firm surface with more drive force, whichin turn provides propulsion.ESP® and 4ETS are traction systems that areideal for road driving and suitable for light off-road driving. The LOW RANGE off-road gearalso improves off-road capability.More challenging off-road conditions requireadditional measures such as locking one ormore differential. Your vehicle is equippedwith three differential locks:

Ra central differential lock for the transfercaseRa differential lock for the front axle andRa differential lock for the rear axleEach differential lock can be engagedwith thecorresponding switch on the center console.If the differential in the transfer case islocked, the front and rear wheels rotate at thesame speed. If the differential for the rear axleis locked, both rear wheels rotate at the samespeed, regardless of their respective torque.Note, engaging the differential lock greatlyimpairs the vehicle's steerability.Note, it is imperative to use the differentialfunction when driving on firm road surfaces.Under no circumstances should the differen-tial be locked when driving on firm road sur-faces. Otherwise, the vehicle may not besteerable and you could lose control of thevehicle. Therefore, only engage the differen-tial lock when driving off-road. You shouldonly engage the differential lock if activating4ETS and ESP® driving systems and LOWRANGE off-road gear prove to be insufficient.

Engaging the differential locks

Important safety notesG WARNINGWhen differential locks are engaged on a firm,high-grip surface, the vehicle's steerability isgreatly impaired. In particular, engaging thedifferential locks when cornering could leadto you losing control of the vehicle. There is arisk of an accident.Disengage the differential locks immediatelyon firm surfaces with good grip.

G WARNINGWhen the differential locks are engaged, ABS,4ETS, ESP® and BAS are deactivated. As aresult, the wheels could lock when brakingand the braking distance is increased. There isa risk of an accident.Disengage the differential locks immediatelyon firm surfaces with good grip.

Off-road driving systems 189

Drivingandparking

Z

Page 192: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

! Only engage the differential locks when:Ryou are driving at walking pace.Rthe driven wheels are not spinning.Ryou are not driving on a firm road surface.

General notesThe switches are located on the center con-sole.

: Function indicator lamps (red); Differential lock for the front axle= Differential lock for the transfer case? Differential lock for the rear axleA Activation indicator lamps (yellow)Engage the differential locks:Roff-roadRto deactivate ABS, 4ETS, ESP® and BASwhile off-roadRwhen fordingFor further information on driving off-road,see (Y page 158).

i You can engage the differential locks inthe following order:=,?,;.

Differential lock for the transfer caseX To engage: switch the transfer case to theLOW RANGE off-road driving position(Y page 186).

X Press switch=.If the transfer case is in the LOW RANGEoff-road position, the yellow activation indi-cator lamp under switch= lights up.

The å warning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up.If the differential is locked, the red functionindicator lamp above switch= lights up.In the multifunction display you see the:ABS not available DifferentialABS not available DifferentialLockedLocked message.The å!÷ warning lamps light upin the instrument cluster.The differential lock for the transfer case isengaged.4ETS, ESP®, BAS and ABS are deactivated.

The vehicle's ability to steer is severelyrestricted. Drive carefully and accelerate gen-tly for optimum traction.

i You can now engage the differential lockfor rear axle? and the differential lock forfront axle; as required.

Differential lock for the rear axleX To engage: press switch?.Yellow activation indicator lampA lightsup first, followed by red function indicatorlamp: of switch?.The differential lock for the rear axle isengaged.

Differential lock for the front axleX To engage: press switch;.First, the yellow activation indicator lamplights up, followed by the red function indi-cator lamp.The differential lock for the front axle isengaged.

Disengaging the differential locksYou can disengage the differential locks in thefollowing order:;,?,=.X To simultaneously disengage all differ-ential locks: press switch=.Yellow activation indicator lampsA andred function indicator lamps: go out.

190 Off-road driving systemsDrivingandparking

Page 193: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

After approximately three seconds of nor-mal driving, ABS, 4ETS, ESP® and BAS areactivated.The ABSABS notnot availableavailable DifferentialDifferentialLockedLocked message disappears in the multi-function display and the å, ! and÷ warning lamps in the instrument clus-ter go out.

X Shift the transfer case to theHIGH RANGEon-road position (Y page 186).

i If red function indicator lamps: do notgo out when disengaging the differentiallocks, stop the vehicle safely as soon aspossible, in accordancewith the traffic con-ditions. Then, continue driving and the loadchange can release the differential lock.

Towing a trailer

Notes on towing a trailer

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you rest your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving, the braking system can overheat. Thisincreases the stopping distance and can evencause the braking system to fail. There is arisk of an accident.Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Neverdepress the brake pedal and the acceleratorpedal at the same time.

G WARNINGWhen the vehicle/trailer combination beginsto lurch, you could lose control of it. The vehi-cle/trailer combination could even rollover.There is a risk of an accident.On no account should you attempt tostraighten up the vehicle/trailer combinationby increasing the speed. Reduce vehiclespeed and do not countersteer. Apply thebrake as necessary.

G WARNINGIf you install a ball coupling other than the onedeliveredwith the vehicle, the trailer tow hitchand the rear axle may be overloaded. Thisapplies especially if the ball coupling in ques-tion is longer or angled differently. This couldseriously impair the driving characteristicsand the trailer can come loose. There is a riskof an accident.Only install the ball coupling delivered withthe vehicle or a ball coupling that is designedto meet your trailer towing requirements. Donot modify the ball coupling or the trailer towhitch.

G WARNINGIf the ball coupling is not installed correctly ornot secured with the bolt provided and thecorresponding spring cotter, the trailer maycome loose. There is a risk of an accident.Always install and secure the ball coupling asdescribed. Before every journey, ensure thatthe ball coupling is secured with the bolt andthe corresponding spring cotter.

Please observe the manufacturer's operatinginstructions for the trailer coupling if adetachable trailer coupling is used.You will find the applicable permissible val-ues, which must not be exceeded, in the vehi-cle documents.You will find the values approved by the man-ufacturer on the vehicle identification platesand those for the towing vehicle in the "Tech-nical data" section (Y page 346).Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. Ifyou do not couple the trailer to the towingvehicle correctly, the trailer could becomedetached.Make sure that the following values are notexceeded:Rthe permissible trailer drawbar noseweightRthe permissible trailer load

Towing a trailer 191

Drivingandparking

Z

Page 194: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Rthe permissible rear axle load of the towingvehicleRthe maximum permissible gross vehicleweight of both the towing vehicle and thetrailer

When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handlingcharacteristics will be different in comparisonwith when driving without a trailer.The vehicle/trailer combination:Ris heavierRis restricted in its acceleration and gradi-ent-climbing capabilityRhas an increased braking distanceRis affected more by strong crosswindsRdemands more sensitive steeringRhas a larger turning radiusThis could impair the handling characteris-tics.When towing a trailer, always adjust yourspeed to the current road and weather con-ditions. Do not exceed the maximum permis-sible speed for your vehicle/trailer combina-tion.

General notesRDo not exceed the legally prescribed max-imum speed for vehicle/trailer combina-tions in the relevant country.This lowers the risk of an accident.ROnly install an approved trailer coupling onyour vehicle.Further information on availability and oninstallation is available from any authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.RThe bumpers of your vehicle are not suita-ble for installing detachable trailer cou-plings.RDo not install hired trailer couplings orother detachable trailer couplings on thebumpers of your vehicle.RIf you do not need the ball coupling, removethe ball coupling from the ball couplingrecess. This reduces the risk of damage tothe ball coupling.

i When towing a trailer, set the tire pres-sure on the rear axle of the towing vehiclefor a maximum load; see the tire pressuretable in the fuel filler flap (Y page 310).

Youwill find installation dimensions and loadsunder "Technical data" (Y page 346).The maximum noseweight of the trailer draw-bar on the ball coupling for up to 3 people is562 lbs (255 kg). The maximum noseweightof the trailer drawbar for more than 3 peopleand the maximum load for the trunk can befound in the noseweight table (Y page 347).However, the actual noseweight must notexceed the value given on the trailer tow hitchor trailer identification plates. The lowestweight applies.Please note that when towing a trailer,PARKTRONIC (Y page 182) and Blind SpotAssist (Y page 178) are only available withlimitations, or not at all.

i On vehicles without level control, theheight of the ball coupling will alter accord-ing to the load placed on the vehicle. If nec-essary, use a trailer with a height-adjusta-ble drawbar.

Driving tipsX On long and steep downhill gradients,select shift range 1, 2 or 3 (Y page 145) ingood time.i This also applies if you have activatedcruise control or SPEEDTRONIC.

X If necessary, shift the transfer case to LOWRANGE (Y page 186).This will use the braking effect of theengine, so that less braking will be requiredto maintain the speed. This relieves theload on the brake system and prevents thebrakes from overheating and wearing tooquickly. If you need additional braking,depress the brake pedal repeatedly ratherthan continuously.

The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/trailer combinations depends on the type oftrailer. Before beginning the journey, check

192 Towing a trailerDrivingandparking

Page 195: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

the trailer's documents to see what the max-imum permissible speed is. Observe thelegally prescribed maximum speed in the rel-evant country.For certainMercedes-Benz vehicles, themax-imum permissible rear axle load is increasedwhen towing a trailer. Refer to the "Technicaldata" section to find out whether this appliesto your vehicle. If you utilize any of the addedmaximum rear axle loadwhen towing a trailer,the vehicle/trailer combination may notexceed a maximum speed of 60 mph(100 km/h) for reasons concerning the oper-ating permit. This also applies in countries inwhich the permissible maximum speed forvehicle/trailer combinations is above 60mph(100 km/h).When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handlingcharacteristics will be different in comparisonto when driving without a trailer and it willconsume more fuel.On long and steep downhill gradients, youmust select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time.

i This also applies if you have activatedcruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS.

This will use the braking effect of the engine,so that less braking will be required to main-tain the speed. This relieves the load on thebrake system and prevents the brakes fromoverheating and wearing too quickly. If youneed additional braking, depress the brakepedal repeatedly rather than continuously.

Driving tipsIf the trailer swings from side to side:X Do not accelerate.X Do not counter-steer.X Brake if necessary.

RMaintain a greater distance from the vehi-cle in front than when driving without atrailer.RAvoid braking abruptly. If possible, brakegently at first to allow the trailer to run on.Then, increase the braking force rapidly.RThe values given for gradient-climbingcapabilities from a standstill refer to sealevel. When driving in mountainous areas,note that the power output of the engine,and consequently the vehicle's gradient-climbing capability, decrease with increas-ing altitude.

Trailer power supply! You can connect accessories with a max-imum power consumption of 180 W to thepermanent power supply.You must not charge a trailer battery usingthe power supply.

The trailer socket of your vehicle is equippedat the factorywith a permanent power supply.The permanent power supply is supplied viatrailer socket pin 9.A qualified specialist workshop can providemore information about installing the trailerelectrics.

Trailer with 7-pin connector

General notesYou can make a connection to the 13-pinsocket on the ball coupling using an adapteror, if necessary, an adapter cable. Both can beobtained in a qualified specialist workshop.

Installing the adapter

! Make sure that there is enough slack inthe cable for cornering so that the cablecannot become detached.

Towing a trailer 193

Drivingandparking

Z

Page 196: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

X Open the socket cover.X Insert the connector with lug: intogroove; on the socket and turn the con-nector clockwise to the stop.

X Make the cover engage.X If you are using an adapter cable, securethe cable to the trailer with cable ties.

i When the socket is connected, the ultra-sonic backing up aid is deactivated.

194 Towing a trailerDrivingandparking

Page 197: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Useful information ............................ 196Important safety notes .................... 196Displays and operation .................... 197Menus and submenus ...................... 200Display messages ............................. 211Warning and indicator lamps in theinstrument cluster ............................ 234

195

On-board

computerand

displays

Page 198: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops: (Y page 24).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNINGIf the instrument cluster has failed or mal-functioned, you may not recognize functionrestrictions in systems relevant to safety. Theoperating safety of your vehicle may beimpaired. There is a risk of an accident.Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checkedat a qualified specialist workshop immedi-ately.

The on-board computer only showsmessagesor warnings from certain systems in the mul-tifunction display. You should therefore makesure your vehicle is operating safely at alltimes. Otherwise, a vehicle that is not oper-ating safely may cause an accident.

You must observe the legal requirements forthe country in which you are currently drivingwhen operating the on-board computer.For an illustration of the instrument cluster,see (Y page 197).

196 Important safety notesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Page 199: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Displays and operation

Instrument cluster

Instrument cluster: miles: Speedometer with segments (Y page 198); Multifunction display (Y page 199)= Tachometer (Y page 198)? Coolant temperature (Y page 197)A Fuel gageB Instrument cluster lighting (Y page 197)

Instrument cluster lightingThe brightness control knob is located on thebottom left of the instrument cluster(Y page 197).X Turn the brightness control knob clockwiseor counter-clockwise.If the light switch is set toÃ, T orL, the brightness is dependent uponthe brightness of the ambient light.

i The light sensor in the instrument clusterautomatically controls the brightness ofthe multifunction display.In daylight, the displays in the instrumentcluster are not illuminated.

Displaying the coolant temperature

G WARNINGDriving when your engine is overheated cancause some fluids whichmay have leaked intothe engine compartment to catch fire. Youcould be seriously burned.Steam from an overheated engine can causeserious burnswhich can occur just by openingthe engine hood. Stay away from the engine ifyou see or hear steam coming from it.Stop the vehicle in a safe location away fromother traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of thevehicle and do not stand near the vehicle untilthe engine has cooled down.

! A display message is shown if the coolanttemperature is too high.

Displays and operation 197

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Page 200: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

If the coolant temperature is over 248 ‡(120 †), do not continue driving. Theengine will otherwise be damaged.

The coolant temperature gage is in the instru-ment cluster on the right-hand side(Y page 197).Under normal operating conditions and withthe specified coolant level, the coolant tem-perature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

Tachometer! Do not drive in the overrevving range, asthis could damage the engine.

The red band in the tachometer indicates theengine's overrevving range.The fuel supply is interrupted to protect theengine when the red band is reached.

Outside temperature displayYou should pay special attention to road con-ditions when temperatures are around freez-ing point.Bear in mind that the outside temperaturedisplay indicates the temperature measuredand does not record the road temperature.The outside temperature display is in themul-tifunction display (Y page 199).Changes in the outside temperature are dis-played after a short delay.

Speedometer with segmentsThe segments in the speedometer indicatewhich speed range is available.RCruise control activated (Y page 162):The segments light up from the storedspeed to the maximum speed.RVariable SPEEDTRONIC activated(Y page 166):The segments light up from the start of thescale to the selected limit speed.RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 171):

One or two segments in the set speedrange light up.RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front:The segments between the speed of thevehicle in front and the stored speed lightup.

Operating the on-board computer

Overview

: Multifunction display; Switches on the Voice Control System;

see the separate operating instructions= Right control panel? Left control panelA Back buttonX To activate the on-board computer: turnthe SmartKey to position 1 (Y page 133) inthe ignition lock.

You can control the multifunction display andthe settings in the on-board computer usingthe buttons on the multifunction steeringwheel.

198 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

Page 201: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Left control panel

=

;

RCalls up the menu and menu bar

9

:

Press briefly:RScrolls in listsRSelects a submenu or functionRIn the AudioAudio menu: selects astored station, an audio track ora video sceneRIn the TelTel (telephone) menu:switches to the phone book andselects a name or telephonenumber

9

:

Press and hold:RIn the AudioAudio menu: selects theprevious/next station or selectsan audio track or a video sceneusing rapid scrollingRIn the TelTel (telephone) menu:starts rapid scrolling if the phonebook is open

a RConfirms a selection/displaymessageRIn the TelTel (telephone) menu:switches to the telephone bookand starts dialing the selectednumberRIn the AudioAudio menu: stops thestation search function at thedesired station

Right control panel

~ RRejects or ends a callRExits phone book/redial mem-ory

6 RMakes or accepts a callRSwitches to the redial memory

WX

RAdjusts the volume

8 RMute

Back button

% Press briefly:RBackRSwitches off the Voice ControlSystem; see the separate oper-ating instructionsRHides display messages/callsup the last TripTrip menu functionusedRExits the telephone book/redialmemory

% Press and hold:RCalls up the standard display inthe TripTrip menu

Multifunction display

: Transmission position (Y page 142); Drive program (Y page 143)= Text field? Menu barA Outside temperature or speed

(Y page 207)

Displays and operation 199

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Page 202: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

B TimeC Transfer case position (Y page 186)X To show menu bar?: press the=or; button on the steering wheel.

Menu bar? disappears after a few seconds.Text field= shows the selected menu orsubmenu as well as display messages.For further information on displaying thetransmission position, see (Y page 140).

i You can set the time using COMAND; seethe separate operating instructions.

The following messages may appear in themultifunction display:Z Gearshift recommendation (AMG

vehicles) (Y page 145)¯ Cruise control (Y page 162)LIMLIM SPEEDTRONIC (Y page 166)¤ ECO start/stop function (AMG vehi-

cles) (Y page 135)LOWLOWRANGERANGE

LOW RANGE off-road gear(Y page 186)

ë HOLD function (Y page 180)

Menus and submenus

Menu overviewPress the= or; button on the steer-ing wheel to call up the menu bar and select amenu.Operating the on-board computer(Y page 198).Depending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you can call up the following menus:RTripTrip menu (Y page 200)RNaviNavi menu (navigation instructions)(Y page 201)RAudioAudio menu (Y page 203)RTelTel menu (telephone) (Y page 204)RDriveAssistDriveAssist menu (assistance)(Y page 205)RServServ menu (Y page 206)

RSettSett menu (settings) (Y page 206)RAMGAMG menu in AMG vehicles (Y page 209)

Trip menu

Standard display

X Press and hold the% button on thesteering wheel until the TripTrip menu withtrip odometer: and odometer; isshown.

Trip computer "From start" or "Fromreset"

Example: trip computer "From Start": Distance; Time= Average speed? Average fuel consumptionX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press9 or: to select From StartFrom Startor From ResetFrom Reset.

The values in the From StartFrom Start submenu arecalculated from the start of a journey whilstthe values in the From ResetFrom Reset submenu arecalculated from the last time the submenuwas reset (Y page 201).The From StartFrom Start trip computer is automati-cally reset when:

200 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

Page 203: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Rthe ignition has been switched off for morethan four hours.R999 hours have been exceeded.R9,999 miles have been exceeded.The From ResetFrom Reset trip computer is automati-cally reset if the value exceeds 9999 hours or99,999 miles.

Range

: Approximate rangeX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press9 or: to select the approxi-mate range.

The approximate range that can be covereddepends on the fuel level and your currentdriving style. If there is only a small amount offuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows avehicle being refueledC instead of therange.

Digital speedometer

: Digital speedometerX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedigital speedometer.

Resetting values

Example: resetting the trip computer "From Start"X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select thefunction that you wish to reset.

X Press thea button.X Press the: button to select YesYes andpress thea button to confirm.

You can reset the values of the following func-tions:RTrip odometerR"From Start" trip computerR"From Reset" trip computer

Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructionsIn the NaviNavi menu, the multifunction displayshows navigation instructions.For more information, see the separate oper-ating instructions.X Switch on COMAND (see the separateoperating instructions).

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the NaviNavi menu.

Menus and submenus 201

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Page 204: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Route guidance not active

: Direction of travel; Current road

Route guidance active

No change of direction announced

: Distance to the destination; Distance to the next change of direction= Current road? "Follow the road's course" symbol

Change of direction announced without alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Change-of-direction symbolWhen a change of direction is announced, youwill see symbol= for the change of directionand distance graphic;. The distance indi-cator shortens towards the top of the displayas you approach the point of the announcedchange of direction.

Change of direction announced with alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Lane recommendation? New lane during a change of directionA Uninterrupted laneB Change-of-direction symbolOn multilane roads, the system can displaylane recommendation= for the next changeof direction. During the change of direction,additional lanes may be displayed.Lane recommendations are only displayed ifthe relevant data is available on the digitalmap.

Other status indicators of the naviga-tion systemRO: you have reached the destination or anintermediate destination.RNew Route...New Route... or Calculating RouteCalculating Route:calculating a new routeROff MapOff Map or OffOff MappedMapped RoadRoad: the vehicleposition is outside the area of the digitalmap (off-map position)RNo RouteNo Route: no route could be calculated tothe selected destination

202 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Page 205: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Audio menu

Selecting a radio station

: Waveband; Station frequency with memory position

i Station; is displayed with the stationfrequency or station name. The memoryposition is only displayed along with sta-tion; if this has been stored.

X Switch on COMAND and select Radio; seethe separate operating instructions.

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the AudioAudio menu.

X To select a stored station: briefly pressthe9 or: button.

X To select a station from the station list:press and briefly hold the9 or:button.

If no station list is received:X To select a station using the stationsearch: press and briefly hold the9or: button.

i For information on switching wavebandand storing stations; see the separate oper-ating instructions.

i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like anormal radio.For more information on satellite radiooperation, see the separate operatinginstructions.

Operating audio devices or media

Example: CD/DVD changer display: Current CD in the CD/DVD changer; Current titleAudio data from various audio devices ormedia can be played, depending on the equip-ment installed in the vehicle.X Switch on COMAND and select the audioplayer or medium (see the separate oper-ating instructions).

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the AudioAudio menu.

X To select the next/previous track:briefly press the9 or: button.

X To select a track from the track list(rapid scrolling): press and hold the9or: button until desired track; hasbeen reached.If you press and hold9 or:, therapid scrolling speed is increased. Not allaudio drives or data carriers support thisfunction.

If track information is stored on the audiodevice or medium, the multifunction displaywill show the number and title of the track.

Video DVD operation

Example: CD/DVD changer display: Current DVD in the CD/DVD changer; Current scene

Menus and submenus 203

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Page 206: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

X Switch on COMAND and select video DVD;see the separate operating instructions.

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the AudioAudio menu.

X To select the next/previous scene:briefly press the9 or: button.

X To select a scene from the scene list(rapid scrolling): press and hold the9or: button until desired scene; hasbeen reached.

Telephone menu

Introduction

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

When telephoning, you must observe thelegal requirements for the country in whichyou are currently driving.X Switch on the mobile phone (see the sep-arate operating instructions).

X Switch on COMAND (see the separateoperating instructions).

X Establish a Bluetooth® connection toCOMAND; see the separate operatinginstructions.

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TelTel menu.

You will see one of the following display mes-sages in the multifunction display:RPhone READYPhone READY or the name of the networkprovider: the mobile phone has found anetwork and is ready to receive.RPhone No ServicePhone No Service: there is no networkavailable or the mobile phone is searchingfor a network.

Accepting a call

Example: incoming call

If someone calls you when you are in the TelTelmenu, a display message appears in the mul-tifunction display.X Press the6 button on the steeringwheel to accept an incoming call.

You can accept a call even if you are not in theTelTel menu.Rejecting or ending a callX Press the~ button on the steeringwheel.

You can end or reject a call even if you are notin the TelTel menu.Dialing a number from the phone bookX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TelTel menu.

X Press the9,: ora button toswitch to the phone book.

204 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Page 207: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

X Press the9 or: button to select thedesired name.

orX To begin rapid scrolling: press and holdthe9 or: button for longer thanone second.Rapid scrolling stops when you release thebutton or reach the end of the list.

X If only one telephone number is storedfor a name: press the6 ora buttonto start dialing.

orX If there is more than one number for aparticular name: press the6 orabutton to display the numbers.

X Press the9 or: button to select thenumber you want to dial.

X Press the6 ora button to start dial-ing.

orX To exit the telephone book: press the~ or% button.

RedialingThe on-board computer saves the last namesor numbers dialed in the redial memory.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TelTel menu.

X Press the6 button to switch to theredial memory.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedesired name or number.

X Press the6 ora button to start dial-ing.

orX To exit the redial memory: press the~ or% button.

Assistance menu

Introduction

In the DriveAssistDriveAssist menu, you have the fol-lowing options:RShowing the distance display(Y page 205)RActivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist(Y page 205)

Showing the distance displayX Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the DriveAssistDriveAssist menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectDistance DisplayDistance Display.

X Press thea button.The DISTRONIC PLUS distance displayappears in the multifunction display(Y page 174).

Activating/deactivating Blind SpotAssistX Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the DriveAssistDriveAssist menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectBlind Spot AsstBlind Spot Asst.

X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.

For further information about Blind SpotAssist, see (Y page 178).

Menus and submenus 205

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Page 208: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Maintenance menu

Example: service menu

In the ServiceService menu, you have the followingoptions:RCalling up display messages(Y page 212)RChecking the tire pressure electronically(Y page 314)RCalling up the service due date(Y page 280)

Settings menu

Introduction

Example: settings menu

In the Sett.Sett. menu, you have the followingoptions:RChanging the instrument cluster settings(Y page 206)RChanging the light settings (Y page 207)RChanging the vehicle settings(Y page 208)RChanging the convenience settings(Y page 208)RRestoring the factory settings(Y page 209)

Instrument cluster

Selecting the unit ofmeasurement for dis-tanceThe Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:function allows you to choose whether cer-tain displays appear in kilometers or miles inthe multifunction display.You can determine whether the multifunctiondisplay shows some messages in miles orkilometers.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theInst. ClusterInst. Cluster submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theDisplay Unit Speed-/Odometer:Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: func-tion.You will see the selected setting: kmkm ormilesmiles.

X Press thea button to save the setting.The selected unit of measurement for dis-tance applies to:RVehicleswith instrument cluster in kilo-meters: digital speedometer in the TripTripmenuRthe odometer and the trip odometerRthe trip computerRthe current consumption and the rangeRthe navigation instructions in the NaviNavimenuRcruise controlRSPEEDTRONICRDISTRONIC PLUSRthe service interval display

206 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

Page 209: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Selecting the permanent display functionYou can determine whether the multifunctiondisplay permanently shows your speed or theoutside temperature.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theInstr. ClusterInstr. Cluster submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select thePermanent Display:Permanent Display: function.You will see the selected setting: OutsideOutsideTemperatureTemperature or Speedometer [mph]Speedometer [mph].

X Press thea button to save the setting.

i Speed is displayed in mph.

Lights

Setting the daytime running lampsi This function is not available in Canada.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightsLights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select the DaytimeDaytimeRunning LightsRunning Lights function.If the Daytime Running LightsDaytime Running Lights havebeen switched on, the cone of light and theW symbol in the multifunction displayare shown in red.

X Press thea button to save the setting.Further information on daytime runninglamps (Y page 99).

Surround lighting and exterior lightingdelayed switch-offX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightsLights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.

X Press: or9 to select the Sur‐Sur‐round Lightinground Lighting function.When the Surround LightingSurround Lighting function isactivated, the cone of light in the multi-function display is shown in red.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Deactivating delayed switch-off of the exte-rior lighting temporarily:X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the Smart-Key to position0(Ypage133) in the ignitionlock.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 133).The exterior lighting delayed switch-off isdeactivated.

Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting isreactivated the next time you start theengine.If you have activated the Surround Light‐Surround Light‐inging function and the light switch is set toÃ, the following functions are activatedwhen it is dark:RSurround lighting: the exterior lightingremains lit for 40 seconds after unlockingwith the SmartKey. If you start the engine,the surround lighting is switched off andautomatic headlamp mode is activated(Y page 100).RExterior lighting delayed switch-off: theexterior lighting remains lit for 60 secondsafter the engine is switched off. If you closeall the doors and the trunk lid, the exteriorlighting goes off after 15 seconds.

i Depending on your vehicle's equipment,when the surround lighting and delayedswitch-off exterior lighting are on, the fol-lowing light up:RParking lampsRFront fog lampsRLow-beam headlampsRDaytime running lampsRSide marker lampsRSurround lighting in the exterior mirrors

Menus and submenus 207

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Page 210: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Activating/deactivating the interior light-ing delayed switch-offIf you activate the Interior LightingInterior LightingDelayDelay function, the interior lighting remainson for 20 seconds after you remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightsLights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select the Inte‐Inte‐rior Lighting Delayrior Lighting Delay function.When the Interior Lighting DelayInterior Lighting Delayfunction is activated, the vehicle interior isdisplayed in red in the multifunction dis-play.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Vehicle

Activating/deactivating the automaticdoor locking mechanismIf you activate the Automatic Door LockAutomatic Door Lockfunction, the vehicle is centrally locked abovea speed of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h).X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theVehicleVehicle submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAutomatic Door LockAutomatic Door Lock function.When the AutomaticAutomatic DoorDoor LockLock functionis activated, the vehicle doors are displayedin red in the multifunction display.

X Press thea button to save the setting.For further information on the automatic lock-ing feature, see (Y page 75).

Activating/deactivating the acousticlocking verification signalIf you switch on the AcousticAcoustic LockLock function,an acoustic signal sounds when you lock thevehicle.

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press: or9 to select the VehicleVehiclesubmenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAcoustic LockAcoustic Lock function.If the AcousticAcoustic LockLock function is activated,the& symbol in the multifunction dis-play lights up red.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Convenience

Activating/deactivating the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT featureG WARNINGWhen the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjuststhe steering wheel, you and other vehicleoccupants – particularly children – couldbecome trapped. There is a risk of injury.While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-ing adjustments, make sure that no one hasany body parts in the sweep of the steeringwheel.If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress one of the memory function positionbuttons, orRmove the switch for steering wheel adjust-ment in the opposite direction to that inwhich the steering wheel is moving.

The adjustment process is stopped.

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theConvenienceConvenience submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theEasy Entry/ExitEasy Entry/Exit function.If the Easy Entry/ExitEasy Entry/Exit function is activa-ted, the vehicle steering wheel appears inred in the multifunction display.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

208 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

Page 211: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature (Y page 92).

Switching the fold-in mirrors when lock-ing feature on/offWhen you activate the Auto.Auto. MirrorMirror Fold‐Fold‐inging function, the exterior mirrors are foldedinwhen the vehicle is locked. If you unlock thevehicle and then open a door, the exteriormirrors fold out again.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theConvenienceConvenience submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select the Auto.Auto.Mirror FoldingMirror Folding function.If the Auto. Mirror FoldingAuto. Mirror Folding function isactivated, the vehicle's exterior mirror isdisplayed in red in the multifunction dis-play.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

: To fold the exterior mirrors in or outIf you have switched the Auto. MirrorAuto. MirrorFoldingFolding on and you fold the exterior mirrorsin using button:, they will not fold out auto-matically (Y page 93).You can then only fold out the exteriormirrorsusing button:.

Restoring the factory settingsX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theFactory SettingFactory Setting submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.The Reset All Settings?Reset All Settings? messageappears.

X Press the: or9 button to select NoNoor YesYes.

X Pressa to confirm the selection.If you select YesYes, the multifunction displayshows a confirmation message.

For safety reasons, the Daytime RunningDaytime RunningLightsLights function in the LightsLights submenu isonly reset if the vehicle is stationary.

AMG menu in AMG vehicles

AMG displays

: Digital speedometer; Gear indicator= Upshift indicator? Engine oil temperatureA Coolant temperatureB Status indicator for ECO start/stop func-

tion (Y page 135)X Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the AMGAMG menu.

Upshift indicator UPUP = indicates that theengine has reached the overrevving rangewhen in the manual gearshift program.Upshift indicator UPUP = fades out other mes-sages until you have shifted up.If the engine oil temperature is below 176 ‡(80 †), the oil temperature is shown in blue.

Menus and submenus 209

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Page 212: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Avoid driving at full engine output during thistime.

SETUP

: Drive program (CC/SS/MM); ESP® mode (ONON/OFFOFF)SETUP shows the drive programand the ESP®(Electronic Stability Program) mode.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the AMGAMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly untilSETUP is displayed.

RACETIMER

Displaying and starting RACETIMERThe RACETIMER is only intended for use on aclosed race circuit. Do not use the function onpublic roads.

: Lap; RACETIMERYou can start the RACETIMER when theengine is running or if the key is in position 2(Y page 133) in the ignition lock.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the AMGAMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until theRACETIMER is shown.

X To start: press thea button to start theRACETIMER.

Displaying the intermediate time

X Press the= or; button to selectInterm. TimeInterm. Time.

X Pressa to confirm.The intermediate time is displayed for fiveseconds.

Starting a new lap

: RACETIMER; Fastest lap time (best lap)= LapX Pressa to confirm New LapNew Lap.i It is possible to store a maximum of six-teen laps. The 16th lap can only be com-pleted with Finish LapFinish Lap.

Stopping the RACETIMER

X Press the% button on the steeringwheel.

X Confirm YesYes witha.The RACETIMER is interrupted if you stop thevehicle and turn the SmartKey to position 1(Y page 133) in the ignition lock. If you turnthe SmartKey to position 2 or 3 (Y page 133)

210 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Page 213: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

and then pressa to confirm StartStart, timingis continued.

Resetting the current lapX Stop the RACETIMER (Y page 210).X Press the= or; button to selectReset LapReset Lap.

X Pressa to reset the lap time to "0".

Deleting all laps

If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER isreset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps aredeleted.You cannot delete individual stored laps. Ifyou have stopped 16 laps, the current lapdoes not have to be reset.X Reset the current lap (Y page 211).X Pressa to confirm ResetReset.Reset Race Timer?Reset Race Timer? appears in the multi-function display.

X Press the: button to select YesYes andpress thea button to confirm.All laps are deleted.

Overall statistics

: RACETIMER overall evaluation; Total time driven= Average speed? Distance coveredA Maximum speed

This function is shown if you have stored atleast one lap and stopped the RACETIMER.X Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the AMGAMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until theoverall evaluation is shown.

Lap statistics

: Lap; Lap time= Average lap speed? Lap lengthA Top speed during lapThis function is only available if you havestored at least two laps and have stopped theRACETIMER.X Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the AMGAMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until thelap evaluation is shown.Each lap is shown in a separate submenu.The fastest lap is indicated by flashing sym-bol:.

X Press the9 or: button to select adifferent lap evaluation.

Display messages

Introduction

General notesDisplaymessages appear in themultifunctiondisplay.Display messages with graphic displays maybe shown in simplified form in the Operator'sManual and may differ from the messagesshown in the multifunction display.

Display messages 211

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Page 214: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Please respond in accordance with the dis-play messages and follow the additionalnotes in this Operator's Manual.Certain display messages are accompaniedby an audible warning tone or a continuoustone.When you stop and park the vehicle, pleaseobserve the notes on:RHOLD function (Y page 180)RParking (Y page 150)

Hiding display messagesX Press theaor%button on the steer-ing wheel to hide the display message.The display message is cleared.

Display messages with a high priority areshown in red.You cannot hide display messages of thehighest priority. The multifunction displayshows these messages continuously until thecauses for the messages have been rem-edied.

Message memory menuThe on-board computer saves certain displaymessages. You can call up the display mes-sages in themessage memory.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Serv.Serv. menu.If there are display messages, the multi-function display shows 2 Messages2 Messages, forexample.

X Press the9 or: button to select theentry, e.g. 2 Messages2 Messages.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the9 or: button to scrollthrough the display messages.

When the ignition is switched off, all displaymessages are deleted, apart from some high-priority displaymessages. Once the causes ofthe high-priority display messages have beenrectified, the corresponding display mes-sages are also deleted.

212 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Page 215: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

!÷Currently Unavail‐Currently Unavail‐able. See Opera‐able. See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram), BAS (Brake Assist), the HOLD function, hill start assist andESP® trailer stabilization are temporarily unavailable.BAS and the adaptive brake lights may also have failed.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.Possible causes are:Rself-diagnosis is not yet complete.Rthe on-board voltage may be insufficient.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentionedabove are available again.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

!÷Inoperative. SeeInoperative. SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

ABS, ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function, hill start assist andESP® trailer stabilization are unavailable due to a malfunction.BAS and the adaptive brake lights may also have failed.The$ (USA only)/J (Canada only), ÷, å and !warning lamps in the instrument cluster also light up.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.

Display messages 213

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Page 216: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM SolutionsIf ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

÷Currently Unavail‐Currently Unavail‐able. See Opera‐able. See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual

ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailerstabilization are unavailable due to a malfunction.BAS and the adaptive brake lights may also have failed.In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentionedabove are available again.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

214 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Page 217: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

÷Inoperative. SeeInoperative. SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailerstabilization are unavailable due to a malfunction.BAS and the adaptive brake lights may also have failed.In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

T!÷Inoperative. SeeInoperative. SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, theHOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilization areunavailable due to a malfunction.BAS and the adaptive brake lights may also have failed.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)ReleaseRelease Park.Park. BrakeBrake

You are driving with the parking brake applied. A warning tone alsosounds.X Release the parking brake.

Display messages 215

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Page 218: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

$(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)Check Brake FluidCheck Brake FluidLevelLevel

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. Inaddition, the$ (USA only)/J (Canada only) warning lamplights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 150).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.

#Check Brake PadCheck Brake PadWearWear

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Gmbrace Inoperativembrace Inoperative

USA only: one or more main functions of the mbrace system aremalfunctioning.Canada only: one or more main functions of the TELE AID systemare malfunctioning.X USA only: have the mbrace system checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

X Canada only: have the Tele AID system checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

6SRS MalfunctionSRS MalfunctionService RequiredService Required

The restraint system is faulty. The 6 warning lamp also lightsup in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.For further information about the restraint system, see(Y page 40).

216 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Page 219: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

6FrontFront LeftLeft Malfunc‐Malfunc‐tion Servicetion ServiceRequiredRequired or FrontFrontRight MalfunctionRight MalfunctionService RequiredService Required

The front left-hand or right-hand restraint system has malfunc-tioned. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrumentcluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6Rear Left Malfunc‐Rear Left Malfunc‐tion Servicetion ServiceRequiredRequired or RearRearRight MalfunctionRight MalfunctionService RequiredService Required

The rear left-hand or right-hand restraint system has malfunc-tioned. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrumentcluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6Rear Center Mal‐Rear Center Mal‐function. Servicefunction. ServiceRequiredRequired

The rear center restraint system has malfunctioned. The 6warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6Left Side CurtainLeft Side CurtainAirbag Malfunc‐Airbag Malfunc‐tion. Servicetion. ServiceRequiredRequired or SideSideCurtainCurtain AirbagAirbag Mal‐Mal‐function. Servicefunction. ServiceRequiredRequired

There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand window cur-tain air bag. The6warning lamp also lights up in the instrumentcluster.

G WARNINGThe left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggeredunintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be trig-gered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 217

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Page 220: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Front PassengerFront PassengerAirbag Disabled.Airbag Disabled.SeeSee Operator'sOperator's Man‐Man‐ualual

A special BabySmart™-compatible child restraint system is moun-ted on the front-passenger seat.The 4 5 indicator lamp also lights up.The front-passenger air bag is therefore disabled.Further information on BabySmart™ (Y page 56).

Front PassengerFront PassengerAirbag Enabled.Airbag Enabled.SeeSee Operator'sOperator's Man‐Man‐ualual

The 4 5 indicator lamp does not remain lit if a specialBabySmart™-compatible child restraint system has been installedon the front-passenger seat.The BabySmart™ system is malfunctioning.

G WARNINGThe front-passenger front air bag can be triggered unintentionallyin the event of an accident.There is a risk of an accident.X Make sure there is nothing between the seat and the childrestraint system.

X Check that the child restraint system is installed correctly.X If the 4 5 indicator lamp does not light up, have theBabySmart™ system checked as soon as possible at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.Do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until the airbag deactivation system has been repaired.

Lightsi Display messages about LEDs:This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bCheck Left LowCheck Left LowBeamBeam or CheckCheckRight Low BeamRight Low Beam

The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheckCheck TrailerTrailer LeftLeftTail LampTail Lamp or CheckCheckTrailerTrailer RightRight TailTailLampLamp

The left or right-hand trailer tail lamp is faulty.X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself.orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

218 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Page 221: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bCheckCheck TrailerTrailer LeftLeftTurn SignalTurn Signal orCheck TrailerCheck TrailerRight Turn SignalRight Turn Signal

The left or right-hand trailer turn signal lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself.orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck TrailerCheck TrailerBrake LampBrake Lamp

The trailer brake lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself.orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Rear LeftCheck Rear LeftTurn SignalTurn Signal orCheck Rear RightCheck Rear RightTurn SignalTurn Signal

The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 109).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Front LeftCheck Front LeftTurn SignalTurn Signal orCheck Front RightCheck Front RightTurn SignalTurn Signal

The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 109).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left MirrorCheck Left MirrorTurn SignalTurn Signal orCheckCheck RightRight MirrorMirrorTurn SignalTurn Signal

The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror isdefective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheckCheck CenterCenter BrakeBrakeLampLamp

The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left BrakeCheck Left BrakeLampLamp or CheckCheckRight Brake LampRight Brake Lamp

The left or right-hand brake lamp is defective.X Replace the bulb (Y page 108).

bCheck Left HighCheck Left HighBeamBeam or CheckCheckRight High BeamRight High Beam

The left or right-hand high beam is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 219

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Page 222: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bLicense Plate LampLicense Plate Lamp

There is a short circuit in the LED lamps. The LEDs have beenswitched off.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left FogCheck Left FogLampLamp or CheckCheckRight Fog LampRight Fog Lamp

The left-hand or right-hand front fog lamp is defective.X Replace the bulb (Y page 108).

bRear Fog LampRear Fog Lamp

The rear fog lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 109).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Front LeftCheck Front LeftParkingParkingLampLamporCheck FrontCheck FrontRight Parking LampRight Parking Lamp

The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 109).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bBackup LightBackup Light

The backup lamp is defective.X Replace the bulb (Y page 108).

bCheck Front LeftCheck Front LeftSidemarker LampSidemarker Lamp orCheck Front RightCheck Front RightSidemarker LampSidemarker Lamp

The left or right front side marker lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 109).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left TailCheck Left TailLampLamp or CheckCheckRight Tail LampRight Tail Lamp

The left or right-hand tail lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 109).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

220 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Page 223: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bCheckCheck LeftLeft DaytimeDaytimeRunningRunningLampLamporCheck RightCheck RightDaytime RunningDaytime RunningLampLamp

The left or right-hand daytime running lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bMalfunction. SeeMalfunction. SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The exterior lighting is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bAutoAuto LampLamp FunctionFunctionInoperativeInoperative

The light sensor is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bSwitch Off LightsSwitch Off Lights

The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. Awarning tone also sounds.X Turn the light switch toÃ.

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

+Check CoolantCheck CoolantLevel. See Opera‐Level. See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual

The coolant level is too low.X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so(Y page 278).

X Have the coolant system checked at a qualified specialist work-shop if the coolant needs topping up more often than usual.

? The fan motor is faulty.X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving inmountainous terrain and stop-start traffic.

Display messages 221

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Page 224: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

?Coolant Too HotCoolant Too HotStop VehicleStop VehicleSwitch Engine OffSwitch Engine Off

The coolant is too hot.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGDo not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause somefluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment tocatch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhich can occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 150).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle untilthe engine has cooled down.

X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is notblocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes outand the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Other-wise, the engine could be damaged.

X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialistworkshop immediately.

Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolantlevel, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

The poly-V-belt may have torn.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Check the poly-V-belt.If the poly-V-belt is torn:

! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.If the poly-V-belt is not damaged:X Wait until the display message disappears before restarting theengine. Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

222 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Page 225: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

# The battery is not being charged.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes are:Ra defective alternatorRa torn poly-V-beltRa malfunction in the electronicsX Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Open the hood.X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn.If the poly-V-belt is torn:

! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.If the poly-V-belt is not damaged:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

4Check Engine OilCheck Engine OilAt Next RefuelingAt Next Refueling

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.A warning tone also sounds.X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest(Y page 275).

X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 277).X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop ifengine oil needs to be added more often than usual.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine willotherwise be damaged.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

4Engine Oil LevelEngine Oil LevelLow Stop VehicleLow Stop VehicleSwitch Engine OffSwitch Engine Off

The engine oil level is too low. There is a risk of engine damage.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Add engine oil (Y page 277) and check the oil level(Y page 275).

Display messages 223

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Page 226: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

4Check Engine OilCheck Engine OilLevelLevel (Add(Add 11 quart)quart)

AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low.X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest(Y page 275).

X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 277).X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop ifengine oil needs to be added more often than usual.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine willotherwise be damaged.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

4Engine Oil LevelEngine Oil LevelCannot Be MeasuredCannot Be Measured

The measuring system is malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

8Fuel Level LowFuel Level Low

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.

8Gas Cap LooseGas Cap Loose

The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closedcorrectly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:X Close the fuel filler cap.If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

224 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Page 227: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Driving systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

TC shift condi‐TC shift condi‐tionstions notnot fulfilledfulfilledApply the brake/Apply the brake/parking brakeparking brake

The parking brake has not been applied and the brake pedal hasnot been depressed. The transfer case has canceled the gearchange process and is inNeutral. There is no connection betweenthe engine and the drive wheels.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Depress the brake pedal and apply the parking brake.X Shift the automatic transmission to neutral position N.X Make sure all conditions for changing gears are met(Y page 186).

X Repeat the gearshift process.

TC malfunctionTC malfunctionConsult workshopConsult workshopaboutabout applyingapplying thetheparking brakeparking brake

There is a malfunction in the transfer case.X Do not shift the transfer case.X When parking, secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 150).

X Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

TC shift canceledTC shift canceledReactivateReactivate

The transfer case has not performed the gear change process.X Repeat the gearshift process.X Make sure all conditions for changing gears are met(Y page 186).

TC shift condi‐TC shift condi‐tionstions notnot fulfilledfulfilledMax. speed 25 mphMax. speed 25 mph

You have exceeded the maximum speed for the gearshift process.X Drive more slowly.X Repeat the gearshift process.

TC shift condi‐TC shift condi‐tionstions notnot fulfilledfulfilledSelectSelect NEUTRALNEUTRAL geargear

You have not met one or more shift conditions.X Shift the automatic transmission to neutral position N.X Repeat the gearshift process.

TC shift condi‐TC shift condi‐tionstions notnot fulfilledfulfilledMax. speed 40 mphMax. speed 40 mph

You have exceeded the maximum speed for the gearshift process.X Drive more slowly.X Repeat the gearshift process.

LOW RANGELOW RANGEONON

The transfer case is in the LOW RANGE off-road position.

HIGH RANGEHIGH RANGEONON

The transfer case is in the HIGH RANGE on-road position.

Display messages 225

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Page 228: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Differential lockDifferential lockonly available inonly available inLOW RANGELOW RANGE

The LOW RANGE button has been pressed. The transfer case is inthe LOWRANGE off-road driving position and a differential lock isengaged.X Disengage the differential locks (Y page 188).X Repeat the gearshift process.

TC NEUTRALTC NEUTRALONON

The transfer case is in the Neutral neutral position.A warning tone will also sound when the driver's door is openedand the brake pedal is not depressed.X Close the driver's door.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 150).X Shift the transfer case according to driving conditions(Y page 186).

Preselected dif‐Preselected dif‐ferential lockferential lockESP unavailableESP unavailable

A differential lock has been engaged. The differential gear has notyet locked the respective differential. The activation indicatorlamp (yellow) (Y page 188) of the switch lights up.ESP is unavailable.ABS is still available.

Differential lockDifferential lockactiveactiveABS and ESPABS and ESPunavailableunavailable

A differential lock was engaged and the differential gear haslocked the respective differential. The activation indicator lamp(yellow) and function indicator lamp (red) (Y page 188) on theswitch light up.ABS and ESP are unavailable.

226 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Page 229: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Blind Spot AssistBlind Spot Assistcurrently unavail‐currently unavail‐ableableSeeSee Operator'sOperator's Man‐Man‐ualual

Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:Ryou have established the electrical connection between thetrailer and your vehicle.Rthe sensors are dirty.Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperaturerange.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.

The yellow9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mir-rors.X When towing a trailer, confirm the display message witha.

If you are driving without a trailer and the display message doesnot disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Apply the parking brake.X Clean the sensors (Y page 284).X Restart the engine.If the system detects that the sensors are fully operational, thedisplay message disappears.Blind Spot Assist is operational again.

Blind Spot AssistBlind Spot AssistorInoperativeInoperative

Blind Spot Assist is defective.The yellow9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mir-rors.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONIC PLUSDISTRONIC PLUSOffOff

DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 169).If it was deactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds.

DISTRONIC PLUSDISTRONIC PLUSNow AvailableNow Available

DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been tempo-rarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 169).

Display messages 227

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Page 230: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

DISTRONIC PLUSDISTRONIC PLUSCurrently Unavail‐Currently Unavail‐able. See Opera‐able. See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual

DISTRONIC is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possiblecauses are:Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator trim is dirtyRfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe sensors in the bumpers are dirty.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe transfer case is in the LOW RANGE transmission position.Rthe vehicle is on an uphill or a downhill slope of more than22‑25%Rthe on-board voltage is too low.A warning tone also sounds.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Apply the parking brake.X Clean the DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator trim and thebumper (Y page 284).

X Restart the engine.If the system detects that the sensors are fully operational, thedisplay message disappears.DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again.

DISTRONIC PLUSDISTRONIC PLUSInoperativeInoperative

DISTRONIC PLUS is defective.BAS (Brake Assist) may also have failed.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONIC PLUSDISTRONIC PLUSPassivePassive

You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is nolonger controlling the speed of the vehicle.X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUSDISTRONIC PLUS- - - mph- - - mph

An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 169).

DISTRONICDISTRONIC PLUSPLUS andandSPEEDTRONICSPEEDTRONICInoperativeInoperative

DISTRONIC PLUS and SPEEDTRONIC are faulty. A warning tonealso sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

228 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Page 231: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

CruiseCruise controlcontrol andandSPEEDTRONIC Inop‐SPEEDTRONIC Inop‐erativeerative

Cruise control and SPEEDTRONIC are malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

LimitLimit- - - mph- - - mph

While depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point(kickdown), SPEEDTRONIC cannot be activated.

Cruise ControlCruise Control- - - mph- - - mph

A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), forexample.X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) andstore the speed.

X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 162).

Tires

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

TireTire pressurepressure willwillbebe displayeddisplayed afterafterdriving a fewdriving a fewminutesminutes

The tire pressure monitor is measuring the tire pressure.X Drive on.The tire pressures appear in the multifunction display after youhave been driving for a few minutes.

Tire Press. Moni‐Tire Press. Moni‐tor Inoperativetor Inoperative

The tire pressure monitor is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire Pressure Mon‐Tire Pressure Mon‐itor Inoperativeitor InoperativeNo Wheel SensorsNo Wheel Sensors

The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor.The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.The tire pressuremonitor is activated automatically after drivingfor a few minutes.

Display messages 229

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Page 232: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Check TiresCheck Tires The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the fol-lowing hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speedincrease.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, maybe greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 150).X If there is a flat tire, inspect the tires (Y page 292).X Check the tire pressure (Y page 313).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

Warning Tire Mal‐Warning Tire Mal‐functionfunction

The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. Thewheel position is shown in the multifunction display.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGIf you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards:Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.Ryou could lose control of the vehicle.Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 150).X If there is a flat tire, inspect the tires (Y page 292).

230 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Page 233: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Correct Tire Pres‐Correct Tire Pres‐suresure

The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tirepressure difference between the wheels is too great.X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 313).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 315).

TirePress. Sen‐TirePress. Sen‐sor(s) Missingsor(s) Missing

There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or severalwheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in themultifunction display.X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Tire Pressure Mon‐Tire Pressure Mon‐itor Currentlyitor CurrentlyUnavailableUnavailable

Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be receivedfrom the wheel sensors. The tire pressure monitor is temporarilymalfunctioning.X Drive on.The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as theproblem has been solved.

hTireTire PressurePressure Warn‐Warn‐ing, Tire Malfunc‐ing, Tire Malfunc‐tiontion

The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. Thewheel position is shown in the multifunction display.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGIf you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards:Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.Ryou could lose control of the vehicle.Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.There is a risk of an accident.

X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 150).X If there is a flat tire, inspect the tires (Y page 292).

Display messages 231

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Page 234: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

hCheckCheck TireTire PressurePressure

The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.The wheel position is shown in the multifunction display.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the fol-lowing hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speedincrease.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, maybe greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.

X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 150).X If there is a flat tire, inspect the tires (Y page 292).X Check the tire pressure (Y page 313).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

hCorrect Tire Pres‐Correct Tire Pres‐suresure

The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tirepressure difference between the wheels is too great.X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 313).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ShiftShift toto PP oror NN totoStart EngineStart Engine

You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission inposition R or D.X Shift the transmission to position P or N.

Auxiliary BatteryAuxiliary BatteryMalfunctionMalfunction

The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longerbeing charged.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop at the next opportunity.X Until then, set the automatic transmission to position P beforeyou switch off the engine.

X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the parking brake.

232 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Page 235: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Apply Brake toApply Brake toShift from PShift from P

You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever toposition D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal.X Depress the brake pedal.

A The rear door is open.

G WARNINGWhen the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicleinterior if the tailgate is open.There is a risk of poisoning.X Close the rear door.

? The hood is open.

G WARNINGThe open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 150).X Close the hood.

C At least one door is open.A warning tone also sounds.X Close all the doors.

DPowerPower SteeringSteering Mal‐Mal‐function.function. SeeSee Oper‐Oper‐ator's Manualator's Manual

The power steering is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGYou will need to use more force to steer.There is a risk of an accident.X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 233

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Page 236: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Telephone No Ser‐Telephone No Ser‐vicevice

Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver range.X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbolappears in the multifunction display.

¥Check Washer FluidCheck Washer Fluid

The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has droppedbelow the minimum.X Add washer fluid (Y page 278).

SmartKey

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ÂKey Does NotKey Does NotBelong to VehicleBelong to Vehicle

You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.X Use the correct SmartKey.

ÂTakeTake YourYour KeyKey fromfromIgnitionIgnition

The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.X Remove the SmartKey.

ÂObtain a New KeyObtain a New Key

The SmartKey needs to be replaced.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in theinstrument cluster

Overview of warning and indicatorlamps

L Low-beam headlamps (Y page 99)#!

Turn signal (Y page 103)

K High-beam headlamps(Y page 103)

N Front fog lamps (Y page 101)R Rear fog lamp (Y page 101)ü Seat belts (Y page 235)$(USA)

Braking (Y page 236)

J(Can-ada)

Brakes (yellow) (Y page 236)

! ABS (Y page 237)÷ ESP® (Y page 239)å ESP® OFF (Y page 239)6 Restraint system (Y page 242); Check engine (Y page 243)8 Reserve fuel (Y page 243)? Coolant (Y page 243)· Distance warning signal

(Y page 245)h Tire pressure monitor

(Y page 246)

234 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Page 237: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Safety

Seat belts

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ü

After starting theengine, the red seatbelt warning lamp lightsup for 6 seconds.

The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passengerto fasten their seat belts.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44).

ü

After starting theengine, the red seatbelt warning lamp lightsup. In addition, a warn-ing tone sounds for upto 6 seconds.

The driver's seat belt is not fastened.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44).The warning tone ceases.

ü

The red seat belt warn-ing lamp lights up afterthe engine starts, assoon as the driver's orthe front-passengerdoor is closed.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44).The warning lamp goes out.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat.X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stowthem in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out.

ü

The red seat belt warn-ing lamp flashes and anintermittent audiblewarning sounds.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. Thevehicle is being driven faster than 15mph (25 km/h) or has brieflybeen driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44).The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning toneceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is beingdriven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been drivenfaster than 15 mph (25 km/h).X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stowthem in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning toneceases.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 235

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Page 238: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Safety systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

$ (USA only)J (Canada only)USA only: the redbrake system warninglamp is lit while theengine is running. Awarning tone alsosounds.Canada only: the yel-low brake systemwarn-ing lamp is lit while theengine is running. Awarning tone alsosounds.

G WARNINGThe brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking char-acteristics may be affected.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 150).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

$ (USA only)J (Canada only)USA only: the redbrake system warninglamp is lit while theengine is running. Awarning tone alsosounds.Canada only: the yel-low brake systemwarn-ing lamp is lit while theengine is running. Awarning tone alsosounds.

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 150).X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not remedy the mal-function.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

236 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Page 239: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

!

The yellowABSwarninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a malfunc-tion. BAS (Brake Assist), ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), theHOLD function, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights andESP® trailer stabilization, for example, are therefore also deacti-vated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that othersystems, such as the navigation system or the automatic trans-mission, will not be available.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 237

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Page 240: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

!

The yellowABSwarninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

ABS is temporarily unavailable. BAS, ESP®, EBD (electronic brakeforce distribution), the HOLD function, hill start assist, ESP® trailerstabilization and the adaptive brake lights, for example, are there-fore also deactivated.Possible causes are:Rself-diagnosis is not yet complete.Rthe on-board voltage may be insufficient.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is a risk of an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).The functions mentioned above are available again when thewarning lamp goes out.

If the warning lamp is still on:X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

238 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Page 241: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

!

The yellowABSwarninglamp is lit while theengine is running. Awarning tone alsosounds.

EBD is malfunctioning. Therefore, ABS, BAS, ESP®, the HOLDfunction, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailerstabilization are also not available, for example.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

!

The yellowABSwarninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

You have engaged the differential locks. ABS is deactivated.X Disengage the differential locks.Subsequently ABS is reactivated.

$ (USA only)J (Canada only)÷ å !

The yellow brake warn-ing lamp, the yellowESP® and ESP® OFFwarning lamps and theyellow ABS warninglamp are lit while theengine is running.

ABS and ESP® aremalfunctioning. Therefore, BAS, EBD, the HOLDfunction, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailerstabilization, for example, are also not available.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 239

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Page 242: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

÷

The yellow ESP® warn-ing lamp flashes whilethe vehicle is in motion.

ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk ofskidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.X Do not deactivate ESP®.For exceptions, see: (Y page 63).

å

The yellow ESP® OFFwarning lamp is lit whilethe engine is running.

ESP® is deactivated.

G WARNING

If ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Reactivate ESP®.For exceptions, see: (Y page 63).

X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

If ESP® cannot be activated:X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

÷ å

The yellow ESP® andESP® OFF warninglamps are lit while theengine is running.

ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function, hill start assist, the adaptive brakelights and ESP® trailer stabilization are not available due to a mal-function.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

240 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Page 243: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

÷ å

The yellow ESP® andESP® OFF warninglamps are lit while theengine is running.

ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailerstabilization are temporarily unavailable.BAS and the adaptive brake lights may also have failed.self-diagnosis is not yet complete.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).The functions mentioned above are available again when thewarning lamp goes out.

If the warning lamp is still on:X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

å

The yellow ESP® OFFwarning lamp is lit whilethe engine is running.

You have engaged the differential locks. ABS, ESP®, 4ETS and BAShave been deactivated.X Disengage the differential locks.ESP®, 4ETS and BAS are subsequently reactivated.

X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 241

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Page 244: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

(Canada only)(USA only)The red parking brakewarning lamp comes onwhile the vehicle ismoving. A warning tonealso sounds.

You are driving with the parking brake applied.X Release the parking brake.The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases.

6

The red restraint sys-tem warning lamp is litwhile the engine is run-ning.

The restraint system is faulty.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Drive on carefully.X Have the restraint system checked at a qualified specialistworkshop immediately.

For further information about the restraint system, see(Y page 40).

242 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Page 245: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

;

The yellow CheckEngine warning lamplights up while theengine is running.

There may be a malfunction, for example:Rin the engine managementRin the fuel injection systemRin the exhaust systemRin the ignition systemRin the fuel systemThe emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may bein emergency mode.X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified special-ist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamplights up. This is due to the legal requirements in effect in thesestates. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations apply inthe state in which you are currently driving.

8

The yellow reserve fuelwarning lamp lights upwhile the engine is run-ning.

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

8

The yellow reserve fuelwarning lamp flasheswhile the vehicle is inmotion.In addition, the;Check Engine warninglamp may light up.

The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closedcorrectly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel fillercap.

X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist work-shop.

?

The red coolant warn-ing lamp lights up whilethe engine is runningand the coolant tem-perature gage is at thestart of the scale.

The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gage is defec-tive.The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is arisk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continuedriving under any circumstances.

X Apply the parking brake.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 243

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Page 246: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

?

The red coolant warn-ing lamp comes onwhile the engine is run-ning.

The coolant level is too low.

! Avoidmaking long journeys with too little coolant in the enginecooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiatormaybe blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunc-tioning.The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooledsufficiently.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Apply the parking brake.X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle untilthe engine has cooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warningnotes (Y page 278).

X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have theengine coolant system checked.

X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is notblocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature isbelow248‡ (120†). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving inmoun-tainous terrain, and stop-start driving.

?

The red coolant warn-ing lamp comes onwhile the engine is run-ning. A warning tonealso sounds.

The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The air-flow to the engine radiatormay be blocked or the coolant levelmaybe too low.

G WARNINGThe engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause somefluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment tocatch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhich can occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.

244 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Page 247: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM SolutionsX Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 150).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle untilthe engine has cooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warningnotes (Y page 278).

X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have theengine coolant system checked.

X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is notblocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving inmoun-tainous terrain, and stop-start driving.

Driving systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

·

The red distance warn-ing lamp lights up whilethe vehicle is in motion.

The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speedselected.X Increase the distance.

·

The red distance warn-ing lamp lights up whilethe vehicle is in motion.A warning tone alsosounds.

You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your lineof travel at too high a speed.X Be prepared to brake immediately.X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have tobrake or take evasive action.

Further information on DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 169).

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 245

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Page 248: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Tires

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

h

USA only:The yellow tire pressuremonitor warning lamp(pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.Canada only:The yellow tire pressuremonitor warning lamp(pressure loss) is lit.

The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in atleast one of the tires.

G WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the fol-lowing hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speedincrease.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, maybe greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.

X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 150).X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X If there is a flat tire, inspect the tires (Y page 292).X Check the tire pressure (Y page 313).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

h

USA only:The yellow tire pressuremonitor warning lamp(pressure loss/malfunction) flashes forapproximately oneminute and thenremains lit.

The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

G WARNINGThe system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tirepressure.There is a risk of an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

246 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Page 249: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Useful information ............................ 248Loading guidelines ............................ 248Stowage areas .................................. 249Features ............................................. 254

247

Stow

ageandfeatures

Page 250: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops: (Y page 24).

Loading guidelines

G WARNINGIf objects, luggage or loads are not secured ornot secured sufficiently, they could slip, tipover or be flung around and thereby hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-den change in direction.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping before thejourney.

G WARNINGIf you distribute the load unevenly in the vehi-cle, the handling as well as the steering andbraking characteristics are severely affected.There is a risk of an accident.Distribute the load evenly in the vehicle.Secure the load to prevent it from slipping.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. If the tail-gate/rear door is open when the engine isrunning, particularly if the vehicle is moving,exhaust fumes could enter the passengercompartment. There is a risk of poisoning.

Turn off the engine before opening the tail-gate/rear door. Never drive off with the tail-gate/rear door open.

Driving, braking and steering characteristicschange depending on:Rtype of loadRweightRthe center of gravity of the loadYou should therefore load your vehicle asshown in the illustrations.The gross vehicle weight (GVW) is the vehicleweight including fuel, vehicle tool kit, sparewheel, accessories installed, vehicle occu-pants and luggage/load.Do not exceed the load limit or permittedgross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) for yourvehicle. The gross load limit and the GVWRare specified on the vehicle identificationplate on the B-pillar of the driver's door(Y page 336).The load must also be distributed so that theweight on each axle never exceeds the grossaxle weight rating (GAWR) for the front andrear axles. The specifications for GVWR andGAWR are on the vehicle identification plateon the B-pillar of the driver's door(Y page 336).Further information can be found in the"Loading the vehicle" section (Y page 316).Observe the following notes when transport-ing a load:RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as pos-sible and as low down in the cargo com-partment as possible.

248 Loading guidelinesStow

ageandfeatures

Page 251: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

i Transport loads when possible in thecargo compartment. You should only usethe cargo compartment enlargement if theload does not fit in the cargo compartment.RAlways place the load against the front orrear seat backrests.

If the rear bench seat is not occupied:X Insert the belt tongue on the outer seatbelts into the buckle of opposite seatbelt:.

X Secure the load with sufficiently strong andwear-resistant tie downs.

X Pad sharp edges for protection.

Stowage areas

Stowage spaces

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf objects in the passenger compartment arestowed incorrectly, they can slide or bethrown around and hit vehicle occupants.There is a risk of injury, particularly in theevent of sudden braking or a sudden changein direction.RAlways stow objects so that they cannot bethrown around in such situations.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets orstowage nets.

RClose the lockable stowage spaces whiledriving.RStow and secure objects that are heavy,hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or toolarge in the cargo compartment.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 248).

Stowage compartments in the front

Glove box

X Toopen: pull handle: and open glove boxflap;.

X To close: fold glove box flap; upwardsuntil it engages.

1 Glove box unlocked2 Glove box lockedX To lock: insert the mechanical key into thelock (Y page 69) and turn it 90° clockwiseto position2.

X To unlock: insert the mechanical key intothe lock (Y page 69) and turn it 90° coun-ter-clockwise to position1.

Stowage areas 249

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Page 252: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

i The glove box can only be locked andunlocked using the mechanical key.

Door stowage compartmentThere is an additional compartment locatedon the driver's door paneling, which can beused to store a mini tablet PC, for example.

Stowage compartment/telephone com-partment under the armrest/in the centerconsole

: Small stowage compartment; Release button for the armrestStowage compartment/telephone compart-ment under the armrestX To open: press release button;.X Fold up armrest.i In the stowage compartment, there is astowage tray.

X To close: fold the armrest down.The armrest engages audibly.

Stowage space in the rear

Storage pocketsG WARNINGStorage bags are intended for storing light-weight items only.Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges orfragile objects may not be transported in thestorage bag. In an accident, during hard brak-ing, or sudden maneuvers, they could bethrown around inside the vehicle and causeinjury to vehicle occupants.

Storage bags cannot protect transportedgoods in the event of an accident.

The stowage pockets are located on the rearside of the front seats.

Stowage netsThe stowage net is in the front-passengerfootwell.Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 248)and the safety notes regarding stowagespaces (Y page 249).

Cargo compartment enlargement

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the rear bench seat/rear seat and seatbackrest are not engaged they could fold for-wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in theevent of an accident.RThe vehicle occupant would thereby bepushed into the seat belt by the rear benchseat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. Theseat belt can no longer offer the intendedlevel of protection and could even causeinjuries.RObjects or loads in the trunk/cargo com-partment cannot be restrained by the seatbackrest.

There is an increased risk of injury.Before every trip, make sure that the seatbackrests and the rear bench seat/rear seatare engaged.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. If the tail-gate/rear door is open when the engine isrunning, particularly if the vehicle is moving,exhaust fumes could enter the passengercompartment. There is a risk of poisoning.

250 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

Page 253: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Turn off the engine before opening the tail-gate/rear door. Never drive off with the tail-gate/rear door open.

! Ensure that you remove all containersfrom the cup holder in the rear before fold-ing the seat backrest and the seat cushionof the rear bench seat forwards.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 248).The rear bench seat is split symmetrically.The left-hand and right-hand rear bench seatscan be folded forward to increase the capa-city of the rear compartment. The followingchanges are possible:Rfold the seat backrests forwardRfold the rear bench seat back fully

Folding the seat backrest forward

To fold forward the seat backrests, proceedas follows:X Open the rear doors.This allows you better access to releaselever:.

X Remove the center head restraint(Y page 88).

X Pull catch: in the direction of the arrow.The corresponding rear seat backrest is notengaged.

X Fold the backrest forwards.The rear seat backrest engages audibly.

; Backrest folded forward

Folding the seat backrest back

! Make sure that the seat belt does notbecome trapped when folding the rear seatbackrest back. Otherwise, it could be dam-aged.

X Pull release lever:.The corresponding seat backrest isreleased.

X Fold backrest; backwards in the direc-tion of the arrow.The seat catch engages audibly.

X Install the head restraint (Y page 88).

Stowage areas 251

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Page 254: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Rear bench seat

Folding the rear bench seat forward

X Fold rear seat backrest (Y page 251) for-wards.

X Pull catch: in the direction of the arrow.The corresponding rear bench seat isreleased.

X Fold rear bench seat; forwards.

; Rear bench seat folded forward

Folding the rear bench seat into anupright positionG WARNINGIf the rear bench seat/rear seat and seatbackrest are not engaged they could fold for-wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in theevent of an accident.RThe vehicle occupant would thereby bepushed into the seat belt by the rear benchseat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. Theseat belt can no longer offer the intended

level of protection and could even causeinjuries.RObjects or loads in the trunk/cargo com-partment cannot be restrained by the seatbackrest.

There is an increased risk of injury.Before every trip, make sure that the seatbackrests and the rear bench seat/rear seatare engaged.

X Fold the rear bench seat back.The seat catch engages audibly.

X Fold the backrest backwards (Y page 251).X Install the head restraints (Y page 88).

Securing cargo

Important safety notesDistribute the load on the cargo tie-downrings evenly.Do not tamper with or repair cargo tie-downpoints, cargo tie-down rings or tie downs.Have maintenance work as well as modifica-tions, installations and conversions carriedout at a qualified specialist workshop(Y page 24).Observe the following notes on securingloads:RSecure the load using the cargo tie-downrings.RDo not use elastic straps or nets to securea load, as these are only intended as ananti-slip protection for light loads.RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edgesor corners.RPad sharp edges for protection.ROnly use tie downs that have been checkedin accordance with applicable standards,e.g. lashing nets or lashing straps.RFill the spaces between the load and thecargo compartment walls and the wheelhousing in a form-locking way. Only usedimensionally stable transportation aids

252 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

Page 255: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

for this, such as chocks, wooden fixings orpadding.

Cargo tie-down rings in the cargo com-partment

There are four cargo tie-down rings: in thecargo compartment mounted at the sides.

Cargo compartment cover

Important safety notes

G WARNINGOn its own, the cargo compartment covercannot secure or restrain heavy objects,items of luggage and heavy loads. You couldbe hit by an unsecured load during suddenchanges in direction, braking or in the event ofan accident. There is an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. byusing tie downs, even if you are using thecargo compartment cover.

! When loading the vehicle, make sure thatyou do not stack the load in the cargo com-partment higher than the lower edge of theside windows. Do not place heavy objectson top of the cargo compartment cover.

The cargo compartment cover is locatedbehind the rear bench seat backrest.

Opening and closing the cargo compart-ment cover

X To open: pull cargo compartment cover:back and clip it into the retainers on the leftand right of the rear door.

X To close: unclip cargo compartmentcover: and guide it forwards until it iscompletely rolled up.

Installing/removing the cargo compart-ment cover

X To remove: make sure that cargo com-partment cover; is rolled up.

X Slide catches: on the left-hand and right-hand sides of cargo compartment cover;towards the center of the vehicle.

X Swing cargo compartment cover; up andout.

X To install: slide catches: towards thecenter of the vehicle.

X Insert cargo compartment cover; intothe recesses in the side trim.

Stowage areas 253

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Page 256: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

X Push down the right-hand and left-handsides of cargo compartment cover; untilit engages.

X Slide catches: in the direction of the sidetrim.

Roof carrier

G WARNINGWhen you load the roof, the center of gravityof the vehicle rises and the driving character-istics change. If you exceed themaximum roofload, the driving characteristics, as well assteering and braking, will be greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.Never exceed the maximum roof load andadjust your driving style.

The roof is not suited for transporting loads.Do not use the roof rails or other accessorieswhich are mounted on the roof.

Features

Cup holder

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf objects in the passenger compartment arestowed incorrectly, they can slide or bethrown around and hit vehicle occupants.There is a risk of injury, particularly in theevent of sudden braking or a sudden changein direction.RAlways stow objects so that they cannot bethrown around in such situations.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets orstowage nets.RClose the lockable stowage spaces whiledriving.RStow and secure objects that are heavy,hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or toolarge in the cargo compartment.

! Only use the cup holders for containers ofthe right size and which have lids. Thedrinks could otherwise spill.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 248).

Cup holder on the center console

X Fold cup holder: all the way up.

Cup holders in the rear compartment

! Ensure that you remove all containersfrom the cup holder in the rear before fold-ing the seat backrest and the seat cushionof the rear bench seat forwards.

: Cup holder

Sun visors

Overview

G WARNINGIf themirror cover of the vanitymirror is foldedup when the vehicle is in motion, you could be

254 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Page 257: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

blinded by incident light. There is a risk of anaccident.Always keep the mirror cover folded downwhile driving.

: Sun visor; Bracket= Mirror cover? Mirror light

Vanity mirror in the sun visor

: Sun visor; Bracket= Mirror cover? Mirror lightMirror lights? will only function if sunvisor: is clipped into bracket;.X Fold down sun visor:.X Fold up mirror cover=.Mirror lights? are switched on automati-cally.

Glare from the side

: Sun visor; Bracket= Mirror cover? Mirror lightX Fold down sun visor:.X Pull sun visor: from bracket;.X Swing sun visor: to the side.

Stowage compartment/ashtray

Stowage compartment/ashtray in thecenter console

G WARNINGIf you engage transmission position D whenremoving the ashtray insert, the vehicle canroll away. There is a risk of an accident.Always switch off the engine first and safe-guard the vehicle against rolling away byapplying the parking brake.

: Cover; Insert

Features 255

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Page 258: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

i On new vehicles, insert; is stored in theglove box. Install the insert before using theashtray.

X To open: press cover: and then releaseit.The ashtray opens.

X To remove the insert:make sure that theengine is switched off and that the parkingbrake has been applied to secure the vehi-cle against rolling away.

X Move the selector lever to N.X Press down cover:.Insert; is released.

X Pull insert; upwards and remove it.X To install the insert: install insert; fromabove.

X Push insert; down.Insert; audibly engages.

X To close: close cover: fully.

i The ashtray is lit up if the low-beam head-lamps are on.

Ashtray in the rear compartment

X To open: fold cover; out in the directionof the arrow.

X To remove the insert: press retaininglug: and pull insert= upwards and out.

X To install the insert: install insert= fromabove.

X To close: close cover; fully.

Cigarette lighter

G WARNINGYou can burn yourself if you touch the hotheating element or the socket of the cigarettelighter.In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:Rthe hot cigarette lighter fallsRa child holds the hot cigarette lighter toobjects, for example

There is a risk of fire and injury.Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.Always make sure that the cigarette lighter isout of reach of children. Never leave childrenunsupervised in the vehicle.

! The 12 V socket in the cigarette lightercan be used for accessories (up to a maxi-mum of 180 W), as long as they have thestandard socket type for cigarette lighters.Note that the socket in the cigarette lightercan be damaged when connecting acces-sories, for example by:Rfrequent insertion and removalRsockets that do not fit correctlyA damaged socket can cause the cigarettelighter to stop working.

X Press in cigarette lighter:.Cigarette lighter: will pop out automati-cally when the heating element is red-hot.

256 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Page 259: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

12 V sockets

General notes

! If you are simultaneously using all threesockets in the vehicle, make sure that youdo not exceed the maximum current drawof 45 A. Otherwise, you will overload thefuses.

The sockets can be used for accessories witha maximum current draw of 180 W (15 A)each, e.g. bulbs or chargers for mobilephones.If you use the sockets for long periods whenthe engine is switched off, the battery maydischarge.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock.

Socket in the front-passenger footwell

X Lift up the cover of the socket.i The cigarette lighter socket can be alsoused (Y page 256). This is the case even ifthe SmartKey has been removed from theignition lock.

Socket in the rear compartment

The socket is located on the center console inthe rear compartment.X Lift up the cover of the socket.

Socket in the cargo compartment

The socket is located in the cargo compart-ment on the left-hand side, when viewed inthe direction of travel, next to the rear door.X Lift up the cover of the socket.

115 V socket

G WARNINGThe 115 V AC power socket operates on highvoltage. Use the 115 VACpower socket in thevehicle with the same caution and care thatyou would take with power sockets at home.Keep fluids away from the 115 V AC powersocket. Do not use liquids or sharp tools toclean the power socket. Keep the cover of the115 V AC power socket closed when not in

Features 257

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Page 260: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

use. Otherwise, you could suffer an electricshock and be seriously or even fatally injured.

G WARNINGAny device that you connect must have a suit-able plug and meet U.S. standards. Never pullat a cable to disconnect a plug from a 115 VAC power socket. Never use a damaged con-nection cable. The 115 V AC power socketmust never be connected to another 115VACpower source. Do not use a converter with anearthed plug for the 115 V AC power socket.This could cause serious injury to you and/orother people.

G WARNINGIf the 115 V AC power socket is damaged orpulled out of the trim, do not use or touch the115VAC power socket. The use of a 115VACpower socket that has been damaged orpulled out of the trim could cause seriousinjury to you or others.

115 V power socket: provides an AC volt-age of 115 V so that small electronic devicescan be connected. These devices, such asgames consoles, chargers and laptops,should not consumemore than amaximumof150 W altogether.Requirements for operation of these devices:Rthe 12 V sockets in the rear compartmentand the cargo compartment are opera-tional (Y page 257).Rthe plug of the electronic device is pluggedinto 115 V power socket:.

Rthe on-board power supply is within a per-missible voltage range.Rthe electronic device's maximum poweroutput does not exceed 150 W.

X Open flap=.X Switch on the ignition.X Insert the plug of the electronic device into115 V power socket:.Indicator lamp; lights up.If indicator lamp; does not light up,please read the section on malfunctions.

X To turnoff:disconnect the plug from115Vpower socket:.Ensure that you do not pull on the cord.

X Close flap=.Possible causes of malfunctions:Rthe on-board power supply is not within apermissible voltage range.Rthe temperature of the DC/AC converter istemporarily too high.Rsome small electronic devices have a con-stant nominal power of less than 150 W,but a very high switch-on current. In thatcase, there is a possibility that these devi-ces will not function properly as 115 Vsocket: is not able to provide a highenough current.

X If indicator lamp; still does not light up,contact a qualified specialist workshop.

mbrace

Important safety notes

! You must have a license agreement toactivate the mbrace service. Ensure thatyour system is activated and ready for use,and press the E MB Info call button toregister. If one of these steps is not carriedout, it may not be possible to activate thesystem.

258 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Page 261: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

If you have questions about the activation,contact one of the following telephone hot-lines:RUSA: Response Center at1-888-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

USA only: shortly after successfully register-ing with the mbrace service a user ID andpassword will be sent to you by post. You canuse this password to log onto thembrace areaunder "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.The mbrace system is available if:Rit has been activated and is operational.Activation requires an available mobilephone network, a valid SIM card and a sub-scription to a security service.Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.Rthe correspondingmobile phone network isavailable for transmitting data to the Cus-tomer Center.

i Determining the location of the vehicle ona map is only possible if there is sufficientGPS reception and the vehicle position canbe forwarded to the Customer Center.

The mbrace systemTo adjust the volume during an mbrace call,proceed as follows:X Press theW orX button on the mul-tifunction steering wheel.

orX Use the COMAND volume control.The mbrace system provides three differentservices:RAutomatic and manual emergency callRRoadside Assistance callRMB Info callUSA only: you can find more information anda description of all available features under

"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

System self-test

G WARNINGA malfunction in the system has been detec-ted if one of the following conditions occurs:Rthe indicator lamp in the SOS button doesnot light up during the system self-diagno-sis.Rthe indicator lamp in theº RoadsideAssistance button does not light up duringthe system self-diagnosis.Rthe indicator lamp in the E informationbutton does not light up during the systemself-diagnosis.Rthe indicator lamp in the SOS button,ºRoadside Assistance button or E infor-mation button continues to be lit red afterthe system self-diagnosis.Rthe TeleTele AidAid inoperativeinoperative or TeleTele AidAidnot activatednot activated message appears on themultifunction display after the system self-diagnosis.

If amalfunction is indicated as outlined above,the system may not operate as expected. Inthe event of an emergency, assistance mustbe summoned by other means.Have the system checked at the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contactthe following service hotlines:RUSA: Response Center at1-888-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

After you have switched on the ignition, thesystem carries out a self-diagnosis.

Features 259

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Page 262: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Emergency call

Important safety notesG WARNINGIf the indicator lamp in the SOS button isflashing continuously and there was no voiceconnection to the Response Center estab-lished, then the mbrace system could not ini-tiate an emergency call (e.g. the relevant cel-lular phone network is not available).The message Call FailedCall Failed appears in themultifunction display for approximately10 seconds.Should this occur, assistance must be sum-moned by other means.

! You must have a license agreement toactivate the mbrace service. Ensure thatyour system is activated and ready for use,and press the E MB Info call button toregister. If one of these steps is not carriedout, it may not be possible to activate thesystem.If you have questions about the activation,contact one of the following telephone hot-lines:RUSA: Response Center at1-888-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

Anemergency call is dialed automatically if anair bag or Emergency Tensioning Device istriggered.

i An automatically dialed mbrace emer-gency call cannot be canceled.

An emergency call can also be initiated man-ually.As soon as the emergency call has been ini-tiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS buttonflashes. The Connecting CallConnecting Call messageappears on the multifunction display.COMAND is muted.Once the connection has been made, theCall ConnectedCall Connected message appears in themultifunction display.

All important information on the emergency isprovided, for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as deter-mined by the GPS system)Rvehicle modelRvehicle colorRvehicle identification numberA short time after the emergency call is initi-ated, a voice connection is automaticallyestablished between the Response Centerand the vehicle occupants. If the vehicleoccupants are able to respond, the ResponseCenter will attempt to obtain more detailedinformation on the emergency.

i If there is no response from the vehicleoccupants, an ambulance is immediatelysent to the vehicle.

Making an emergency callG WARNINGIf you feel at any way in jeopardy when in thevehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, vehi-cle in a dangerous road location), please donot wait for voice contact after you havepressed the SOS button. Carefully leave thevehicle and move to a safe location. TheResponse Center will automatically contactlocal emergency officials with the vehicle'sapproximate location if they receive an auto-matic SOS signal and cannot make voice con-tact with the vehicle occupants.

260 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Page 263: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

X To initiate an emergency call manually:press cover: briefly to open.

X Press SOS button; briefly.The indicator lamp in SOS button;flashes until the emergency call is conclu-ded.

X Wait for the voice connection with theResponse Center.

X After the emergency call, close cover:.

Roadside Assistance button

X Open the stowage compartment under thearmrest (Y page 250).

X Press Roadside Assistance button: formore than two seconds.A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assis-tance Representative is initiated. Indicatorlamp; in Roadside Assistance button:flashes while the call is active. The Con‐Con‐necting Callnecting Call message appears in themultifunction display and COMAND ismuted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐Call Con‐nectednectedmessage appears in themultifunctiondisplay.If a mobile phone network is available andthere is sufficient GPS reception, the mbracesystem transmits data to the Response Cen-ter, for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicleRvehicle identification number

Rvehicle modelRvehicle color

i The COMAND display shows that anmbrace call is active. You can change to thenavigation menu by pressing the NAVI but-ton on COMAND during the call. Voice out-put is not available.

A voice connection is established betweenthe Mercedes-Benz Roadside AssistanceRepresentative and the vehicle occupants.The Mercedes-Benz Roadside AssistanceRepresentative either sends a qualifiedMercedes-Benz technician or makes arrange-ments for your vehicle to be transported tothe nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-ter. You may be charged for services such asrepair work and/or towing. Further detailsare available in your mbrace manual.X Describe the type of assistance needed.i If the indicator lamp in Roadside Assis-tance button: is flashing continuouslyand no voice connection with the Responsecenter has been established, then thembrace systemhas not been able to initiatea Roadside Assistance call (e.g. the rele-vant mobile phone network is not availa-ble). The CallCall FailedFailedmessage appears inthe multifunction display.

X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding COMAND buttonto end a phone call.

i Sign and drive services1: you are notcharged for services such as jump-starting,providing a few gallons of fuel for a fuel tankthat has been run dry or changing a faultytire with the vehicle's own spare wheel.

1 USA only.

Features 261

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Page 264: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

MB Info call button

X Open the stowage compartment under thearmrest (Y page 250).

X Press Roadside Assistance button: formore than two seconds.A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assis-tance Representative is initiated. Indicatorlamp; in Roadside Assistance button:flashes while the call is active. The Con‐Con‐necting Callnecting Call message appears in themultifunction display and COMAND ismuted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐Call Con‐nectednectedmessage appears in themultifunctiondisplay.If a mobile phone network is available andthere is sufficient GPS reception, the mbracesystem transmits data to the Response Cen-ter, for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicleRvehicle identification numberRvehicle modelRvehicle color

i The COMAND display shows that anmbrace call is active. You can change to thenavigation menu by pressing the NAVI but-ton on COMAND during the call. Voice out-put is not available.

A voice connection between the ResponseCenter and the vehicle occupants is estab-lished. You can obtain information on how tooperate your vehicle's systems, on the loca-

tion of the nearest authorizedMercedes-BenzCenter, and on further products and servicesoffered by Mercedes-Benz USA.You can find further information on thembrace system at http://www.mbusa.com2 Log in under "OwnersOnline".

i If the indicator lamp in MB Info call but-ton: is flashing continuously and no voiceconnection with the Response center hasbeen established, then the mbrace systemhas not been able to initiate an MB Info call(e.g. the relevant mobile phone network isnot available). The Call FailedCall Failed messageappears in the multifunction display.

X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding COMAND buttonto end a phone call.

Call priorityWhen service calls are active, e.g. RoadsideAssistance or MB Info calls, an emergencycall can still be initiated. In this case, an emer-gency call will take priority and override allother active calls.The indicator lamp of the respective buttonflashes until the call is ended. An emergencycall can only be terminated by the ResponseCenter. All other calls can be ended by press-ing the~ button on the multifunctionsteering wheel or the correspondingCOMAND button for ending a telephone call.

i When an mbrace call is initiated,COMAND is muted. The mobile phone is nolonger connected to COMAND.However, if you want to use your mobilephone, do so only when the vehicle is sta-tionary and in a safe location.

2 USA only.

262 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Page 265: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Downloading destinations in COMANDDestination Download gives you access to adatabase with over ten million points of inter-est (POIs) which can be downloaded onto thenavigation systemof your vehicle. If you knowthe destination, you can download theaddress or obtain the location of points ofinterest (POIs) or important destinations inthe surrounding area.You are prompted to confirm route guidanceto the address entered.

i For information on the components andoperating principles of COMAND, see theseparate operating instructions.

X Select YesYes using the= or; buttonson COMAND.

X Confirm using the 9 button on COMAND.The system calculates the route and subse-quently starts the route guidance with theaddress entered.

i If you select NoNo, the address can be storedin the address book.

i The Destination Download function isavailable if the corresponding mobilephone network is available and data trans-fer is possible.

Search & Send"Search & Send" is a destination entry ser-vice. For more information on "Search &Send", see the separate operating instruc-tions.

Vehicle remote openingIf you have unintentionally locked your vehi-cle (e.g. the SmartKey is inside the vehicle)and a replacement key is not available:X Contact the following service hotlines:

RUSA: Response Center at1-888-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

You will be asked for your password.X Return to your vehicle at the time arrangedwith the Response Center.

X Press the release button on the door handleof the rear door for at least 20 seconds untilthe indicator lamp in the SOS button(Y page 260) flashes.The Connecting CallConnecting Call message appearson the multifunction display.

Alternatively, the vehicle can be opened viathe Internet in the "Owner's Online" sectionusing your identification number and pass-word3.

i Vehicle remote opening is only possible ifthe correspondingmobile phone network isaccessible.The SOS button flashes and the Connect‐Connect‐ing Calling Call message appears in the multi-function display to confirm that the com-mand for vehicle remote unlocking hasbeen received.If the lock cylinder on the rear door ispressed for longer than 20 seconds beforereceiving authorization for remote unlock-ing from the Response center, you mustwait 15 minutes before you can press thelock cylinder on the rear door again.

Vehicle remote closingThe remote closing feature can be used whenyou have forgotten to lock the vehicle and youare no longer nearby. The vehicle can then belocked by the Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center.The vehicle can be remotely locked withinfour days of the ignition being turned off.X Contact the following service hotlines:

3 USA only.

Features 263

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Page 266: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-tance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-888-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

You will be asked for your PIN.The next time you are inside the vehicle andyou switch on the ignition, the Tele AidTele AidDoors Locked RemotelyDoors Locked Remotely message appearsin the multifunction display.USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can belocked via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"sectionRthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®,Blackberry)

To do this, you will need your identificationnumber and password.

i The vehicle remote closing feature isavailable when the relevant mobile phonenetwork is available and data connection ispossible.

Stolen vehicle recovery serviceIf your vehicle has been stolen:X Contact the police.The police will issue an incident report. Thisreport has a number.

X Forward this number to the Response Cen-ter together with your PIN.The Response Center will then attempt tocovertly contact the mbrace system. TheResponse Center contacts you and thelocal law enforcement authority if the vehi-cle is located. However, only the lawenforcement agency is informed of thelocation of the vehicle.

i If the anti-theft alarm system is active forlonger than 30 seconds, mbrace is auto-matically connected with the CustomerAssistance center.

Remote malfunction diagnosisWith the vehicle remote malfunction diagno-sis (Vehicle Health Check), the CustomerAssistance center can provide improved sup-port for problemswith your vehicle. During anexisting call, vehicle data is transferred to theCustomer Assistance center. The customerservice representative can use the receiveddata to decide what kind of assistance isrequired. You are then, for example, guided tothe nearest Mercedes-Benz Service center ora recovery vehicle is called.If vehicle data needs to be transferred duringan MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call,this is initiated by the Customer Assistancecenter. You will see the Roadside Assis‐Roadside Assis‐tance Connectedtance Connected message in the COMANDdisplay. If the vehicle remote malfunctiondiagnosis is able to be started, the RequestRequestfor vehicle diagnosis received.for vehicle diagnosis received.Start vehicle diagnosis?Start vehicle diagnosis? messageappears in the display.X Press YesYes to confirm the message.X If the Vehicle Diagnosis: PleaseVehicle Diagnosis: Pleasestart ignitionstart ignition message appears: turnthe SmartKey to position 2 in the ignitionlock.

X If the Please follow the instruc‐Please follow the instruc‐tions received by phone and movetions received by phone and moveyour vehicle into a safe positionyour vehicle into a safe positionmessage appears: follow the instructionsof the customer service representative.The message in the display disappears.If you select CancelCancel, the vehicle remotemalfunction diagnosis is canceled com-pletely.The vehicle operating state check begins.Meanwhile, the Vehicle diagnosisVehicle diagnosisactivatedactivated message appears.

When the check is finished, the SendingSendingvehicle diagnosis data... (Voicevehicle diagnosis data... (Voiceconnection may be interrupted dur‐connection may be interrupted dur‐inging datadata transfer)transfer)message appears. Thevehicle data can now be sent to the CustomerAssistance center.

264 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Page 267: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

X Press OKOK to confirm the message.The voice connection with the CustomerAssistance center is terminated.The Vehicle Diagnosis: Transfer‐Vehicle Diagnosis: Transfer‐ring data...ring data... message appears.The vehicle data is sent to the CustomerAssistance center.

Depending on what the customer service rep-resentative agreed with you, the voice con-nection is re-established after the transfer iscomplete. If necessary, you will be contactedat a later time by another means, e.g. by e-mail or phone.Further functions of the vehicle remote mal-function diagnosis include, for example:Rtransfer of service data to the CustomerAssistance center. If a service is overdue,the COMAND display shows a messageabout various special offers at your work-shop.Rmonthly status information e-mail on oillevel, air pressure, maintenance, brakes,etc. If applicable, you will receive informa-tion on special offers in the e-mail.USA only: this information can also becalled up under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

Information on the data stored in the vehicle(Y page 26).Information on Roadside Assistance(Y page 22).

Downloading routesDownloading routes allows you to transferand save predefined routes in the navigationsystem. To do this, an SD memory card mustbe inserted into the COMAND system. If noSD memory card is inserted, you must insertthe card into the card slot on the COMANDsystem before saving.A route can be prepared and sent either by acustomer service representative or via thembrace portal on the Internet. Each route caninclude up to 20way points. When a route hasbeen received by the navigation system, the

'Route name' has been saved to mem‐'Route name' has been saved to mem‐oryory card.card. DoDo youyou wantwant toto startstart routerouteguidance?guidance? message appears on theCOMAND display. The route is saved to theSD memory card.X To start route guidance: select YesYes.An overview of the route is shown in thedisplay.i If you select NoNo, the saved route can becalled up later in the navigation menu.

X Select StartStart.Route guidance is started.

i Downloaded and saved data can be calledup again in COMAND. Further informationcan be found in the "COMAND", "Onlineand Internet services" and "Download des-tination/route" sections.

Speed alertYou can define the upper speed limit, whichmust not be exceeded by the vehicle. If thisselected speed is exceeded by the vehicle, amessage will be sent to the Customer Assis-tance center. The Customer Assistance cen-ter then forwards this information to you. Youcan select the way in which you receive thisinformation beforehand. Possible optionsinclude text message, e-mail or an automatedcall.The data which is sent to the Customer Assis-tance center contains the following informa-tion:Rthe location where the speed limit wasexceededRthe time at which the speed limit wasexceededRthe selected speed limit which was excee-ded

Geo fencingGeo fencing allows you to select areas whichthe vehicle should not enter or leave. You willbe informed if the vehicle crosses the boun-daries of the selected areas. You can select

Features 265

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Page 268: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

the way in which you receive this informationbeforehand. Possible options include textmessage, e-mail or an automated call.The area can be determined as either a circleor a polygon with a maximum of ten corners.You can specify up to ten areas simultane-ously. Different settings are possible for eacharea.USA only: these settings can be called upunder "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info calland inform the customer service representa-tive that you wish to activate geo fencing.Currently inactive areas can be activated bytext message.

Triggering the vehicle alarmWith this function, you can trigger the vehi-cle's panic alarm via text message. An alarmsounds and the exterior lighting flashes.Depending on the setting, the panic alarmlasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards, thealarm switches off.

Brush guard (USA only)

G WARNINGThe brush guard is designed solely to enhancethe appearance of the vehicle and help pro-tect grille and headlamps from minor mis-haps, either on or off road.Since the safety characteristics are limited inthe event of an accident, brush guard are notintended to prevent injury or damage in theevent of an accident. Also observe state andlocal regulations on installation and use.Raise and lower the brush guard in an openspace with plenty of room.

i If you wish to remove the brush guard,contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Garage door opener

General notes

You can use the HomeLink® garage dooropener integrated into the rear-viewmirror tooperate up to three different gate/garagedoor opener systems.

i Certain garage door drives are incompat-ible with the integrated garage dooropener. If you have difficulty programingthe integrated garage door opener, contactan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Youcan also contact the following service hot-lines:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-tance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedesRCanada: Customer Service at1-800-387-0100

i USA only:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful inter-ference, and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

i Canada only:This device complies with RSS-210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful inter-ference, and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

266 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Page 269: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen you operate or program the garage doorwith the integrated garage door opener, per-sons in the range of movement of the garagedoor can become trapped or struck by thegarage door. There is a risk of injury.When using the integrated garage dooropener, always make sure that nobody iswithin the range of movement of the garagedoor.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

When programming a garage door opener,park the vehicle outside the garage. Do notrun the engine while programming.

Programming the remote control

ProgrammingPay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 267).

Integrated remote control in the rear-view mirror: Indicator lamp;=? Transmitter buttonsA Garage door remote controlB Transmitter button on the garage

door remote control

Garage door remote controlA is not part ofthe garage door opener.i To achieve the best result, insert new bat-teries in garage door remote controlA ofyour garage door drive before program-ming.

X Delete the memory of the integratedremote control (Y page 270) before pro-gramming it for the first time.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 133).

X Press and hold transmitter button;,=or?.After a short time, indicator lamp: willstart flashing. It flashes approximatelyonce per second.i Indicator lamp: flashes immediatelythe first time that the transmitter button isprogrammed. If this transmitter button hasalready been programmed, indicatorlamp: will only start flashing at a rate ofonce a second after 20 seconds haveelapsed.

X Continue to hold the transmitter button.X Point transmitter buttonB of garage doorremote controlA towards the transmitterbuttons on the rear-view mirror at a dis-tance of 2 to 12 inches (5 to 30 cm).i The distance between garage doorremote controlA and the integratedgarage door opener depends on the systemof the garage door drive. Several attemptsmight be necessary. You should test everyposition for at least 20 seconds before try-ing another position.

X Keep transmitter buttonB on garage doorremote controlA pressed until indicatorlamp: starts to flash rapidly.The programming has been successful ifindicator lamp: flashes rapidly.

X Release transmitter buttons;,= or?on the integrated remote control and trans-mitter buttonB on the garage door remotecontrol.

Features 267

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Page 270: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

If indicator lamp: goes out after approx-imately 20 seconds and has not flashed rap-idly:X Release transmitter buttons;,= or?on the integrated remote control and trans-mitter buttonB on the garage door remotecontrol.

X Repeat the procedure for the other trans-mitter buttons. When doing so, vary thedistance between the garage door'sremote control and the transmitter buttonsin the rear-view mirror.i If the garage door system works with arolling code, you must synchronize theremote control integrated in the rear-viewmirror with the garage door systemreceiver after programming.You will find further information in thegarage door opening system's operatinginstructions, e.g. the sections on "Synchro-nizing the transmitter" or "Registering anew transmitter". You can also call the hot-line mentioned above.

Synchronizing the rolling code

Integrated remote control in the rear-view mirror: Indicator lamp;=? Transmitter buttonsA Garage door remote controlB Transmitter button on the garage

door remote controlYour vehicle must be within reach of thegarage door or gate opener drive. Make surethat neither your vehicle nor any persons/

objects are present within the sweep of thedoor or gate.Observe the safety notes when performingthe rolling code synchronization(Y page 267).X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 133).

X Press the programming button of the dooror gate drive (see the door or gate driveoperating instructions, e.g. under "Pro-gramming additional remote controls").i You now have 30 seconds to initiate thenext step.

X Press previously programmed button;,= or? on the integrated garage dooropener until the door closes.The rolling code synchronization is thencomplete.

Notes on programming the remote con-trolCanadian radio frequency laws require a"break" (or interruption) of the transmissionsignals after broadcasting for a few seconds.Therefore, these signals may not last longenough for the integrated remote control torecognize the signal during programming.Comparable with Canadian law, Americangarage door openers also have a built-in"interruption".If you live in Canada or have difficulties pro-gramming the garage door opener (regard-less of where you live) when using the pro-gramming steps, proceed as follows:

268 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Page 271: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Integrated remote control in the rear-view mirror: Indicator lamp;=? Transmitter buttonsA Garage door remote controlB Transmitter button on the garage

door remote controlX Keep the transmitter button (;,= or?)depressed until the integrated remote con-trol has been set up successfully.

X Simultaneously press transmitter buttonB on the garage door remote control andhold for 2 seconds. Then let go for 2 sec-onds, press again and hold for 2 seconds.

X Repeat this sequence on transmitter but-tonB of the garage door remote controluntil the frequency signal has been saved.

X If the setup procedure is successful, indi-cator lamp: flashes once slowly and goesout after a few seconds.

X Continue with the other programmingsteps (see above).

Problems when programming

Integrated remote control in the rear-view mirror: Indicator lamp;=? Transmitter buttonsA Garage door remote controlB Transmitter button on the garage

door remote controlIf you have problems when programming theintegrated remote control, please note thefollowing:RCheck the transmitter frequency of garagedoor remote controlA (which can usuallybe found on the back of the remote con-trol).The integrated remote control is compati-ble with devices that have units which oper-ate in the frequency range of 280 to390 MHz.Rreplace the batteries in garage door remotecontrolA. This increases the probability ofgarage door remote controlA sending astrong and precise signal to the integratedremote control on the rear-view mirror.RWhen programming, hold garage doorremote controlA at varying distances andangles from the transmitter button whichyou are programming. Try various angles ata distance between 2 and 12 inches (5 to30 cm) or at the same angle but at varyingdistances.RIf there is another garage door remote con-trol for the same device, perform the pro-gramming steps again using that garagedoor opener. Before performing thesesteps, make sure that new batteries have

Features 269

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Page 272: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

been installed in the garage door remotecontrol.RAlign the antenna cable of the garage dooropener unit. This can improve signal trans-mission.

Opening/closing the garage door

: Indicator lamp;=? Transmitter buttonsA Garage door remote controlB Transmitter button on the garage

door remote controlOnce programmed, the integrated remotecontrol will assume the function of the garagedoor system's remote control. Please alsoread the operating instructions for the garagedoor system.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2(Y page 133) in the ignition lock.

X Press transmitter button;,= or? onthe integrated remote control in the rear-view mirror that is programmed to operatethe garage door.Garage door system with fixed code: indi-cator lamp: lights up continuously.Garage door system with rolling code: indi-cator lamp: flashes briefly and then lightsup for approximately two seconds. This isrepeated for up to 20 seconds.i The transmitter will transmit a signal foras long as the transmitter button is beingpressed. The transmission will be haltedafter a maximum of 20 seconds and indi-

cator lamp: will flash. Press the trans-mitter button again, if necessary.

Clearing the remote control memory

: Indicator lamp;=? Transmitter buttonsA Garage door remote controlB Transmitter button on the garage

door remote controlX Turn the SmartKey to position 2(Y page 133) in the ignition lock.

X Press and hold transmitter buttons;and? for approximately 20 seconds untilindicator lamp: flashes rapidly.The memory is cleared.

i Make sure that you clear the remote con-trol memory before selling the vehicle.

Floormat on the driver's side

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

270 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Page 273: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

X Slide the seat backwards.X To install: place the floormat in the foot-well.

X Press studs: onto retainers;.X To remove: pull the floormat out of retain-ers;.

X Remove the floormat.

Features 271

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Page 274: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

272

Page 275: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Useful information ............................ 274Engine compartment ........................ 274Maintenance ...................................... 279Care .................................................... 281

273

Maintenance

andcare

Page 276: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops: (Y page 24).

Engine compartment

Hood

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the hood is unlatched, it may open up whenthe vehicle is in motion and block your view.There is a risk of an accident.Never unlatch the hood while driving.

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment may be very hot, e.g. the drive systemand radiator. Working in the engine compart-ment poses a risk of injury.If possible, let the drive system cool down andonly touch the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine is over-heated or when there is a fire in the enginecompartment could expose you to hot gasesor other service products. There is a risk ofinjury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

G WARNINGThe ignition system and the fuel injection sys-tem work under high voltage. If you touchcomponents which are under voltage, youcould get an electric shock. There is a risk ofinjury.Never touch components of the ignition sys-tem or fuel injection system when the ignitionis switched on.

G WARNINGThe engine compartment contains movingcomponents. Certain components, such asthe radiator fan, may continue to run or startagain suddenly when the ignition is off. Thereis a risk of injury.If you need to do any work inside the enginecompartment:Rswitch off the ignitionRnever reach into the area where there is arisk of danger from moving components,such as the fan rotation areaRremove jewelry and watchesRkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-ple, away from moving parts

G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set inmotion, you can be injured bythe wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.

! Make sure that the windshield wipers arenot folded away from the windshield. Youcould otherwise damage the windshieldwipers or the hood.

Do not touch the following when the ignitionis switched on:Rignition coilsRspark plug connectorsRtest socket

274 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

Page 277: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Opening the hood

The release lever on the hood is in the footwellon the left-hand side of the vehicle whenviewed in the direction of travel.X Make sure that the windshield wipers areswitched off.

X Pull release lever: on the hood.The hood is released.

X Lift the hood slightly.X Push the handle of hood catch; in thedirection of the arrow and lift the hood.

Closing the hood

G WARNINGIf the hood is unlatched, it may open up whenthe vehicle is in motion and block your view.There is a risk of an accident.Never unlatch the hood while driving.

X Lower the hood and let it fall from a heightof approximately 8 inches (20 cm).

X Check that the hood has engaged properly.If the hood can be raised slightly, it is notproperly engaged. Open it again and closeit with a little more force.

Engine oil

Notes on the oil levelDepending on your driving style, the vehicleconsumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per600 miles (1000 km). The oil consumptionmay be higher than this when the vehicle isnew or if you frequently drive at high enginespeeds.

Checking the oil level using the oil dip-stick

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

Example: oil dipstick

Engine compartment 275

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Page 278: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

When checking the oil level:Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.Rthe engine should be switched off forapproximately five minutes if the engine isat normal operating temperature.Rthe engine should be switched off for atleast 30 minutes if the engine is not atoperating temperature, e.g. if you only startthe engine briefly.

X Pull oil dipstick: out of the dipstick guidetube.

X Wipe off oil dipstick:.X Slowly slide oil dipstick: into the guidetube to the stop, and take it out again.If the level is between MIN mark= andMAX mark;, the oil level is correct.

X Add oil if necessary.

Checking the oil level using the on-board computer

! Do not add toomuch oil. adding toomuchengine oil can result in damage to theengine or to the catalytic converter. Haveexcess engine oil siphoned off.

G 65 AMG: the oil level can be checked usingthe on-board computer only.On all other models, the oil dipstick must beused to check the engine oil level.When checking the oil level:Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.Rthe engine should be switched off forapproximately five minutes if the engine isat normal operating temperature.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock.

X Press the9or:button on the steer-ing wheel to select the following message:

The measurement takes a few seconds. Youwill see one of the following messages in themultifunction display:REngine Oil Level OKEngine Oil Level OKRAdd 1.0 qtAdd 1.0 qt (Canada: 1.0 liter1.0 liter) totoreach maximum oil levelreach maximum oil levelRAdd 1.5 qtsAdd 1.5 qts (Canada: 1.5 liters1.5 liters) totoreach maximum oil levelreach maximum oil levelRAddAdd 2.0 qts.2.0 qts. (Canada: 2.0 liters2.0 liters) totoreach maximum oil levelreach maximum oil level

X Add oil if necessary.If the engine is at normal operating tempera-ture and the Engine oil Reduce oilEngine oil Reduce oillevellevel display appears, toomuch oil has beenadded.X Have excess oil siphoned off.If the Switch ignition on to checkSwitch ignition on to checkengine oil levelengine oil level message appears:X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 133).

If the Observe waiting timeObserve waiting time messageappears:X If the engine is at normal operating tem-perature: repeat the measurement afterabout five minutes.

X If the engine is not at normal operatingtemperature: e.g. if the engine was onlystarted briefly, repeat the measurementafter approximately 30 minutes.

If the Engine oil level Not whenEngine oil level Not whenengine onengine on message appears:

276 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

Page 279: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

X Switch off the engine.X If the engine is at normal operating tem-perature: wait about five minutes beforecarrying out the measurement.

X If the engine is not at normal operatingtemperature: e.g. if the engine was onlystarted briefly, wait approximately30 minutes before carrying out the meas-urement.

i If you wish to cancel the measurement,press the9 or: button on the mul-tifunction steering wheel.

Adding engine oil

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGIf engine oil comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next tothe filler neck. Let the engine cool down andthoroughly clean the engine oil off the com-ponents before starting the engine.

H Environmental noteWhen adding oil, take care not to spill any. Ifoil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful tothe environment.

! Only use engine oils and oil filters thathave been approved for vehicles with a ser-vice system. You can obtain a list of theengine oils and oil filters tested andapproved in accordance with theMercedes-Benz Specifications for Service

Products at any Mercedes-Benz Servicecenter.Damage to the engine or exhaust system iscaused by the following:Rusing engine oils and oil filters that havenot been specifically approved for theservice systemRreplacing engine oil and oil filters afterthe interval for replacement specified bythe service system has been exceededRusing engine oil additives.

! Do not add too much oil. If the oil level isabove the "max" mark on the dipstick, toomuch oil has been added. This can lead todamage to the engine or the catalytic con-verter. Have excess oil siphoned off.

Example: engine oil capX Turn cap: counter-clockwise and removeit.

X Add the amount of oil required.Observe the specifications in the on-boardcomputer when doing so or fill carefully to themaximum mark on the oil dipstick.Further information on engine oil(Y page 340).i The difference between the minimummark and the maximum mark on the oildipstick is approximately 2.1 US qt (2 l).

X Replace cap: on the filler neck andtighten clockwise.Ensure that the cap locks into placesecurely.

Engine compartment 277

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Page 280: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Additional service products

Checking coolant level

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGThe engine cooling system is pressurized, par-ticularly when the engine is warm. Whenopening the cap, you could be scalded by hotcoolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury.Let the engine cool down before opening thecap. Wear eye and hand protection whenopening the cap. Open the cap slowly half aturn to allow pressure to escape.

X Park the vehicle on a level surface.Only check the coolant level when the vehi-cle is on a level surface and the engine hascooled down.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2(Y page 133) in the ignition lock.

X Check the coolant temperature display inthe instrument cluster.The coolant temperature must be below158 ‡ (70 †).

X Slowly turn cap: half a turn counter-clockwise to allow excess pressure toescape.

X Turn cap: further counter-clockwise andremove it.If the coolant is at the level ofmarker bar=in the filler neck when cold, there is enoughcoolant in coolant expansion tank;.If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in(1.5 cm) above marker bar= in the fillerneck when warm, there is enough coolantin coolant expansion tank;.

X If necessary, add coolant that has been tes-ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Replace cap: and turn it clockwise as faras it will go.

For further information on coolant, see(Y page 342).

Adding washer fluid to the windshieldwasher system/headlamp cleaningsystem

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate could ignite ifit comes into contact with hot engine compo-nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk offire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

278 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

Page 281: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Example: washer fluid reservoirX To open: pull cap: upwards by the tab.X Add the premixed washer fluid.X To close: press cap: onto the filler neckuntil it engages.

On vehicles with the headlamp cleaning sys-tem, the recommended minimum washerfluid level is 0.92 US gal (3.5 liters). On vehi-cles without the headlamp cleaning system,the recommended minimum washer fluidlevel is 0.26 US gal (1 liter). If the washer fluidlevel drops below the recommended mini-mum fluid level of 0.26 US gal (1 liter), a mes-sage appears in the multifunction displayprompting you to add washer fluid(Y page 234).Further information on windshield washerfluid/antifreeze (Y page 343).

Brake fluid level

! If you notice that the brake fluid level inthe brake fluid reservoir has fallen to theMIN mark or less, check the brake systemimmediately for leaks. Also check the thick-ness of the brake linings. Visit a qualifiedspecialist workshop immediately.Do not add brake fluid. This does not cor-rect the error.

Only check the brake fluid level when thevehicle is on a level surface.If the brake fluid level is between MINmark: and MAX mark; on the brake fluidreservoir, it is correct.

Maintenance

Service interval display

Service messagesInformation on the type of service and serviceintervals (see the separate MaintenanceBooklet).You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or athttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).The ASSYST service interval display informsyou of the next service due date.If a service due date has been exceeded, youalso hear a warning tone.The multifunction display shows a servicemessage for several seconds, e.g.:Service A in 99999 MilesService A in 99999 MilesService A Due NowService A Due NowService A Exceeded By 99999 MilesService A Exceeded By 99999 Miles

Maintenance 279

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Page 282: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Maintaining the time-dependent serviceschedule:X Before disconnecting the battery, notedown the service due date displayed.

or:X After reconnecting the battery, subtractthe battery disconnection periods from theservice date shown on the display.i The service interval display should not beconfused with the4 engine oil level dis-play.

The symbol and the letter indicate which typeof service is due:¯ Minor service AA± Major service BBThe ASSYST service interval display does nottake into account any periods of time duringwhich the battery is disconnected.

Hiding a service messageX To hide the service message, press the% back button on the multifunctionsteering wheel (Y page 33)(Y page 199).

Displaying service messagesUse the buttons on themultifunction steeringwheel.X Switch on the ignition.X Press= or; to select the standarddisplay menu on the steering wheel(Y page 200).

X Press9 or: to select the serviceinterval display.The¯ or± service symbol and theservice due date are displayed.

Points to rememberThe specifiedmaintenance interval takes onlythe normal operation of the vehicle intoaccount. Under arduous operating conditionsor increased load on the vehicle, mainte-nance work must be carried out more fre-quently, for example:Rregular city driving with frequent intermedi-ate stopsRif the vehicle is primarily used to travelshort distancesRuse in mountainous terrain or on poor roadsurfacesRif the engine is often left idling for long peri-ods

Under these or similar conditions, have, forexample, the air filter, engine oil and oil filterreplaced or changed more frequently. Underarduous operating conditions, the tires mustbe checked more often. Further informationcan be obtained at a qualified specialist work-shop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-ter.

Fuel/water separator

H Environmental noteDispose of service products in an environ-mentally responsible manner.

! If you continue driving without having thefuel/water separator serviced, this couldcause damage to the engine. Any resultingdamage is not covered by the warranty.

If the fuel/water separator needs servicing,the following message appears in the multi-function display:

You will also hear a brief warning tone.

280 MaintenanceMaintenance

andcare

Page 283: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop assoon as possible.

Care

General notes

G WARNINGMany cleaning products can be hazardous.Some are poisonous, others are flammable.Always follow the instructions on the particu-lar container. Always open your vehicle'sdoors or windows when cleaning the inside.Never use fluids or solvents that are notdesigned for cleaning your vehicle.Always lock away cleaning products and keepthem out of reach of children.

! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use anyof the following:Rdry, rough or hard clothsRabrasive cleaning agentsRsolventsRcleaning agents containing solventsDo not scrub.Do not touch the surfaces or protectivefilms with hard objects, e.g. a ring or icescraper. You could otherwise scratch ordamage the surfaces and protective film.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes after clean-ing. Braking heats the brake discs and thebrake pads/linings, thus drying them. Thevehicle can then be parked.

H Environmental noteDispose of empty packaging and cleaningcloths in an environmentally responsibleman-ner.

Regular care of your vehicle is a condition forretaining the quality in the long term.Use care products and cleaning agents rec-ommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Exterior care

Automatic car wash

G WARNINGBraking efficiency is reduced after washingthe vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.After the vehicle has been washed, brakecarefully while paying attention to the trafficconditions until full braking power is restored.

! Never clean your vehicle in a TouchlessAutomatic Car Wash as these use specialcleaning agents. These cleaning agents candamage the paintwork or plastic parts.

! Make sure that the automatic car wash issuitable for the size of the vehicle. Fold inthe exterior mirrors before the vehicle iswashed. The exterior mirrors could other-wise be damaged.

! Make sure that the automatic transmis-sion is in position N when washing yourvehicle in a tow-through car wash. The vehi-cle could be damaged if the transmission isin another position.

! Make sure that:Rthe side windows and sliding sunroof areclosed completely.Rthe blower for the ventilation/heating isswitched off (airflow control is turned toposition 0/theà andÁ buttonsare switched off).Rthe windshield wiper switch is at position0.

The vehicle could otherwise be damaged.You can wash the vehicle in an automatic carwash from the very start.If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it beforecleaning it in an automatic car wash.

Care 281

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Page 284: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

After using an automatic car wash, wipe offwax from the windshield and the wiperblades. This will prevent smears and reducewiping noises caused by residue on the wind-shield.

Washing by handIn some countries, washing by hand is onlyallowed at specially equipped washing bays.Observe the legal requirements in all coun-tries concerned.When using the vehicle in winter, remove alltraces of road salt deposits carefully and assoon as possible.When washing the vehicle underbody, alsoclean the inside of the wheels.X Do not use hot water and do not wash thevehicle in direct sunlight.

X Use a soft sponge to clean.X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a carshampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with agentle jet of water.

X Do not point the water jet directly towardsthe air inlets.

X Use plenty of water and rinse out thesponge frequently.

X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and drythoroughly with a chamois.

X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on thepaintwork.

Power washers

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components. Compo-nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-edly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replaced imme-diately.

! Always maintain a distance of at least11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and thepower washer nozzle. Information aboutthe correct distance is available from theequipment manufacturer.Move the power washer nozzle aroundwhen cleaning your vehicle.Do not aim directly at any of the following:RtiresRdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.Relectrical componentsRbatteryRconnectorsRlightsRsealsRtrimRventilation slotsDamaged seals or electrical componentscan lead to leaks or failures.

Cleaning the wheels

! Donot use acidicwheel cleaning productsto remove brake dust. This could damagewheel bolts and brake components.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes after clean-ing. Braking heats the brake discs and thebrake pads/linings, thus drying them. Thevehicle can then be parked.

Cleaning the paintwork

! Do not affix:RstickersRfilmsRmagnetic plates or similar itemsto painted surfaces. You could otherwisedamage the paintwork.

282 CareMaintenance

andcare

Page 285: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affectedby corrosion and damage caused by inade-quate care cannot always be completelyrepaired. In such cases, visit a qualified spe-cialist workshop.X Remove dirt immediately, where possible,while avoiding rubbing too hard.

X Soak insect remains with insect removerand rinse off the treated areas afterwards.

X Soak bird droppings with water and rinseoff the treated areas afterwards.

X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin,oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gentlywith a cloth soaked in petroleum ether orlighter fluid.

X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.X Use silicone remover to remove wax.If water no longer forms "beads" on the paintsurface, use the paint care products recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.This is the case approximately every three tofive months, depending on the climate con-ditions and the care product used.If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or ifthe paint has become dull, the paint cleanerrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz should be used.Do not use these care products in the sun oron the hood while the hood is hot.X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MBTouch-Up Stick, to correct smaller areas ofpaint damage quickly and provisionally.

Matte finish care

! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloywheels. Polishing causes the finish toshine.

! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or pol-ishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g.wax. These products are only suitable forhigh-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicleswith matte finish leads to considerable sur-face damage (shiny, spotted areas).

Always have paintwork repairs carried outat a qualified specialist workshop.

! Do not use wash programs with a hot waxtreatment under any circumstances.

If your vehicle has a clear matte finish,observe the following instructions in order toavoid damage to the paintwork due to incor-rect care.These notes also apply to light alloy wheelswith a clear matte finish.

i The vehicle should preferably be washedby hand using a soft sponge, car shampooand plenty of water.

i Use only insect remover and car shampoofrom the range of recommended andapproved Mercedes-Benz care products.

Cleaning the windows

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-vents to clean the inside of thewindows. Donot touch the insides of the windows withhard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring.There is otherwise a risk of damaging thewindows.

! Clean the water drainage channels of thewindshield and the rear window at regularintervals. Deposits such as leaves, petalsand pollen may under certain circumstan-ces prevent water from draining away. Thiscan lead to corrosion damage and damageto electronic components.

X Clean the inside and outside of the win-dows with a damp cloth and a cleaning

Care 283

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Page 286: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

product that is recommended andapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning wiper blades

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise,the wiper blade could be damaged.

! Do not clean wiper blades too often anddo not rub them too hard. Otherwise, thegraphite coating could be damaged. Thiscould cause wiper noise.

! Hold the wiper arm securely when foldingback. The windshield could be damaged ifthe wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms away fromthe windshield.

X Carefully clean the wiper blades with adamp cloth.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms back againbefore switching on the ignition.

Cleaning the headlamps

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaningcloths which are suitable for plastic head-lamp lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents orcleaning cloths could scratch or damagethe plastic headlamp lenses.

X Clean the headlamp lenses with a dampsponge and a mild cleaning agent, e.g.Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaningcloths.

Cleaning the sensors

! If you clean the sensors with a powerwasher, make sure that you keep a dis-tance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) betweenthe vehicle and the power washer nozzle.Information about the correct distance isavailable from the equipment manufac-turer.

X Clean sensors: of the driving systemswith water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.

Cleaning the rear view camera

! Do not clean the camera lens and the areaaround the rear view camera with a powerwasher.

284 CareMaintenance

andcare

Page 287: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

X Use clear water and a soft cloth to cleancamera lens:.

Cleaning chrome parts

! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-based cleaning agents such as sanitarycleansers or wheel cleaners.

Impurities combined with the effects of roadgrit and corrosive environmental factors maycause flash rust to form on the surface. Youcan restore the original shine of the chromeparts by cleaning them regularly, especially inwinter and after washing.X Clean the chrome parts with a chrome careproduct tested and approved byMercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the trailer coupling

H Environmental noteDispose of rags soaked in oil and grease in anenvironmentally responsible manner.

! Do not clean the ball coupling with apower washer. Do not use solvents.

! Please note the care instructions in thetrailer coupling manufacturer's operatinginstructions.

Ball coupling: must be cleaned if itbecomes dirty or corroded.X After cleaning, lightly oil or grease ball cou-pling:.

X Check that the vehicle's trailer tow hitch isworking properly.

i You can also have the maintenance workon the ball coupling and the trailer towhitchcarried out by a qualified specialist work-shop.

Interior care

Cleaning the display

! For cleaning, do not use any of the fol-lowing:Ralcohol-based thinner or gasolineRabrasive cleaning agentsRcommercially-available household clean-ing agents

These may damage the display surface. Donot put pressure on the display surfacewhen cleaning. This could lead to irrepara-ble damage to the display.

X Before cleaning the display, make sure thatit is switched off and has cooled down.

X Clean the display surface using a commer-cially available microfiber cloth andTFT/LCD display cleaner.

X Dry the display surface using a dry micro-fiber cloth.

Care 285

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Page 288: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Cleaning the plastic trim

G WARNINGCare products and cleaning agents containingsolvents cause surfaces in the cockpit tobecome porous. As a result, plastic parts maycome loose in the event of air bag deploy-ment. There is a risk of injury.Do not use any care products and cleaningagents to clean the cockpit.

! Do not affix the following to plastic surfa-ces:RstickersRfilmsRscented oil bottles or similar itemsYou can otherwise damage the plastic.

! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellentor sunscreen to come into contact with theplastic trim. This maintains the high-qualitylook of the surfaces.

X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-freecloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-ucts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.The surface may change color temporarily.Wait until the surface is dry again.

Cleaning the steering wheel and gear orselector leverX Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or useleather care agents that have been recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning genuine wood and trim strips

! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agentssuch as tar remover, wheel cleaners, pol-ishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk ofdamaging the surface.

! Do not use chrome polish for trim strips.The trim strips have a chrome look but aremostly made of anodized aluminum andcan lose their shine if chrome polish is

used. Use a damp, lint-free cloth insteadwhen cleaning the trim strips.If the chrome-plated trim strips are verydirty, you can use a chrome polish. If youare unsure as to whether the trim strips arechrome-plated or not, consult an author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

X Wipe the wooden trim and trim strips with adamp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibercloth.

X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaningproducts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the seat covers

General notes! Do not usemicrofiber cloths to clean gen-uine leather, artificial leather or DINAMICAcovers. If used often, these can damage thecover.

i Note that regular care is essential toensure that the appearance and comfort ofthe covers is retained over time.

Genuine leather seat covers! To retain the natural appearance of theleather, observe the following cleaninginstructions:RClean genuine leather covers carefullywith a damp cloth and then wipe the cov-ers down with a dry cloth.RMake sure that the leather does notbecome soaked. It may otherwisebecome rough and cracked.ROnly use leather care agents that havebeen tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain these from a quali-fied specialist workshop.

Leather is a natural product.It exhibits natural surface characteristics, forexample:

286 CareMaintenance

andcare

Page 289: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Rdifferences in the textureRsigns of stretching and markingRslight nuances of colorThese are characteristics of leather and notmaterial defects.

Seat covers of other materials! Observe the following when cleaning:RClean artificial leather coverswith a clothmoistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).RClean cloth covers with a microfibercloth moistened with a solution contain-ing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liq-uid). Rub carefully and alwayswipe entireseat sections to avoid leaving visiblelines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards.Cleaning results depend on the type ofdirt and how long it has been there.RClean Alcantara® covers with a dampcloth. Make sure that you wipe entireseat sections to avoid leaving visiblelines.

Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNINGSeat belts can become severely weakened ifbleached or dyed. This could cause the seatbelts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event ofan accident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or fatal injury.Never bleach or dye the seat belts.

! Donot clean the seat belts using chemicalcleaning agents. Do not dry the seat beltsby heating at temperatures above 176 ‡(80 †) or in direct sunlight.

X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solu-tion.

Cleaning the headliner and carpetsX Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brushor dry shampoo.

X Carpets: use the carpet and textile clean-ing agents recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

Care 287

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Page 290: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

288

Page 291: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Useful information ............................ 290Where will I find...? ........................... 290Flat tire .............................................. 292Battery (vehicle) ................................ 292Jump-starting .................................... 296Towing and tow-starting .................. 298Fuses .................................................. 301

289

Roadside

Assistance

Page 292: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops: (Y page 24).

Where will I find...?

Warning triangle

Setting up the warning triangle

: Press-stud; Reflectors= FeetX Fold feet= down and out to the side.X Pull side reflectors; up to form a triangleand lock them at the top using press-stud:.

First-aid kiti Check the expiration date on the first-aidkit at least once a year. Replace the con-tents if necessary, and replace missingitems.

Vehicle tool kit

General notes

i When they leave the factory, vehicles arenot equipped with the tools needed tochange a wheel, such as a jack or lugwrench. Some tools for changing a wheelare specific to the vehicle. To obtain toolsapproved for your vehicle, contact a quali-fied specialist workshop.

The vehicle tool kit contains:Rvehicle tool kit bag with:

- fuse extractor- an Allen key, e.g. to operate the slidingroof manually in an emergency

- a pump lever for the vehicle jack- a screwdriver- Lug wrenchRjack

Vehicle tool kit

The vehicle tool kit is under the cover in thefootwell in front of the rear bench seat.X Fold cover: to the side.X Pull vehicle tool kit; out by the tab.

Jack

! Make sure that, while installing the vehi-cle jack, there are no cables on the holder,in order to avoid them becoming trapped.

290 Where will I find...?Roadside

Assistance

Page 293: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Jack; is located under the rear bench seaton the right-hand side when viewed in thedirection of travel.X Fold rear bench seat (Y page 252) for-wards.

X Open cover:.X Pull bar= upwards and detach fromtab?.

X Remove jack;.

Exterior spare wheel bracket

General notes

G WARNINGIf the spare tire is more than 6 years old or isnot the same model as the regular tires, havethe spare tire replaced with a new tire at thenearest Mercedes-Benz Center.Never operate the vehicle with more than onespare wheel mounted.

G WARNINGThewheel or tire size as well as the tire type ofthe spare wheel or emergency spare wheeland the wheel to be replaced may differ.Mounting an emergency spare wheel mayseverely impair the driving characteristics.There is a risk of an accident.To avoid hazardous situations:Radapt your driving style accordingly anddrive carefully.Rnever mount more than one spare wheel oremergency spare wheel that differs in size.

Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency sparewheel of a different size briefly.Rdo not switch ESP® off.Rhave a spare wheel or emergency sparewheel of a different size replaced at thenearest qualified specialist workshop.Observe that the wheel and tire dimensionsas well as the tire type must be correct.

i When changing a wheel, you should alsoobserve the safety notes in the "Flat tire"section (Y page 327).

The spare wheel is on the outer side of therear door.

Stainless-steel spare hub cap

X Take the screwdriver out of the vehicle toolkit (Y page 290).

X Open the lock on cover ring: with screw-driver= or a similar tool.

X Fold tab; down.

X Pull cover ring: apart and remove it.X Pull off trim panel?.

Where will I find...? 291

Roadside

Assistance

Z

Page 294: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

i When re-installing trim panel?, makesure that retainerA engages in recessB.

Removing the spare wheelThe sparewheel is heavy. Take particular noteof this when removing the spare wheel.

X Remove wheel nuts:.X Remove the spare wheel.

Mounting the wheelAfter changing a wheel:X Repair or replace the damaged wheel assoon as possible and secure the sparewheel in place again.

X Secure the damaged wheel on the sparewheel bracket with wheel nuts:. Whendoing so, make sure that the wheel cannotcome loose.

X When re-installing trim panel?, make surethat retainerB engages in recessA(Y page 291).

X Make sure that tab; is below when re-installing cover ring: (Y page 291).

X For safety reasons, regularly check toensure that the wheel is securely fastened.

Flat tire

Preparing the vehicleX Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground, as far away as possible fromtraffic.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 104).

X Apply the parking brake.X Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position.

X Move the selector lever to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.The steering wheel lock stays active for aslong as the SmartKey is removed.

X All occupants must get out of the vehicle.Make sure that they are not endangered asthey do so.

X Make sure that no one is near the dangerarea while a wheel is being changed. Any-one who is not directly assisting in thewheel change should, for example, standbehind the barrier.

X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traf-fic conditions when doing so.

X Close the driver's door.

Battery (vehicle)

Important safety notesSpecial tools and expert knowledge arerequired when working on the battery, e.g.removal and installation. You should there-fore have all work involving the battery car-ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

292 Battery (vehicle)Roadside

Assistance

Page 295: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

G WARNINGWork carried out incorrectly on the batterycan lead, for example, to a short circuit andthus damage the vehicle electronics. This canlead to function restrictions applying tosafety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting sys-tem, ABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP®(Electronic Stability Program). The operatingsafety of your vehicle may be restricted. Youcould lose control of the vehicle, for example:RbrakingRin the event of abrupt steering maneuverand/or when the vehicle's speed is notadapted to the road conditions

There is a risk of an accident.In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci-dent, contact a qualified specialist workshopimmediately. Do not drive any further. Youshould have all work involving the battery car-ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

If ABS malfunctions, the wheels can lock dur-ing braking. This limits the steerability of thevehicle when braking and may increase thebraking distance.If ESP® malfunctions, the vehicle will not bestabilized if it starts to skid or awheel starts tospin.

i For further information about ABS andESP®, see (Y page 62) and (Y page 63).

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produ-ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs orsparks are created, the hydrogen gas canignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of aconnected battery does not come into con-tact with vehicle parts.RNever placemetal objects or tools on a bat-tery.RIt is important that you observe the descri-bed order of the battery terminals whenconnecting and disconnecting a battery.

RWhen jump-starting, make sure that thebattery poles with identical polarity areconnected.RIt is particularly important to observe thedescribed order when connecting and dis-connecting the jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the batteryterminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGElectrostatic build-up can lead to the creationof sparks, which could ignite the highly explo-sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of anexplosion.Before handling the battery, touch the vehiclebody to remove any existing electrostaticbuild-up.

The highly flammable gasmixture formswhencharging the battery as well as when jump-starting.Always make sure that neither you nor thebattery is electrostatically charged. A build-up of electrostatic charge can be caused, forexample:Rby wearing clothing made from syntheticfibersRdue to friction between clothing and seatsRif you push or pull the battery across thecarpet or other synthetic materialsRif you wipe the battery with a cloth

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Donot inhale any battery gases. Do not lean overthe battery. Keep children away from batter-ies. Wash away battery acid immediately withplenty of clean water and seek medical atten-tion.

! Have the battery checked regularly at aqualified specialist workshop.Observe the service intervals in the Main-tenance Booklet or contact a qualified spe-cialist workshop for more information.

Battery (vehicle) 293

Roadside

Assistance

Z

Page 296: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

! You should have all work involving thebattery carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop. In the exceptional case that it isnecessary for you to disconnect the batteryyourself, make sure that:Ryou switch off the engine and remove theSmartKey. Check that all the indicatorlamps in the instrument cluster are off.Otherwise, electronic components, suchas the alternator, may be damaged.Ryou first remove the negative terminalclamp and then the positive terminalclamp. Never swap the terminal clamps.Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic sys-tem may be damaged.Ron vehicles with automatic transmission,the transmission is locked in position Pafter disconnecting the battery. The vehi-cle is secured against rolling away. Youcan then no longer move the vehicle.

The battery and the cover of the positiveterminal clamp must be installed securelyduring operation.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or a specialcollection point for used bat-teries.

In order for the battery to achieve the maxi-mum possible service life, it must always besufficiently charged.Comply with safety precautions and take pro-tective measures when handling batteries.

Risk of explosion.

Fire, open flames and smoking areprohibited when handling the bat-tery. Avoid creating sparks.

Battery acid is caustic.Avoid contact with skin, eyes orclothing.

Wear eye protection.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator's Manual.

The vehicle battery, like other batteries, candischarge over time if you do not use thevehicle. In this case, have the battery discon-nected at a qualified specialist workshop. Youcan also charge the battery with a chargerrecommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact aqualified specialist workshop for further infor-mation.For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use batteries which havebeen tested and approved for your vehicle byMercedes-Benz. These batteries provideincreased impact protection to prevent vehi-cle occupants from suffering acid burnsshould the battery be damaged in the event ofan accident.Have the battery condition of charge checkedmore frequently if you use the vehicle mainlyfor short trips or if you leave it standing idlefor a lengthy period. Consult a qualified spe-cialist workshop if you wish to leave yourvehicle parked for a long period of time.

i Remove the SmartKey if you park thevehicle and do not require any electricalconsumers. The vehicle will then use very

294 Battery (vehicle)Roadside

Assistance

Page 297: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

little energy, thus conserving batterypower.

i If the power supply has been interrupted,e.g. due to a discharged battery, you willhave to:Rset the clock. Information on setting theclock can be found in the separate oper-ating instructions.On vehicles with COMAND and a naviga-tion system, the clock is set automati-cally.Rreset the head restraints on the frontseats (Y page 87)Rreset the function for folding the exteriormirrors in/out automatically, by foldingthe mirrors out once (Y page 93).

Charging the battery

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosivegases can escape from the battery. There is arisk of an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting.Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Donot inhale any battery gases. Do not lean overthe battery. Keep children away from batter-ies. Wash away battery acid immediately withplenty of clean water and seek medical atten-tion.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at tempera-tures below freezing point. When jump-start-ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gasescan escape from the battery. There is a risk ofan explosion.

Allow the frozen battery to thaw out beforecharging it or jump-starting.

! Only charge the battery using the jump-starting connection point.

! Only use battery chargers with a maxi-mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

! Only charge the installed battery with abattery charger which has been tested andapproved byMercedes-Benz. These batterychargers allow the battery to be chargedwhile still installed in the vehicle.

If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster donot light up, it is highly likely that the dis-charged battery has frozen. In this case youmay neither jump-start the vehicle nor chargethe battery. The service life of a thawed-outbattery may be shorter. The starting charac-teristics can be impaired, particularly at lowtemperatures. Have the thawed-out batterychecked at a qualified specialist workshop.A battery charger unit specially adapted forMercedes-Benz vehicles and tested andapproved byMercedes-Benz is available as anaccessory. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for information and availability.Charge the battery in accordance with theoperating instructions for the batterycharger.The jump-starting connection point is in theengine compartment (Y page 296).X Read the operating instructions for the bat-tery charger.

X Open the hood (Y page 275).X Connect the battery charger to the positiveterminal and ground point in the sameorder as when connecting the donor bat-tery in the jump-starting procedure(Y page 296).

Battery (vehicle) 295

Roadside

Assistance

Z

Page 298: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Jump-starting

For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of apositive terminal and a ground point, in the engine compartment.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over thebattery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty ofclean water and seek medical attention.

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a riskof an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ven-tilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparksare created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact withvehicle parts.RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connectingand disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnectingthe jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting thevehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

! Vehicles with a gasoline engine: avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Other-wise, the catalytic converter could be damaged by non-combusted fuel.

If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do notlight up, it is highly likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neitherjump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery.Once the battery has thawed out, its service life may be dramatically reduced.The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures.Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

296 Jump-startingRoadside

Assistance

Page 299: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumpercables. Observe the following points:RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.RVehicles with a gasoline engine: only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaustsystem are cold.RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.RJump-starting may only be performed from batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connectedfor a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.Make sure that:Rthe jumper cables are not damaged.Rwhen the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminalclamp do not come into contact with other metal sections.RThe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts such as the pulley or the fan. Theseparts move when the engine is started and while it is running.

X Apply the parking brake.X Move the selector lever to position P.X Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g. radio, blower, etc.).X Open the hood (Y page 275).

Position numberB identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting device.

Jump-starting 297

Roadside

Assistance

Z

Page 300: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

The jump-starting connection point consists of poles; and=.X Lift up cover: of positive terminal; in the direction of the arrow.X Connect positive terminal; on your vehicle to positive terminal? of donor batteryBusing the jumper cable. beginning with your own battery.

X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.X Connect negative terminalA of donor batteryB to ground point= of your vehicle usingthe jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to donor batteryB first.

X Start the engine.X First, remove the jumper cables from ground point= and negative terminalA, then frompositive clamp; and positive terminal?. Each time beginning with your vehicle's battery.

X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at anyqualified specialist workshop.

Towing and tow-starting

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFunctions relevant to safety are restricted orno longer available if:Rthe engine is not running.Rthe brake system or the power steering ismalfunctioning.Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supplyor the vehicle's electrical system.

If your vehicle is being towed, much moreforce may be necessary to steer or brake.There is a risk of an accident.In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,make sure that the steering moves freely.

G WARNINGWhen towing or tow-starting another vehicleand its weight is greater than the permissiblegross weight of your vehicle, the:Rthe towing eye could detach itselfRthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll-over.

There is a risk of an accident.

When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,its weight should not be greater than the per-missible gross weight of your vehicle.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakes automati-cally in certain situations. To prevent dam-age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONICPLUS and the HOLD function in the follow-ing or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of30 miles (50km). The towing speed of30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded.If the vehicle has to be towed more than30miles (50km), the entire vehicle must beraised and transported.

! Only secure the tow cable or tow bar tothe towing eyes. You could otherwise dam-age the vehicle.

! Do not tow with sling-type equipment.This could damage the vehicle.

! Do not use the towing eyes for recoverypurposes as this could damage the vehicle.If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.

298 Towing and tow-startingRoadside

Assistance

Page 301: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

! When towing, pull away slowly andsmoothly. If the tractive power is too high,the vehicles could be damaged.

! Your vehicles is equipped with an auto-matic transmission. Therefore, you mustnot have the vehicle tow-started. The trans-mission may otherwise be damaged.

i Details on the permissible gross vehicleweight of your vehicle can be found on thevehicle identification plate (Y page 336).

It is better to have the vehicle transportedthan to have it towed away.If the transfer case can be shifted into neutralN, you can tow the vehicle.If the transfer case cannot be shifted intoneutral N, you can tow the vehicle with oneaxle raised. Please bear the following in mind:Rremove the propeller shaft between thetransfer case and the rolling axle.Rturn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 133).

The battery must be connected and charged.Otherwise, you:Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 inthe ignition lock (Y page 133).Rcannot shift the automatic transmission toposition N.

i Disarm the automatic locking featurebefore the vehicle is towed (Ypage75). Youcould otherwise be locked out when push-ing or towing the vehicle.

Towing eyes

Towing eyes, front

: Towing eyes, front

Towing eye, rear

Rear towing eye: is located under thebumper, on the left-hand side when viewed inthe direction of travel.

Towing a vehicle with both axles onthe groundIt is important that you observe the safetyinstructions when towing away your vehicle(Y page 298).X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 104).i In order to signal a change of directionwhen towing the vehicle with the hazardwarning lamps switched on, use the com-bination switch as usual. In this case, onlythe turn signals for the desired directionflash. When you reset the combination

Towing and tow-starting 299

Roadside

Assistance

Z

Page 302: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

switch, the hazard warning lamps startflashing again.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 133).

X When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal and keep it depressed.

X Shift the transfer case to neu-tral(Y page 188).

X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion N.

X Release the brake pedal.X Release the parking brake (Y page 151).

i The transmission can only change gear ifthe battery has sufficient charge.If you cannot move the selector lever to N,the propeller shafts to the driven axlesmust be removed.

Transporting the vehicle! You may only secure the vehicle by thewheels, not by parts of the vehicle such asaxle or steering components. Otherwise,the vehicle could be damaged.

Use the towing eyes to pull the vehicle if itneeds to be transported on a trailer or trans-porter (Y page 299).X Apply the parking brake.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 133).

X Move the selector lever to N.X Shift the transfer case to neutral(Y page 188).

X Secure the towing cable to the towing eyes(Y page 299).

X Make sure that the vehicle cannot rollaway.

X Release the parking brake.X Load the vehicle onto the transporter.

As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:X Apply the parking brake.X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion P.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 133) and remove it.

X Secure the vehicle.

Recovering a vehicle that has becomestuck! When recovering a vehicle that hasbecome stuck, pull it as smoothly andevenly as possible. Excessive tractivepower could damage the vehicles.

If the drive wheels have become stuck inloose or muddy ground, pull the vehicle outwith extreme caution, especially so if the vehi-cle is loaded.Never attempt to recover a stuck vehicle witha trailer attached.Pull out the vehicle backwards, if possibleusing the tracks it made when it becamestuck.

Towing in the event of malfunctions

General notes

! If you are removing the propeller shaft,use M10 nuts as spacers on the M8 boltsand secure them with M8 nuts.New self-locking nuts must be used whenthe propeller shafts are refitted.

X Observe the safety notes as you do so(Y page 298).

i Consult an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

300 Towing and tow-startingRoadside

Assistance

Page 303: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Engine damage, gear damage or electri-cal malfunctionsX Move the selector lever to posi-tion N(Y page 139).

X Shift the transfer case to neu-tral(Y page 188).

In the event of damage to the transfercaseHave the propeller shafts between the axlesand the transfer case removed.

In the event of damage to the front axleHave the propeller shaft between the rearaxle and the transfer case removed.Have the vehicle towed with the front axleraised.

In the event of damage to the rear axleHave the propeller shaft between the frontaxle and the transfer case removed.Have the vehicle towed with the rear axleraised and with wheel rollers under the frontaxle.

Tow-starting (emergency enginestarting)! Vehicles with automatic transmissionmust not be tow-started. You could other-wise damage the automatic transmission.

You can find information on "Jump-starting"under (Y page 296).

Fuses

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or ifyou replace it with a fuse with a higher amper-age, the electric cables could be overloaded.

This could result in a fire. There is a risk of anaccident and injury.Always replace faulty fuses with the specifiednew fuses having the correct amperage.

! Only use fuses that have been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles and whichhave the correct fuse rating for the systemconcerned. Otherwise, components or sys-tems could be damaged.

The fuses in your vehicle serve to close downfaulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-nents on the circuit and their functions stopoperating.Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses ofthe same rating, which you can recognize bythe color and value. The fuse ratings are listedin the fuse allocation chart.

i If a fuse has blown, contact a breakdownservice or an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have thecause traced and rectified at a qualified spe-cialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Before changing a fuseX Park the vehicle and apply the parkingbrake.

X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.All indicator lamps in the instrument clustermust be off.

The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:RMain fuse box on the driver's side of thedashboardRFuse box in the front-passenger footwellRFuse box in the transmission tunnelRFuse box in the battery caseRFuse box in the cargo compartment

Fuses 301

Roadside

Assistance

Z

Page 304: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

The fuse allocation chart and the spare fusesare in the main fuse box on the dashboard(Y page 302).You will find the fuse removal device in thevehicle tool kit (Y page 290).

Dashboard fuse box! Do not use a pointed object such as ascrewdriver to open the cover in the dash-board. You could damage the dashboard orthe cover.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that itis lying correctly on the fuse box. Moistureseeping in or dirt could otherwise impairthe operation of the fuses.

X Open the front-passenger door.X To open: pull cover: outwards in thedirection of the arrow and remove it.

X To close: clip in cover: on the front of thedashboard.

X Fold cover: inwards until it engages.

Fuse box in the front-passenger foot-well! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that itis lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture

seeping in or dirt could otherwise impairthe operation of the fuses.

X Unscrew screws:.X Lift up cover; in the direction of thearrow.

= Fuse box

Fuse box in the transmission tunnel! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that itis lying correctly on the fuse box. Moistureseeping in or dirt could otherwise impairthe operation of the fuses.

302 FusesRoadside

Assistance

Page 305: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

X Fold down the cup holder on the centerconsole (Y page 254).

X Adjust the front-passenger seat to its fore-most position (Y page 86).

X To open: remove screws:.X Remove cover; in the direction of thearrow.

X To close: clip in cover;.X Install cover; with screws:.

Fuse box in the battery caseThe fuses in the battery case do not usuallyneed to be replaced. If a fuse change is nec-essary, consult a qualified specialist work-shop.

Fuse box in the cargo compartment! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that itis lying correctly on the fuse box. Moistureseeping in or dirt could otherwise impairthe operation of the fuses.

X Open the rear door.X To open: pull cover: in the direction ofthe arrow and remove it.

Fuses 303

Roadside

Assistance

Z

Page 306: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

304

Page 307: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Useful information ............................ 306Important safety notes .................... 306Operation ........................................... 306Winter operation ............................... 308Tire pressure ..................................... 309Loading the vehicle .......................... 316Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards .......................................... 319Tire labeling ....................................... 321Changing a wheel ............................. 327Wheel and tire combinations ........... 331

305

Wheelsandtires

Page 308: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops: (Y page 24).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,the wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay be damaged. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always replace wheels and tires with thosethat fulfill the specifications of the originalpart.When replacing wheels, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmodelWhen replacing tires, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmanufacturerRmodel

G WarningA flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer-ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle.There is a risk of an accident.do not drive with a flat tire. Immediatelyreplace the flat tire with your spare wheel, orconsult a qualified specialist workshop.

Contact an authorizedMercedes-BenzCenterif you require information on tested and rec-

ommended wheels and tires for summer andwinter driving. Advice on purchasing and car-ing for tires is also available there.Accessories that are not approved for yourvehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not beingused correctly can impair the operatingsafety.Before purchasing and using non-approvedaccessories, visit a qualified specialist work-shop and ask about:RsuitabilityRlegal stipulationsRfactory recommendationsInformation on the dimensions and types ofwheels and tires for your vehicle can be foundin the "Wheel/tire combinations" section(Y page 331).Information on air pressure for the tires onyour vehicle can be found:Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel fillerflapRin the "Tire pressure" section

i Further information on wheels and tirescan be obtained at any qualified specialistworkshop.

Operation

Notes on drivingIf the vehicle is heavily loaded, check the tirepressures and correct them if necessary.When parking your vehicle, make sure thatthe tires do not get deformed by the curb orother obstacles. If it is necessary to drive overcurbs, speed humps or similar elevations, tryto do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. Oth-erwise, the tires, particularly the sidewalls,may be damaged.

306 OperationWheelsandtires

Page 309: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Regular checking of wheels and tires

G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-sure loss. As a result, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. There is a risk of accident.Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.

RRegularly check the wheels and tires ofyour vehicle for damage at least once amonth, as well as after driving off-road oron rough roads. Damage includes bulgesand deformation on tires, cuts, punctures,cracks or severe corrosion on wheels, forexample. Damaged wheels can cause aloss of tire pressure.RRegularly check the tire tread depth andthe condition of the tread across the wholewidth of the tire (Y page 307). In order toinspect the inner side of the tire surface,turn the steering wheel to full lock.RAll wheels must have a valve cap to protectthe valve against dirt and moisture. Do notinstall anything onto the valve other thanthe standard valve cap or a valve capapproved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehi-cle.Do not install anything onto the valve, suchas tire pressure monitoring systems.RYou should regularly check the pressure ofall your tires including the spare wheel, par-ticularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tirepressure as necessary (Y page 314).

The service life of tires depends, among otherthings, on the following factors:RDriving styleRTire pressureRDistance covered

Tire tread

G WARNINGInsufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.

This means that on wet road surfaces, the riskof hydroplaning increases, in particular wherespeed is not adapted to suit the driving con-ditions. There is a risk of accident.If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tiresmay exhibit different levels of wear at differ-ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, youshould regularly check the tread depth andthe condition of the tread across the entirewidth of all tires.Minimum tire tread depth for:RSummer tires:â in (3 mm)RM+S tires:ã in (4 mm)For safety reasons, replace the tires beforethe legally prescribed limit for the minimumtire tread depth is reached.

Marking: shows the tread wear indicator(TWI). The arrow indicates the placement ofthe tire tread.Do not drive with tires which have too littletread depth. tire traction onwet road surfacesdecreases significantly when the tread depthis less than 1/8 in (3 mm).Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required bylaw. Six indicators are positioned over the tiretread. They are visible once the tread depth isapproximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm). If this is thecase, the tire is so worn that it must bereplaced.The recommended tread depth for summertires is at least 1/8 in (3 mm). The recommen-ded tread depth for winter tires is at least 1/6in (4 mm).

Operation 307

Wheelsandtires

Z

Page 310: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Selecting, mounting and replacingtiresROnly mount tires and wheels of the sametype and make.ROnly mount approved tires of the correctsize onto the wheels.RTires are supplied with a protective layerfrom the factory. Break in new tires at mod-erate speeds for the first 60 miles(100 km). They only reach their full per-formance after this distance.RDo not drive with tires which have too littletread depth, as this significantly reducesthe traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).RReplace the tires after six years at the lat-est, regardless of wear. This also applies tothe spare wheel.

Winter operation

General notesHave your vehicle winterproofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"section (Y page 327).

Driving with summer tiresAt temperatures below 45‡ (+7†), summertires lose elasticity and therefore traction andbraking power. Change the tires on your vehi-cle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at verycold temperatures could cause cracks toform, thereby damaging the tires perma-nently. Mercedes-Benz cannot acceptresponsibility for this type of damage.

M+S tires

G WARNINGM+S tires with a tire tread depth of less thanã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winterand do not provide sufficient traction. There isa risk of an accident.

M+S tires with a tread depth of less thanã in(4 mm) must be replaced immediately.

G WARNINGWheel and tire dimensions as well as the typeof tire can vary between the spare wheel andthe wheel to be replaced. When the sparewheel is mounted, driving characteristics maybe severely affected. There is a risk of an acci-dent.In order to reduce risks:Ryou should therefore adapt your drivingstyle and drive carefully.Rnever mount more than one spare wheelthat differs from the wheel to be replaced.Ronly use a spare wheel that differs from thewheel to be replaced for a short time.Rdo not deactivate ESP®.Rhave a spare wheel that differs from thewheel that has been changed replaced atthe nearest qualified specialist workshop.You must observe the correct wheel andtire dimensions as well as the wheel type.

Do not exceed a maximum speed of 50 mph(80 km/h) if a spare wheel of a different sizeis installed.At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), use all-season tires or winter tires. Both types of tireare identified by the M+S marking.Not all tires with theM+Smarking provide thedriving characteristics of winter tires. In addi-tion to the M+S marking, winter tires alsohave thei snowflake symbol on the tirewall. Tires with this marking fulfill the require-ments of the Rubber Manufacturers Associa-tion (RMA) and the Rubber Association ofCanada (RAC) regarding snow traction, andwere specially developed for driving on snow.Only these tires will allow driving safety sys-tems such as ABS and ESP® to function opti-mally in winter, since these tires have beendesigned specifically for driving on snow.UseM+S tires of the samemake and tread onall wheels to maintain safe handling charac-teristics.

308 Winter operationWheelsandtires

Page 311: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Always observe the maximum permissiblespeed specified for the M+S tires you havemounted.When you have mounted the M+S tires:X Check the tire pressures (Y page 309).X Restart the tire pressure monitor(Y page 315).

i You can obtain information about wintertires that have been approved byMercedes-Benz especially for your vehicleat any Mercedes-Benz Service center.

i For further information about tires, see(Y page 333).

Snow chains! Information about the use of snow chaincompatible AMG winter tires is applicablefor AMG tires. Use of snow chains is onlypermissible with these tires.

! On some tire sizes there is not enoughspace for snow chains. To avoid damage tothe vehicle or tires, observe the "Wheel andtire combinations" section under "Tires andwheels".

! If snow chains are mounted on the frontwheels, the snow chains could grindagainst the bodywork or components of thechassis. This could result in damage to thevehicle or the tires.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use snow chains thathave been specially approved for your vehicleby Mercedes-Benz, or are of a correspondingstandard of quality.ROnly use snow chains when driving onroads completely covered by snow.Remove the snow chains as soon as possi-

ble when you come to a road that is notsnow-covered.RLocal regulations may restrict the use ofsnow chains. Observe the appropriate reg-ulations if you wish to mount snow chains.RDo not exceed the maximum permissiblespeed of 30 mph (50 km/h).

If you intend to mount snow chains, pleasebear the following points in mind:RSnow chains cannot be mounted on allwheel/tire combinations (Y page 331).RMount snow chains only in pairs and onlyon the rear wheels. Observe the manufac-turer's mounting instructions.

i You can deactivate ESP® (Y page 63)when pulling away with snow chains instal-led. You can thereby allow the wheels tospin in a controlled manner, achieving anincreased driving force (cutting action).

Tire pressure

Tire pressure specifications

Important safety notes

G WARNINGUnderinflated or overinflated tires pose thefollowing risks:Rthe tires may burst, especially as the loadand vehicle speed increase.Rthe tires may wear excessively and/orunevenly, which may greatly impair tiretraction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer-ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.Follow recommended tire inflation pressuresand check the pressure of all the tires includ-ing the spare wheel:Rmonthly, at leastRif the load changes

Tire pressure 309

Wheelsandtires

Z

Page 312: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Rbefore beginning a long journeyRunder different operating conditions, e.g.off-road driving

If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

i The specifications on the sample Tire andLoading Information placard and tire pres-sure tables are examples. Tire pressurespecifications are vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data shown here. The tirepressure specifications that are valid foryour vehicle can be found on the Tire andLoading Information placard and tire pres-sure table on the vehicle.

General notesThe recommended tire pressures for the tiresmounted at the factory can be found on thelabels described here.Operation with a trailer: the applicablevalue for the rear tires is the maximum tirepressure value stated in the table inside thefuel filler flap.Further information on tire pressures can beobtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire and Loading Information placard

: Recommended tire pressuresThe Tire and Loading Information placard ison the B-pillar on the driver's side(Y page 316).The Tire and Loading Information placard con-tains the recommended tire pressures forcold tires. The recommended tire pressures

are valid for the maximum permissible loadand up to the maximum permissible vehiclespeed.

Tire pressure table

Example: tire pressure table for all tires permittedfor this vehicle by the factory

The tire pressure table is on the inside of thefuel filler flap.The tire pressure table contains the recom-mended pressures for cold tires for variousoperating conditions, i.e. differing load andspeed conditions.If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tirepressure information following is only validfor that tire size. The load conditions "partiallyladen" and "fully laden" are defined in thetable for different numbers of occupants andamounts of luggage. The actual number ofseats may differ.Some tire pressure tables only show the rimdiameter instead of the complete tire size,e.g. R16. Rim diameter is part of the tire sizeand can be found on the tire sidewall(Y page 321).If the tire pressures have been set to thelower values for lighter loads and/or lowerroad speeds, the pressures should be reset tothe higher values:Rif you want to drive with an increased loadand/orRif you want to drive at higher road speeds

i The tire pressures for increased loadsand/or higher road speeds, shown in the

310 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

Page 313: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

tire pressure table, may have a negativeeffect on driving comfort.

If the tire pressure is not set correctly, thiscan lead to an excessive build up of heat anda sudden loss of pressure.Formore information, contact a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Important notes on tire pressure

G WARNINGIf the tire pressure drops repeatedly, thewheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tirepressure that is too low may result in a tireblow-out. There is a risk of an accident.RCheck the tire for foreign objects.RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or thevalve is leaking.

If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you fit unsuitable accessories onto tirevalves, the tire valves may be overloaded andmalfunction, which can cause tire pressureloss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pres-sure monitors keep the tire valve open. Thiscan also result in tire pressure loss. There is arisk of an accident.Only screw the standard valve cap or othervalve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz foryour vehicle onto the tire valve.

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check thetire pressure. The outer appearance of a tiredoes not permit any reliable conclusion aboutthe tire pressure. On vehicles equipped withthe electronic tire pressure monitoring sys-tem, the tire pressure can be checked usingthe on-board computer.The tire temperature and pressure increasewhen the vehicle is in motion. This is depend-ent on the driving speed and the load.Therefore, you should only correct tire pres-sures when the tires are cold.

The tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked withoutdirect sunlight on the tires for at least threehours andRif the vehicle has been driven for less than1 mile (1.6 km).

The tire temperature changes depending onthe outside temperature, the vehicle speedand the tire load. If the tire temperaturechanges by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressurechanges by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into account when check-ing the pressure of warm tires. Only correctthe tire pressure if it is too low for the currentoperating conditions. If you check the tirepressure when the tires are warm, the result-ing value will be higher than if the tires werecold. This is normal. Do not reduce the tirepressure to the value specified for cold tires.The tire pressure would otherwise be too low.Observe the recommended tire pressures forcold tires:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table on the inside of thefuel filler flap

Observe the following for the tire pressure onthe spare wheel:Rthe tire and loading information table onthe B-pillar on the driver's side.Rthe tire pressure sticker on the inside of thefuel filler flap.

Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflation

G WARNINGTires with pressure that is too low can over-heat and burst as a consequence. In addition,they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg-ular wear, which can severely impair the brak-ing properties and the driving characteristics.There is a risk of an accident.

Tire pressure 311

Wheelsandtires

Z

Page 314: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Underinflated tires may:Roverheat, leading to tire defectsRhave an adverse effect on handling charac-teristicsRwear quickly and unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption

Overinflation

G WARNINGTires with excessively high pressure can burstbecause they are damaged more easily byroad debris, potholes etc. In addition, theyalso suffer from irregular wear, which canseverely impair the braking properties and thedriving characteristics. There is a risk of anaccident.Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Overinflated tires may:Rincrease the braking distanceRhave an adverse effect on handling charac-teristicsRwear quickly and unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on ride comfortRbe more susceptible to damage

Maximum tire pressures

: Example: maximum permissible tire pres-sure

Never exceed the maximum permissible tireinflation pressure. Always observe the rec-ommended tire pressure for your vehiclewhen adjusting the tire pressure(Y page 325).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

Checking the tire pressures

Important safety notesObserve the notes on tire pressure(Y page 309).Information on air pressure for the tires onyour vehicle can be found:Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel fillerflap (Y page 310)Rin the "Tire pressure information" sectionRin the "Tire pressure data" section(Y page 309)

Checking tire pressures manuallyTo determine and set the correct tire pres-sure, proceed as follows:X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is tobe checked.

X Press the tire pressure gauge securely ontothe valve.

X Read the tire pressure and compare it tothe recommended value on the Tire andLoading Information placard on fuel fillerflap of your vehicle (Y page 310).

X The tire pressure is too low: increase thetire pressure to the recommended value.

X The tire pressure is too high: press downthe metal pin in the valve using the tip of apen, for example.Air is released from the tire.

X Check the tire pressure again with the tirepressure gauge.

X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.X Repeat these steps for the other tires.

312 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

Page 315: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Tire pressure monitor

Important safety notes

G WARNINGEach tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked at least once a monthwhen cold and inflated to the pressure rec-ommended by the vehicle manufacturer onthe Tire and Loading Information placard onthe driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressurelabel on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If yourvehicle has tires of a different size than thesize indicated on the Tire and Loading Infor-mation placard or the tire pressure label, youshould determine the proper tire pressure forthose tires.As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equippedwith a tire pressuremonitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-sure telltale when one or more of your tiresare significantly underinflated. Accordingly,when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates,you should stop and check your tires as soonas possible, and inflate them to the properpressure. Driving on a significantly underin-flated tire causes the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Underinflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle's handling and stop-ping ability.Please note that the TPMS is not a substitutefor proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv-er's responsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if underinflation has notreached the level to trigger illumination of theTPMS low tire pressure telltale.USA only:Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate if thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combined with thelow tire pressure telltale. When the systemdetects a malfunction, the warning lamp willflash for approximately a minute and thenremain continuously illuminated. Thissequencewill be repeated every time the vehi-

cle is started as long as the malfunctionexists.When themalfunction indicator is illuminated,the systemmay not be able to detect or signallow tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc-tions may occur for a variety of reasons,including the mounting of incompatiblereplacement or alternate tires or wheels onthe vehicle that prevent the TPMS from func-tioning properly. Always check the TPMSmal-function telltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure thatthe replacement or alternate tires and wheelsallow the TPMS to continue to function prop-erly.

It is the driver's responsibility to set the tirepressure to the recommended cold tire pres-sure suitable for the operating situation(Y page 309). Note that the correct tire pres-sure for the current operating situation mustfirst be taught-in to the tire pressure monitor.If there is a substantial loss of pressure, thewarning threshold for the warning message isaligned to the reference values taught-in.Restart the tire pressuremonitor after adjust-ing to the cold tire pressure (Y page 315).The current pressures are saved as new ref-erence values. As a result, a warningmessagewill appear if the tire pressure drops signifi-cantly.The tire pressure monitor does not warn youof an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observethe notes on the recommended tire pressure(Y page 309).The tire pressure monitor is not able to warnyou of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if thetire is penetrated by a foreign object. In theevent of a sudden loss of pressure, bring thevehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoidsudden steering movements.In order to check the tire pressure, the vehi-cle's wheels are installed with sensors thatmonitor the tire pressure in all four tires. Thetire pressure monitor warns you if the pres-sure drops in one or more of the tires. The tire

Tire pressure 313

Wheelsandtires

Z

Page 316: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

pressure monitor only functions if the correctsensors are installed on all wheels.The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warn-ing lamp in the instrument cluster for indicat-ing pressure loss/malfunctions (USA) orpressure loss (Canada). Whether the warninglamp flashes or lights up indicates whether atire pressure is too low or the tire pressuremonitor is malfunctioning:Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, thetire pressure on one or more tires is signif-icantly too low. The tire pressure monitor isnot malfunctioning.RUSA only: if the warning lamp flashes foraround a minute and then remains lit con-stantly, the tire pressure monitor is mal-functioning.

Information on tire pressures is displayed inthe multifunction display. After a fewminutesof driving, the current tire pressure of eachtire is shown in the multifunction display.USA only: the tire pressure warning lamp willinform you of a malfunction in the tire pres-sure monitor by flashing for approximatelyoneminute and then remaining lit. It may takemore than ten minutes before the data menuis displayed. When the malfunction has beenrectified, the tire pressure warning lamp goesout after a few minutes of driving.The tire pressure values indicated by the on-board computer may differ from those meas-ured at a gas station with a pressure gauge.The tire pressures shown by the on-boardcomputer refer to those measured at sealevel. At high altitudes, the tire pressure val-ues indicated by a pressure gauge are higherthan those shown by the on-board computer.In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures.The operation of the tire pressuremonitor canbe affected by interference from radio trans-mitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones,two-way radios) that may be being operatedin or near the vehicle.

i USA only:

This device complies with part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful inter-ference, and2. This devicemust accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

i Canada only:This device complies with RSS-210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful inter-ference, and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

Checking the tire pressure electroni-callyX Make sure that the SmartKey is in posi-tion 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 133).

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Serv.Serv. menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectTire PressureTire Pressure.

X Press thea button.The current tire pressure of each tire isshown in the multifunction display.

If the vehicle has been parked for over20 minutes, the Tire pressure will beTire pressure will bedisplayed after driving a fewdisplayed after driving a fewminutesminutes message appears.After a teach-in process, the tire pressuremonitor automatically detects new wheels ornew sensors. As long as a clear allocation ofthe tire pressure value to the individualwheels is not possible, the Tire PressureTire Pressure

314 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

Page 317: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Monitor ActiveMonitor Active display message is showninstead of the tire pressure display. The tirepressures are already being monitored.

i If a spare wheel is mounted, the systemmay continue to show the tire pressure ofthe wheel that has been removed for a fewminutes. Observe that the displayed valueis not the same as the current tire pressureof the emergency spare wheel.

Tire pressure monitor warning mes-sagesIf the tire pressure monitor detects a signifi-cant pressure loss on one or more tires, awarning message is shown in the multifunc-tion display. A warning tone also sounds andthe tire pressure warning lamp lights up in theinstrument cluster.Each tire that is affected by a significant lossof pressure is highlighted in the pressure dis-play.X If the Correct Tire PressureCorrect Tire Pressure messageappears in the multifunction display, checkthe tire pressure on all four wheels and cor-rect it if necessary.

X If the CheckCheck TiresTiresmessage appears in themultifunction display, the tire pressure inone or more tires has dropped significantlyand the tires must be checked.

X If the Tire Press. Warning CautionTire Press. Warning CautionTire MalfunctionTire Malfunction message appears inthe multifunction display, the tire pressurein one or more tires has dropped suddenlyand the tires must be checked.

i If the wheel positions on the vehicle arerotated, the tire pressures may be dis-played for the wrong positions for a shorttime. This is rectified after a few minutes ofdriving, and the tire pressures are displayedfor the correct positions.

Restarting the tire pressure monitorWhen you restart the tire pressuremonitor, allexisting warning messages are deleted and

the warning lamps go out. The monitor usesthe currently set tire pressures as the refer-ence values formonitoring. Inmost cases, thetire pressure monitor will automaticallydetect the new reference values after youhave changed the tire pressure. However, youcan also define reference values manually asdescribed here.X Set the tire pressure to the value recom-mended for the corresponding driving sit-uation on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the driver's sideB-pillar (Y page 309).Additional tire pressure values for differentloads can also be found on the tire pressuretable on the inside of the fuel filler flap(Y page 309).

X Make sure that the tire pressure is correcton all four wheels.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 133).

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Serv.Serv. menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectTire PressureTire Pressure.

X Press thea button.The multifunction display shows the cur-rent tire pressure for the individual tires orthe TireTire pressurepressure willwill bebe displayeddisplayedafter driving a few minutesafter driving a few minutes mes-sage.

X Press the: button.The Use Current Pressures as NewUse Current Pressures as NewReference ValuesReference Values message appears inthe multifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press thea button.The Tire Press. Monitor RestartedTire Press. Monitor Restartedmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.After driving for a few minutes, the systemchecks whether the current tire pressuresare within the specified range. The new tirepressures are then accepted as referencevalues and monitored.

Tire pressure 315

Wheelsandtires

Z

Page 318: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the% button.The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads

G WARNINGOverloaded tires can overheat, causing ablowout. Overloaded tires can also impair thesteering and driving characteristics and leadto brake failure. There is a risk of accident.Observe the load rating of the tires. The loadrating must be at least half of the GAWR ofyour vehicle. Never overload the tires byexceeding the maximum load.

: B-pillar, driver's sideTwo instruction labels on your vehicle showthe maximum possible load.(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard

is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. TheTire and Loading Information placardshows themaximum permissible numberof occupants and the maximum permis-sible vehicle load. It also contains detailsof the tire sizes and corresponding pres-sures for tires mounted at the factory.

(2) The vehicle identification plate is on theB-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicleidentification plate informs you of thegross vehicle weight rating. It is made upof the vehicle weight, all vehicle occu-

pants, the fuel and the cargo. You canalso find information about themaximumgross axle weight rating on the front andrear axle.The maximum gross axle weight rating isthe maximum weight that can be carriedby one axle (front or rear axle). Do notexceed the maximum gross vehicleweight or themaximumgross axle weightrating for the front or rear axle.

Maximum permissible gross mass

X Specification for maximum permissibleload: is listed on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard: "The combined weightof occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."

The gross weight of all vehicle occupants,cargo, luggage and trailer load/noseweight (ifapplicable) must not exceed the specifiedvalue.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in the illustra-tion are examples. The maximum permis-sible load is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data shown here. The maxi-mum permissible load that applies for yourvehicle can be found on your vehicle's Tireand Loading Information placard.

316 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

Page 319: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Number of seats

Maximum number of seats: indicates themaximum number of occupants allowed totravel in the vehicle. This information can befound on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in the illustra-tion are examples. The number of seats isvehicle-specific and can differ from thedetails shown. The number of seats in yourvehicle can be found on the Tire and Load-ing Information placard.

Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructionsThe following steps have been developed asrequired of all manufacturers under Title 49,Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575pursuant to the "National Traffic and MotorVehicle Safety Act of 1966".X Step 1: Locate the statement "The com-bined weight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." onyour vehicle’s Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

X Step 2: Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from XXX kilo-grams or XXX lbs.

X Step 4: The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo and luggage loadcapacity. Example: if the "XXX" amountequals 1400 lbs and there will be five150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo and luggage loadcapacity is 650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs).

X Step 5:Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded on thevehicle. That weight may not safely exceedthe available cargo and luggage load capa-city calculated in step 4.

X Step 6 (if applicable): If your vehicle willbe towing a trailer, load from your trailerwill be transferred to your vehicle. Thisreduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity of your vehicle (Y page 347).

Loading the vehicle 317

Wheelsandtires

Z

Page 320: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Example: steps 1 to 3The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities withvarying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples usea maximum load of 1,500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only.Make sure youare using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Infor-mation placard (Y page 316).The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.Additional information when towing a trailer (Y page 347).Step 1

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Combined maximum weight ofoccupants and cargo (data fromthe Tire and Loading Informationplacard)

1500 lbs(680 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg)

Step 2

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Number of people inthe vehicle (driverand occupants)

5 3 1

Distribution of theoccupants

Front: 2Rear: 3

Front: 1Rear: 2

Front: 1

Weight of the occu-pants

Occupant 1: 150 lbs(68 kg)Occupant 2: 180 lbs(82 kg)Occupant 3: 160 lbs(73 kg)Occupant 4: 140 lbs(63 kg)Occupant 5: 120 lbs(54 kg)

Occupant 1: 200 lbs(91 kg)Occupant 2: 190 lbs(86 kg)Occupant 3: 150 lbs(68 kg)

Occupant 1:150 lbs(68 kg)

Gross weight of alloccupants

750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs(68 kg)

318 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

Page 321: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Step 3

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Permissible load(maximum grossvehicle weight rat-ing from the Tireand Loading Infor-mation placardminus the grossweight of all occu-pants)

1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò750 lbs (340 kg) =750 lbs (340 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò540 lbs (245 kg)=960 lbs (435 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò150 lbs (68 kg) =1350 lbs (612 kg)

Vehicle identification plateEven if you have calculated the total loadcarefully, you should still make sure that thegross vehicle weight rating and the gross axleweight rating are not exceeded. Details canbe found on the vehicle identification plate onthe B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle(Y page 316).Gross vehicle weight rating: the grossweight of the vehicle, all passengers, load andtrailer load/noseweight (if applicable) mustnot exceed the gross vehicle weight rating.Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): themaximum permissible weight that can be car-ried by one axle (front or rear axle).To ensure that your vehicle does not exceedthe maximum permissible values (gross vehi-cle weight and maximum gross axle weightrating), have your loaded vehicle (includingdriver, occupants, load and full trailer load ifapplicable) weighed on a suitable vehicleweighbridge.

Trailer load/noseweightThe trailer load/noseweight affects the grossweight of the vehicle. If a trailer is attached,the trailer load/noseweight is included in theload along with occupants and luggage. Thetrailer load/noseweight is usually approx-imately 10 % of the gross weight of the trailerand its load.

Only use a trailer tow hitch that has beenapproved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.Comply with the manufacturer's operatinginstructions for operation, care and mainte-nance.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-ards

Overview of Tire Quality GradingStandards

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards areU.S. government specifications. Their pur-pose is to provide drivers with uniform relia-ble information on tire performance data. Tiremanufacturers have to grade tires using threeperformance factors:: treadwear grade,;traction grade and= temperature grade.These regulations do not apply to Canada.Nevertheless, all tires sold in North America

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards 319

Wheelsandtires

Z

Page 322: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

are provided with the corresponding qualitygrading markings on the sidewall of the tire.Where applicable, the tire grading informa-tion can be found on the tire sidewall betweenthe tread shoulder and maximum tire width.Example:RTreadwear grade: 200RTraction grade: AARTemperature grade: AAll passenger car tires must conform to thestatutory safety requirements in addition tothese grades.

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedU.S. government course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-halftimes as well on the government test track asa tire graded 100.The relative performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use, how-ever, and may depart significantly from thenorm, due to variations in driving habits, ser-vice practices and differences in road char-acteristics and climate conditions.

Traction

G WARNINGThe traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cor-nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char-acteristics.

! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damageto the drive train.

The traction grades, from highest to lowest,are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on a wet surface asmeasured under controlled conditions onspecified government test surfaces of asphaltand concrete. A tire marked C may have poortraction performance.The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icyroad is always lower than on dry road surfa-ces.You should pay special attention to road con-ditions when temperatures are around freez-ing point.Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimumtread depth ofã in (4 mm) on all four wintertires. Observe the legally required minimumtire tread depth (Y page 307).Winter tires canreduce the braking distance on snow-coveredsurfaces in comparison with summer tires.The braking distance is still much further thanon surfaces that are not icy or covered withsnow. Take appropriate care when driving.Further information on winter tires (M+Stires) (Y page 308).

Temperature

G WARNINGThe temperature grade for this tire is estab-lished for a tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, either separately orin combination, can cause excessive heatbuild-up and possible tire failure.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C. These represent the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and its ability to dis-sipate heat when tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoor laboratorytest wheel. Sustained high temperature cancause the material of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, and excessive tempera-ture can lead to sudden tire failure. The gradeC corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tiresmustmeet under

320 Uniform Tire Quality Grading StandardsWheelsandtires

Page 323: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higherlevels of performance on the laboratory testwheel than the minimum required by law.

Tire labeling

Overview of tire labeling

: Uniform tire Quality Grading Standard(Y page 325)

; DOT tire Identification Number(Y page 324)

= Maximum tire load (Y page 323)? Maximum tire pressures (Y page 312)A ManufacturerB Tire material (Y page 324)C Tire size designation, load-bearing capa-

city and speed rating (Y page 321)D Load identification (Y page 323)E Tire nameThe markings described above are on the tirein addition to the tire name (sales designa-tion) and the manufacturer's name.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity and speed rating

G WARNINGExceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-city and the approved maximum speed couldlead to tire damage or the tire bursting. Thereis a risk of accident.Therefore, only use tire types and sizesapproved for your vehicle model. Observe thetire load rating and speed rating required foryour vehicle.

: Tire width; Height-width ratio in percentage= Tire code? Rim diameterA Load bearing indexB Speed ratingGeneral: depending on the manufacturer'sstandards, a letter is imprinted into the tirewall before the size description.If there is no letter preceding the size descrip-tion (as shown above): these are passengervehicle tires according to European manufac-turing standards.If "P" precedes the size description:passenger vehicle tires according to U.S.manufacturing standards.If "P" precedes the size description: lighttruck tires according to U.S. manufacturingstandards.If "T" precedes the size description: these arecompact emergency spare wheels at high tire

Tire labeling 321

Wheelsandtires

Z

Page 324: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

pressure, to be used only temporarily in anemergency.Tire width: tire width: shows the nominaltire width in millimeters.Height-width ratio: height-width ratio; isthe ratio between tire height and tire width.The aspect ratio is calculated by dividing thetire width by the tire height. The resultingquotient is given as a percentage.Tire code: tire code= shows the tire type."R" represents radial tires; "D" representsdiagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radialtires.Optionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" inthe size description, depending on the man-ufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).Rim diameter: rim diameter? is the diam-eter of the bead seat, not the diameter of therim flange. The rim diameter is specified ininches (in).The load-bearing index: load-bearing indexA (also load index), is a code that containsthe maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximum permissi-ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 316).Example:Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximumload of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires canbear. For further information on themaximumtire load in kilograms and pounds, see(Y page 323).For further information on the load bearingindex, see "Load index" (Y page 323).Speed rating: speed ratingB specifies theapproved maximum speed of the tire.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

Regardless of the speed rating, alwaysobserve the speed limits. Drive carefully andadapt your driving style to the traffic condi-tions.

i Since 2009, tires in Europe which corre-spond to the noise limitations of DirectiveECE-R 117 show an >>S<< (Sound) mark.This identification follows the type approvalnumber and has no connection with thespeed rating.

Summer tires

Index Speed rating

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)

ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149mph (240 km/h)may have "ZR" inthe size description, depending on themanufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18).The service specification is made up ofload-bearing indexA and speed ratingB.RIf the size description of your tire includes"ZR" and there are no service specifica-tions, ask the tire manufacturer in order tofind out the maximum speed.If a service specification is available, themaximum speed is limited according to thespeed rating in the service specification.Example: 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this exam-ple, "97 Y" is the service specification. Theletter "Y" represents the speed rating and

322 Tire labelingWheelsandtires

Page 325: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

the maximum speed of the tire is limited to186 mph (300 km/h).RThe size description for all tires with maxi-mum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h)must include "ZR", and the service specifi-cationmust be given in parentheses. Exam-ple: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating"(Y)" indicates that the maximum speed ofthe tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Askthe tire manufacturer about the maximumspeed.

All-weather tires and winter tires

Index Speed rating

Q M+S4 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S4 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H M+S4 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S4 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

i Not all tires with theM+Smarking providethe driving characteristics of winter tires. Inaddition to the M+S marking, winter tiresalso have thei snowflake symbol onthe tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfillthe requirements of the Rubber Manufac-turers Association (RMA) and the RubberAssociation of Canada (RAC). These tireshave been developed specifically for driv-ing on snow.

When the electronic speed limiter is set, yourvehicle is prevented from exceeding 130mph(210 km/h).The speed rating of tires mounted at the fac-tory may be higher than the maximum speedthat the electronic speed limiter permits.Make sure that your tires have the requiredspeed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. Therequired speed rating for your vehicle can befound in the "Tires" section (Y page 333).Further information about reading tire datacan be obtained from any qualified specialistworkshop.

Load index

In addition to the load bearing index, load rat-ing:may be imprinted after the letters thatidentify speed ratingB on the sidewall of thetire (Y page 321).RIf no specification is given: no text (as in theexample above), represents a standardload (SL) tireRXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforcedtireRLight Load: represents a light load tireRC, D, E: represents a load range thatdepends on the maximum load that the tirecan carry at a certain pressure

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

Maximum load rating

Maximum tire load: is the maximum per-missible weight for which the tire is approved.

4 Or M+Si for winter tires.

Tire labeling 323

Wheelsandtires

Z

Page 326: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximum permissi-ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 316).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)U.S. tire regulations prescribe that everymanufacturer of new tires or retreader has toimprint a TIN in or on the sidewall of each tireproduced.

The TIN is a unique identification number. TheTIN enables tire manufacturers to inform pur-chasers of recalls and other safety-relevantmatters. It makes it possible for the pur-chaser to easily identify the affected tires.The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifi-cation code;, tire size=, tire type code?and manufacturing dateA.DOT (Department of Transportation): tiresymbol: indicates that the tire complieswith the requirements of the U.S. Departmentof Transportation.Manufacturer identification code: manu-facturer identification code; providesdetails on the tire manufacturer. New tireshave a code with two symbols. Retreadedtires have a code with four symbols.For further information about retreaded tires,see (Y page 306).

Tire size: identifier= describes the tire size.Tire type code: tire type code? can be usedby the manufacturer as a code to describespecific characteristics of the tire.Date of manufacture: date of manufactureA provides information about the age of atire. The first and second positions representthe week of manufacture, starting with "01"for the first calendar week. Positions threeand four represent the year of manufacture.For example, a tire that is marked with"3208", was manufactured in week 32 in2008.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

Tire characteristics

This information describes the type of tirecord and the number of layers in sidewall:and under tire tread;.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

Definition of terms for tires and load-ing

Tire ply composition and material usedDescribes the number of layers or the numberof rubber-coated belts in the tread and thesidewall of the tire. These are made of steel,nylon, polyester and other materials.

324 Tire labelingWheelsandtires

Page 327: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

BarMetric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 poundsper square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals(kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar.

DOT (Department of Transportation)DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements ofthe U S Department of Transportation.

Normal occupant weightThe number of occupants for which the vehi-cle is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms(150 lbs).

Uniform Tire Quality Grading StandardsA uniform standard to grade the quality oftireswith regards to tread quality, tire tractionand temperature characteristics. The qualitygrading assessment is made by the manufac-turer following specifications from the U.S.government. The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire.

Recommended tire pressuresThe recommended tire pressure applies tothe tires mounted at the factory.The Tire and Loading Information placard con-tains the recommended tire pressures forcold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for themaximum permissible vehicle speed.The tire pressure table contains the recom-mended pressures for cold tires for variousoperating conditions, i.e. differing load andspeed conditions.

Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipmentThe combined weight of all standard andoptional equipment available for the vehicle,regardless of whether it is actually installedon the vehicle or not.

RimThis is the part of the wheel on which the tireis mounted.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weightrating. The actual load on an axle must neverexceed the gross axle weight rating. Thegross axle weight rating can be found on thevehicle identification plate on the B-pillar onthe driver's side.

Speed ratingThe speed rating is part of the tire identifica-tion. It specifies the speed range forwhich thetire is approved.

GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)TheGTW is theweight of a trailer including theweight of the load, luggage, accessories etc.on the trailer.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)The gross vehicle weight includes the weightof the vehicle including fuel, tools, the sparewheel, accessories installed, occupants, lug-gage and the drawbar noseweight, if applica-ble. The gross vehicleweightmust not exceedthe gross vehicle weight rating GVWR asspecified on the vehicle identification plate onthe B-pillar on the driver's side.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)The GVWR is the maximum permissible grossweight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight ofthe vehicle including all accessories, occu-pants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar nose-weight, if applicable). The gross vehicleweight rating is specified on the vehicle iden-tification plate on the B-pillar on the driver'sside.

Tire labeling 325

Wheelsandtires

Z

Page 328: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Maximum loaded vehicle weightThe maximum weight is the sum of:Rthe curb weight of the vehicleRthe weight of the accessoriesRthe load limitRthe weight of the factory installed optionalequipment

Kilopascal (kPa)Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre-sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressureis bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equiva-lent of 1 bar.

Load indexIn addition to the load-bearing index, the loadindexmay also be imprinted on the sidewall ofthe tire. This specifies the load-bearing capa-city more precisely.

Curb weightThe weight of a vehicle with standard equip-ment including themaximum capacity of fuel,oil and coolant. It also includes the air-condi-tioning system and optional equipment ifthese are installed in the vehicle, but does notinclude passengers or luggage.

Maximum load ratingThe maximum load rating is the maximumpermissible weight in kilograms or lbs forwhich a tire is approved.

Maximum permissible tire pressureMaximum permissible tire pressure for onetire.

Maximum load on one tireMaximum load on one tire. This is calculatedby dividing themaximum axle load of one axleby two.

PSI (pounds per square inch)A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.

Aspect ratioRelationship between tire height and tirewidth in percent.

Tire pressureThis is pressure inside the tire applying anoutward force to each square inch of the tire'ssurface. The tire pressure is specified inpounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascals(kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should onlybe corrected when the tires are cold.

Cold tire pressureThe tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked withoutdirect sunlight on the tires for at least threehours andRif the vehicle has not been driven furtherthan 1 mile (1.6 km)

TreadThe part of the tire that comes into contactwith the road.

BeadThe tire bead ensures that the tire sitssecurely on the wheel. There are several steelwires in the bead to prevent the tire fromcoming loose from the wheel rim.

SidewallThe part of the tire between the tread and thebead.

Weight of optional extrasThe combined weight of those optional extrasthat weigh more than the replaced standardparts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). Theseoptional extras, such as high-performance

326 Tire labelingWheelsandtires

Page 329: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

brakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-performance battery, are not included in thecurb weight and the weight of the accesso-ries.

TIN (Tire Identification Number)This is a unique identifier which can be usedby a tire manufacturer to identify tires, forexample for a product recall, and thus identifythe purchasers. The TIN is made up of themanufacturer's identity code, tire size, tiretype code and the manufacturing date.

Load bearing indexThe load bearing index (also load index) is acode that contains themaximum load bearingcapacity of a tire.

TractionTraction is the result of friction between thetires and the road surface.

TWR (Tongue Weight Rating)The TWR specifies the maximum permissibleweight that the ball coupling of the trailer towhitch can support.

Treadwear indicatorsNarrow bars (tread wear bars) that are dis-tributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread islevel with the bars, the wear limit ofá in(1.6 mm) has been reached.

Occupant distributionThe distribution of occupants in a vehicle attheir designated seating positions.

Total load limitNominal load and luggage load plus 150 lb(68 kilograms) multiplied by the number ofseats in the vehicle.

Changing a wheel

Flat tireThe "Breakdown assistance" section(Y page 292) contains information and noteson how to deal with a flat tire.

Rotating the wheels

G WARNINGInterchanging the front and rear wheels mayseverely impair the driving characteristics ifthe wheels or tires have different dimensions.The wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-dent.Rotate front and rearwheels only if thewheelsand tires are of the same dimensions.

! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressuremonitor, electronic components are loca-ted in the wheel.Tire-mounting tools should not be usednear the valve. This could damage the elec-tronic components.Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Rotating front and rear wheels of differingdimensions can render the general operatingpermit invalid.Always pay attention to the instructions andsafety notices in the section on "Changing awheel and mounting a spare wheel"(Y page 328).The wear patterns on the front and rear tiresdiffer, depending on the operating conditions.Rotate the wheels before a clear wear patternhas formed on the tires. Front tires typicallywear more on the shoulders and the rear tiresin the center.If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, youcan rotate the wheels according to the inter-vals in the tire manufacturer's warranty bookin your vehicle documents. If no warrantybook is available, the tires should be rotated

Changing a wheel 327

Wheelsandtires

Z

Page 330: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

every 3,000 to 6,000 miles(5,000 to 10,000 km), or earlier if tire wearrequires. Do not change the direction ofwheel rotation.Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel andthe brake disc thoroughly every time a wheelis rotated. Check the tire pressure and reac-tivate the tire pressure monitor (Y page 313)if necessary.

Direction of rotationTires with a specified direction of rotationhave additional benefits, e.g. if there is a riskof hydroplaning. You will only gain these ben-efits if the correct direction of rotation isobserved.An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicatesits correct direction of rotation.You may mount the spare wheel against thedirection of rotation. Adhere to the timerestriction on use as well as the speed limi-tation specified on the spare wheel.

Storing wheelsStore tires that are not being used in a cool,dry and preferably dark place. Protect thetires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.

Mounting a wheel

Preparing the vehicle

G WARNINGWhen you remove the spare wheel from thespare wheel bracket, the vehicle’s weight dis-tribution changes. If the vehicle is alreadyraised, the jack could tip over. There is a riskof injury.Remove the sparewheel from the sparewheelbracket before lifting the vehicle.

X Prepare the vehicle as described(Y page 292).

X Remove the vehicle tool kit and the jack(Y page 290).

X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rollingaway.

X Remove the spare wheel from the sparewheel bracket (Y page 291).

i Vehicles without a spare wheel or emer-gency spare wheel are not equipped with atire-change tool kit at the factory. For moreinformation on which tools are required toperform a wheel change on your vehiclee.g. lug wrench or jack, consult an author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Securing the vehicle to prevent it fromrolling awayX On level ground: place chocks or othersuitable items under the front and rear ofthe wheel that is diagonally opposite thewheel you wish to change.

X On downhill gradients: place chocks orother suitable items in front of the wheelsof the front and rear axle.

Raising the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you do not position the jack correctly at theappropriate jacking point of the vehicle, thejack could tip over with the vehicle raised.There is a risk of injury.Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jackmust be positioned vertically, directly underthe jacking point of the vehicle.

! The jack is designed exclusively for jack-ing up the vehicle at the jacking points.Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged.

The following must be observed when raisingthe vehicle:RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-specific jack that has been tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz. If used incor-

328 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

Page 331: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

rectly, the jack could tip over with the vehi-cle raised.RThe jack is designed only to raise and holdthe vehicle for a short time while a wheelis being changed. It is not suited for per-forming maintenance work under the vehi-cle.RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill anddownhill slopes.RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it fromrolling away by applying the parking brakeand inserting wheel chocks. Never disen-gage the parking brake while the vehicle israised.RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat andnon-slip surface. On a loose surface, alarge, load-bearing underlay must be used.On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlaymust be used, e.g. rubber mats.RDo not use wooden blocks or similarobjects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, thejack will not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity due to the restrictedheight.RMake sure that the distance between theunderside of the tires and the ground doesnot exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).RNever place your hands and feet under theraised vehicle.RNever lie under the raised vehicle.RNever start the engine when the vehicle israised.RNever open or close a door or the tailgatewhen the vehicle is raised.RMake sure that no persons are present inthe vehicle when the vehicle is raised.

X Using lug wrench:, loosen the bolts onthe wheel you wish to change by about onefull turn. Do not unscrew the wheel boltscompletely.

Pump lever;X Assemble the pump lever for the jack. It canbe found with the vehicle tool kit(Y page 290).

Changing a wheel 329

Wheelsandtires

Z

Page 332: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

X Turn pressure release screw= clockwiseas far as it will go using notch; on thepump lever.Pressure release screw= is closed.i Do not turn pressure release screw= bymore than one to two revolutions. Other-wise, hydraulic fluid could escape.

X Set jack: on solid ground.X Position jack: on the axle carrier tube;of the front or rear axle. Jack: mustalways stand vertically, even on slopes.Make sure that jack: is correctly posi-tioned under axle carrier tube;. The frontor rear axle must sit securely in the recessof jack:.

X Raise the vehicle by pumping in the direc-tion of the arrow until the tire is 1.2 in(3 cm) off the ground at the most.

Removing a wheel

! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on adirty surface. The bolt and wheel hubthreads could otherwise be damaged whenyou screw them in.

X Unscrew the wheel bolts.X Remove the wheel.

Mounting a new wheel

G WARNINGOiled or greased wheel bolts/wheel nuts anddamaged wheel bolt/wheel nut/wheel hubthreads can cause wheel bolts/wheel nuts tocome loose. As a result, you could lose a

wheel while driving. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Never oil or greasewheel bolts/wheel nuts. Inthe event of damage to the threads, contact aqualified specialist workshop immediately.Have the damaged wheel bolts/wheel nuts orhub threads replaced/renewed. Do not con-tinue driving.

G WARNINGIf you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is raised, the jack could tipover. There is a risk of injury.Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is on the ground.

! To prevent damage to the paintwork, holdthe wheel securely against the wheel hubwhile screwing in the first wheel bolt.

Always pay attention to the instructions andsafety notes in the "Changing a wheel" sec-tion (Y page 327).X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contactsurfaces.

X Place the new wheel on the wheel hub andpush it on.

X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fin-ger-tight.

Lowering the vehicle

G WARNINGThe wheels could work loose if the wheel nutsand bolts are not tightened to the specifiedtightening torque. There is a risk of accident.Have the tightening torque immediatelychecked at a qualified specialist workshopafter a wheel is changed.

330 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

Page 333: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

X Open the pressure release screw on thejack using the pump lever (Y page 328) byapproximately one turn.

X Lower the vehicle until it is once againstanding firmly on the ground.

X Place the jack to one side.X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a cross-wise pattern in the sequence indicated (:toA). The specified tightening torque is96 lb-ft (130 Nm).

X Disassemble the pump lever.X Push the jack piston back in and close thedrain plug.

X Use the bolts to secure the faulty wheel tothe spare wheel bracket (Y page 291).

X Stow the jack and the vehicle tools in thevehicle again.

X Check the tire pressure of the newly instal-led wheel and adjust it if necessary.A table with the tire pressures for your vehi-cle can be found on the B-pillar on the driv-er's side.

Wheel and tire combinations

General notes

G WARNINGIf wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,the wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay be damaged. There is a risk of an acci-dent.

Always replace wheels and tires with thosethat fulfill the specifications of the originalpart.When replacing wheels, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmodelWhen replacing tires, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmanufacturerRmodel

G WarningA flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer-ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle.There is a risk of an accident.do not drive with a flat tire. Immediatelyreplace the flat tire with your spare wheel, orconsult a qualified specialist workshop.

! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec-ommends that you only use tires, wheelsand accessorieswhich have been approvedby Mercedes-Benz specifically for yourvehicle. These tires have been speciallyadapted for use with the driving safety sys-tems, such as ABS or ESP®.Only use tires, wheels or accessories tes-ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cer-tain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehiclenoise emissions or fuel consumption, mayotherwise be adversely affected. In addi-tion, when driving with a load, tire dimen-sion variations could cause the tires tocome into contact with the bodywork andaxle components. This could result in dam-age to the tires or the vehicle.Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability fordamage resulting from the use of tires,wheels or accessories other than those tes-ted and approved.Further information about wheels, tires andapproved combinations can be obtained

Wheel and tire combinations 331

Wheelsandtires

Z

Page 334: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-ter.

i The recommended pressures for variousoperating conditions can be found:Ron the Tire and Loading Information plac-ard with the recommended tire pres-sures on the B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table on the inside ofthe fuel filler flap

Observe the notes on recommended tirepressure under various operating condi-tions.Check tire pressures regularly, and onlywhen the tires are cold. Comply with themaintenance recommendations of the tiremanufacturer in the vehicle document wal-let.

Further information on recommended tirepressures as well as tire pressures for spe-cific driving situations, see (Y page 325).

i Notes on the vehicle equipment – alwaysequip the vehicle with:Rtires of the same size on a given axle(left/right)Rtires of the same type on your vehicle ata given time (summer tires, winter tires,all-weather tires, all-terrain tires)

i The following pages contain informationon approved wheels and tire sizes forequipping your vehicle with winter tires.Winter tires are not available at the factoryas standard equipment or optional extras.If you want to equip your vehicle withapproved winter tires, it may be necessaryto obtain wheel rims in the correspondingsize. The size of the approved winter tiresmay differ from the standard tires. This isdependent on the model and the equip-ment installed at the factory.The tires and wheel rims, as well as furtherinformation, can be obtained at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i Not all wheel and tire combinations areavailable at the factory for all countries.

332 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

Page 335: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Tires

G 550

All-weather tires

Tires (radial tires) Alloy wheels

265/60 R18 110V M+S 7.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm)

265/60 R18 110 H M+S5 7.5J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm)

i You can obtain information about tires and tire dimensions that are not listed here at anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

G 63 AMG

Summer tires

Tires Alloy wheels

275/50 R20 113W XL6 9.5J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.97 in (50 mm)

i You can obtain information about tires and tire dimensions that are not listed here at anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Winter tires

Tires Alloy wheels

265/55 R19 109H M+S 9.5J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.97 in (50 mm)

i You can obtain information about tires and tire dimensions that are not listed here at anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Spare wheel

! The spare wheel must be inflated to the maximum tire pressure given in the table on theinside of the fuel filler flap.

i The spare wheel corresponds to the standard tires.

i You can obtain information about tires and tire dimensions that are not listed here at anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

5 Only for vehicles with AMG Sports package.6 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.

Wheel and tire combinations 333

Wheelsandtires

Z

Page 336: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

334

Page 337: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Useful information ............................ 336Identification plates ......................... 336Service products and filling capaci-ties ..................................................... 337Vehicle data ...................................... 344Vehicle data for off-road driving ..... 345Trailer tow hitch ................................ 346

335

Technicaldata

Page 338: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops: (Y page 24).

Identification plates

Vehicle identification plate with vehi-cle identification number (VIN) andpaint code number

X Open the driver's door.You will see vehicle identification plate:.

Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only); VIN= Paint code

Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only); VIN= Paint code

i The data shown on the vehicle identifica-tion plate is used only as an example. Thisdata is different for every vehicle and candeviate from the data shown here. The cor-rect data for your vehicle can be found onthe vehicle identification plate that ismounted on your vehicle.

336 Identification platesTechnicaldata

Page 339: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

: VIN (stamped into the chassis on theright-hand side, when viewed in the direc-tion of travel)

: VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)The VIN can be found in the following loca-tions:Ron the vehicle identification plate(Y page 336)Rstamped into the chassis on the right-handside (when viewed in the direction of travel)Ron the lower edge of the windshield

Engine number

Example: G 550: Emissions control information plate,

including the certification of both federaland Californian emissions standards

; Engine number (stamped into the crank-case)

Service products and filling capaci-ties

Important safety notes

G WARNINGService products may be poisonous and haz-ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.Comply with instructions on the use, storageand disposal of service products on the labelsof the respective original containers. Alwaysstore service products sealed in their originalcontainers. Always keep service products outof the reach of children.

H Environmental noteDispose of service products in an environ-mentally responsible manner.

Service products include the following:RFuelsRLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)RCoolantRBrake fluidRWindshield washer fluidRClimate control system refrigerant

Service products and filling capacities 337

Technicaldata

Z

Page 340: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Components and service products must bematched. Only use products recommendedby Mercedes-Benz. Damage which is causedby the use of products which have not beenrecommended is not covered by theMercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill ges-tures. They are listed in this Mercedes-BenzOperator'sManual in the appropriate section.Information on tested and approved productscan be obtained at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.You can recognize service products approvedby Mercedes-Benz by the following inscrip-tion on the containers:RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51)Other designations or recommendations indi-cate a level of quality or a specification inaccordance with an MB Sheet number (e.g.MB 229.5). They have not necessarily beenapproved by Mercedes-Benz.Other identifications, for example:R0 W-30R5 W-30R5 W-40

Fuel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.

You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

Tank capacityThe total capacity of the fuel tank may varydepending on the equipment in the vehicle.

Model Total capa-city

All models 25.4 US gal(96.0 l)

Model Of whichreserve

All models Approx.3.7 US gal(14.0 l)

Gasoline

Fuel grade! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on the igni-tion if you accidentally refuel with thewrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enterthe fuel system. Even small amounts of thewrong fuel could result in damage to thefuel system and the engine. Notify a quali-

338 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

Page 341: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

fied specialist workshop and have the fueltank and fuel lines drained completely.

! Only refuel using unleaded premiumgrade gasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON.

! Only use the fuel recommended. Operat-ing the vehicle with other fuels can lead toengine failure.

! Do not use the following:RE85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol)RE100 (100% ethanol)RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol)RM30 (gasoline with 30% methanol)RM85 (gasoline with 85% methanol)RM100 (100% methanol)RGasoline with metalliferous additivesRDieselDo not mix such fuels with the fuel recom-mended for your vehicle. Do not use addi-tives. Otherwise, engine damage mayoccur. This does not include cleaning addi-tives for the removal and prevention of res-idue build-up. Gasoline may only be mixedwith cleaning additives recommended byMercedes-Benz; see "Additives". You canobtain further information from any author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

! To ensure the longevity and full perform-ance of the engine, only premium-gradeunleaded gasoline must be used.If standard unleaded gasoline is unavaila-ble and you have to refuel with unleadedgasoline of a lower grade, observe the fol-lowing precautions:ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with reg-ular unleaded gasoline and fill the restwith premium-grade unleaded gasolineas soon as possible.RDo not drive at the maximum speed.RAvoid sudden acceleration and enginespeeds over 3,000 rpm.

Youwill usually find information about the fuelgrade on the pump. If you cannot find the

label on the pump, ask the staff for assis-tance.

i For further information, consult a quali-fied specialist workshop or visithttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol.Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You canrefuel your vehicle using E10 fuel.

As a temporarymeasure, if the recommendedfuel is not available, you may also use regularunleaded gasoline with an octane rating of87 AKI/91 RON. This may reduce engine per-formance and increase fuel consumption.Avoid driving at full throttle and sudden accel-eration. Never refuel using fuel with a lowerAKI.Information on refueling (Y page 147).

AMG vehicles! Only refuel using super-grade unleadedgasoline with at least 98 RON/88 MONthat conforms to European standardEN 228 or an equivalent specification.You could otherwise impair engine outputor damage the engine.

! Premium-grade unleaded gasoline withan octane rating of 95 RON/85 MON maybe used as a temporary measure if the rec-ommended fuel is not available. This mayreduce engine performance and increasefuel consumption. Do not drive at full throt-tle.

! Regular unleaded gasoline with an octanerating of 91 RON/82.5 MON may also beused as an emergency measure if the rec-ommended fuel is not available.Doing so results in noticeably higher fuelconsumption, and the engine power outputis noticeably reduced. Avoid driving at fullthrottle.If only regular unleaded gasoline with anoctane rating of 91 RON/82.5 MON orlower is available, you must have the vehi-cle adapted to this fuel at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Service products and filling capacities 339

Technicaldata

Z

Page 342: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Additives! Operating the engine with fuel additivesadded later can lead to engine failure. Donot mix fuel additives with fuel. This doesnot include additives for the removal andprevention of residue buildup. gasolinemust only be mixed with additives recom-mended by Mercedes-Benz. Comply withthe instructions for use on the productlabel. More information about recommen-ded additives can be obtained from anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you usebranded fuels that have additives.The quality of the fuel available in some coun-tries may not be sufficient. Residue couldbuild up in the fuel injection system as aresult. In such cases, and in consultation withan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, thegasolinemay bemixedwith the cleaning addi-tive recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Youmust observe the notes and mixing ratiosspecified on the container.

Fuel consumption information

H Environmental noteCO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which scien-tists believe to be principally responsible forglobal warming (the greenhouse effect). Yourvehicle's CO2 emissions are directly related tofuel consumption and therefore depend on:Refficient use of the fuel by the engineRdriving styleRother non-technical factors, such as envi-ronmental influences, road conditions ortraffic flow

You can minimize your vehicle's CO2 emis-sions by driving carefully and having it serv-iced regularly.

The vehiclewill usemore fuel than usual in thefollowing situations:Rat very low outside temperaturesRin city traffic

Ron short journeysRin mountainous terrainRwhen towing a trailer

Engine oil

General notes

! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of aspecification other than is necessary to ful-fill the prescribed service intervals. Do notchange the engine oil or oil filter in order toachieve longer replacement intervals thanthose prescribed. You could otherwisecause engine damage or damage to theexhaust gas aftertreatment.Follow the instructions in the service inter-val display regarding the oil change. Other-wise, you may damage the engine and theexhaust gas aftertreatment.

When handling engine oil, observe the impor-tant safety notes on service products(Y page 337).The engine oils are matched to the perform-ance of Mercedes-Benz engines and serviceintervals. For this reason, only use engine oilsand oil filters that are approved for vehicleswith a service system.For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centeror go to the Internet sitehttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com (USAonly).The table shows which engine oils have beenapproved for your vehicle.

Model Enginemodel

MBApproval

G 550 273 229.5

G 63 AMG 157 229.5

i MB approval is indicated on the oil con-tainers.

340 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

Page 343: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Filling capacitiesThe following values refer to an oil changeincluding the oil filter.

Vehicle model Capacity includingoil filter

G 550 2.4 US gal (9.0 l)

G 63 AMG 2.25 US gal (8.5 l)

Additives

! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.This could damage the engine.

Engine oil viscosity

Viscosity describes the flow characteristicsof a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity,this means that it is thick; a low viscositymeans that it is thin.Select an engine oil with an SAE classification(viscosity) suitable for the prevailing outsidetemperatures. The table shows you whichSAE classifications are to be used. The low-temperature characteristics of engine oilscan deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a resultof aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is thereforestrongly recommended that you carry out reg-ular oil changes using an approved engine oilwith the appropriate SAE classification.

Climate control system refrigerant

Important safety notesThe climate control system of your vehicle isfilled with refrigerant R‑134a.The instruction label regarding the refrigeranttype used can be found on the radiator crossmember.

! Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAGoil approved by Mercedes-Benz may beused. The approved PAG oil may not bemixed with any other PAG oil that is notapproved for R-134a refrigerant. Other-wise, the climate control system may bedamaged.

Service work, such as topping up refrigerantor replacing components, may only be carriedout by a qualified specialist workshop. Allapplicable regulations must be adhered to,SAE standard J639 included.Always have work on the climate control sys-tem carried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Refrigerant instruction label

Example: refrigerant instruction label: Warning symbol; Refrigerant filling capacity= Applicable standards? PAG oil part numberA Type of refrigerant

Service products and filling capacities 341

Technicaldata

Z

Page 344: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Warning symbol: advises you about:Rpossible dangersRhaving service work carried out at a quali-fied specialist workshop

Filling capacitiesMissing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

AMG vehicles Capacity

Refrigerant

PAG oil

All other models Capacity

Refrigerant

PAG oil

Brake fluid

G WARNINGThe brake fluid constantly absorbs moisturefrom the air. This lowers the boiling point ofthe brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brakefluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in thebrake system when the brakes are appliedhard. This would impair braking efficiency.There is a risk of an accident.You should have the brake fluid renewed atthe specified intervals.

When handling brake fluid, observe theimportant safety notes on service products(Y page 337).The brake fluid change intervals can be foundin the Maintenance Booklet.Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz according to MB Approval 331.0.Information about approved brake fluid canbe obtained at any qualified specialist work-shop or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced ata qualified specialist workshop and thereplacement confirmed in theMaintenanceBooklet.

Coolant

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Let the engine cool down before you add anti-freeze.Make sure that antifreeze is not spillednext to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean theantifreeze from components before startingthe engine.

! Only add coolant that has been premixedwith the desired antifreeze protection. Youcould otherwise damage the engine.Further information on coolants can befound in the Mercedes-Benz Specificationsfor Service Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g.on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.

! Always use a suitable coolant mixture,even in countries where high temperaturesprevail.Otherwise, the engine cooling system is notsufficiently protected from corrosion andoverheating.

i Have the coolant regularly replaced at aqualified specialist workshop and thereplacement confirmed in theMaintenanceBooklet.

Complywith the important safety precautionsfor service products when handling coolant(Y page 337).

342 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

Page 345: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

The coolant is a mixture of water and anti-freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs thefollowing tasks:Rcorrosion protectionRantifreeze protectionRraising the boiling pointIf the coolant has antifreeze protection downto -35‡ (-37†), the boiling point of the cool-ant in the pressurized system is approx-imately 266 ‡ (130 †).The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentra-tion in the engine cooling system should:Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the enginecooling system against freezing down toapproximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protectiondown to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heatwill not be dissipated as effectively.

Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor in accordance with MBSpecifications for Service Products 310.1.

i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is fil-led with a coolant mixture that ensuresadequate antifreeze and corrosion protec-tion.

i The coolant is checked with every main-tenance interval at a qualified specialistworkshop.

The engine cooling system is filled with cool-ant at the factory which contains antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor that ensures protectiondown to approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).Your vehicle has a range of aluminum com-ponents. Aluminum components in theengine make it necessary to use antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor that has been specificallyformulated to protect the aluminum parts.Failure to use such anticorrosion/antifreezecoolant will result in a significantly shortenedservice life.The coolantmust be used throughout the yearin order to maintain the necessary corrosionprotection and to provide protection fromoverheating. In the Maintenance Booklet, you

can find information on the intervals forrenewal.The renewal interval is determined by thecoolant type and the engine cooling systemdesign. The renewal interval in the Mainte-nance Booklet is only valid if the coolant isrenewed or added to with Mercedes-Benzapproved products. Therefore, only use MB326.0 antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor oranother Mercedes-Benz approved product ofthe same specification.Information on other products with the samespecifications that are approved byMercedes-Benz can be obtained at an author-izedMercedes-Benz Center or on the Internetat http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.If the coolant level is too low, MB 325.0 anti-freeze/corrosion inhibitor should be added.Have the engine cooling system checked forpossible leaks.

Capacity

Model Capacity

G 550 Approx. 11.1 US qt(10.5 l)

G 63 AMG Approx. 14.6 US qt(13.8 l)Low-temperaturecircuit: approx-imately 3.1 US qt(2.9 l)

i Use MB 325.0 or MB 326.0 antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor.

Windshield/headlamp cleaning sys-tem

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate could ignite ifit comes into contact with hot engine compo-

Service products and filling capacities 343

Technicaldata

Z

Page 346: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk offire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

! Only use washer fluid that is suitable forplastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit orMB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluidcould damage the plastic lenses of theheadlamps.

! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water tothe washer fluid container. Otherwise, thelevel sensor may be damaged.

! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFitwasher fluid should be mixed together. Thespray nozzles may otherwise becomeblocked.

At temperatures above freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixtureof water and windshield washer fluid, e.g.MB SummerFit.

X Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 partswater.

At temperatures below freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixtureof water and washer fluid, e.g. MB Winter-Fit.For the correct mixing ratio refer to theinformation on the antifreeze reservoir.

i Add washer fluid concentrate, e.g. MBSummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washerfluid all year round.

Vehicle data

General notesPlease note that for the specified vehicledata:Rthe heights specified may vary as a resultof:- tires- load- condition of the suspension- optional equipmentRthe vehicle length specified includes thefront license plate adapter.

Dimensions and weights

G 550 G 63 AMG

: Upper-edge clear-ance

75 in -78.9 in

(1905mm -2005 mm)

74.5 in -78.4 in

(1892mm -1992 mm)

; Lower-edge clear-ance

26.8 in -30.7 in

(680 mm -780 mm)

26.3 in -30.2 in

(667 mm -767 mm)

= Range ofmovement

36.7 in(931 mm)

36.7 in(931 mm)

344 Vehicle dataTechnicaldata

Page 347: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

G 550

Vehicle length 183.5 in(4662 mm)

Vehicle width includingexterior mirrors

80.9 in(2055 mm)

Vehicle height 76.8 in(1951 mm)

Wheelbase 112.2 in(2850 mm)

Minimum ground clear-ance

8.1 in(205 mm)

Turning radius 44.6 ft(13.60 m)

Gross vehicle weight rat-ing (GVWR)

7054.8 lb(3200 kg)

Gross axle weight rating(GAWR), front

3196.7 lb(1450 kg)

Gross axle weight rating(GAWR), rear

4188.8 lb(1900 kg)

G 63 AMG

Vehicle length 187.8 in(4769 mm)

Vehicle width includingexterior mirrors

80.9 in(2056 mm)

Vehicle height 76.3 in(1938 mm)

Wheelbase 112.2 in(2850 mm)

Minimum ground clear-ance

7.7 in(196 mm)

Turning radius 44.6 ft(13.60 m)

Gross vehicle weight rat-ing (GVWR)

7054.8 lb(3200 kg)

G 63 AMG

Gross axle weight rating(GAWR), front

3417.1 lb(1550 kg)

Gross axle weight rating(GAWR), rear

4122.6 lb(1870 kg)

i GVWR is the maximum permissible grossweight of the vehicle. Gross vehicle weight(GVW) is the vehicle weight including fuel,service products, spare wheel, accessoriesinstalled, load and, if applicable, trailerdrawbar load. The GVWmust never exceedthe GVWR.

i The GAWR is the maximum permissibleaxle weight.

Vehicle data for off-road driving

Fording depth! The depth of water must not exceed thevalue specified in the table. Note that thepossible fording depth is less in flowingwater.

The table shows fording depth: when loa-ded and ready to drive.

Fording depth 24 in (60 cm)

For more information about off-road fording,see (Y page 156).

Vehicle data for off-road driving 345

Technicaldata

Z

Page 348: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Approach/departure angle

G WARNINGIf you drive on a steep incline at an angle orturn when driving on an incline, the vehiclecould slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is arisk of an accident.Always drive on a steep incline in the line offall (straight up or down) and do not turn thevehicle.

For vehicles with steel springs, loaded andready to drive means: a full tank, all fluidsrefilled and the driver is in the vehicle.

:: ;;

G 550 34° 29°

G 63 AMG 27° 27°

For further information about approach/departure angles, see (Y page 161).

Maximum gradient-climbing capabil-ityNote that the vehicle's gradient-climbingcapability depends on the off-road conditionsand the road surface conditions.On good road surfaces the maximum gradi-ent-climbing capability of your vehicle is100%, which corresponds to an approach/departure angle of 45°.Accelerate carefully and make sure that thewheels do not spin when driving on steep ter-rain.

i If the load on the front axle is reducedwhen pulling away on a steep uphill slope,the front wheels have a tendency to spin.4ETS detects this and brakes the wheelsaccordingly. The rear wheel torque isincreased, making it easier to drive off.

For further information about the maximumgradient climbing ability, see (Y page 161).

Trailer tow hitch

Mounting dimensionsOnly have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted at aqualified specialist workshop.

! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,changes to the engine cooling system maybe necessary, depending on the vehicletype.If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,observe the anchorage points on the chas-sis frame.

: Anchorage points; Overhang dimensionFor trailer tow hitches installed at the factory,the overhang dimension including protectivecovering is 35.2 in (895 mm).

346 Trailer tow hitchTechnicaldata

Page 349: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

Trailer loads

G 550G 63 AMG

Permissible trailer load, unbraked 1653 lbs (750 kg)

Permissible trailer load, braked (at aminimumgradient-climbing capability of 12% from a standstill)

7000 lbs (3175 kg)

Permissible rear axle load when towing a trailer (thedrawbar noseweight is not included in the towingweight)

4188 lbs (1900 kg)

Trailer drawbar noseweight

Number of people150 lbs (68 kg)each

Seat occupancy Trunk load Maximum drawbarnoseweight

2 Front seats 220 lbs (100 kg) 562 lbs (255 kg)

3 2 front seats1 rear seat

176 lbs (80 kg) 562 lbs (255 kg)

4 2 front seats2 Rear seats

132 lbs (60 kg) 456 lbs (207 kg)

5 2 front seats3 rear seats

0 lbs (0 kg) 423 lbs (192 kg)

Ball position

Ball position of the ball coupling

When choosing a ball coupling, the dimen-sions stated in the illustration must not beexceeded.

Trailer tow hitch 347

Technicaldata

Z

Page 350: G-Class · G-Class Operator'sManual Orderno.6515417713 Partno.4635845901 EditionA2015 É4635845901mËÍ 4635845901 G-ClassOperator'sManual

348